You are on page 1of 461

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

1

Modeling
Browse Categories
Datum/Point Curve Curve from Curves Curve from Bodies Edit Curves Design Feature Edit Features Associative Copy Combine bodies Trim bodies Align Offset / Scale Detail Feature Surface Mesh Surface Sweep Flange Surface Edit Surface Synchronous Modeling Edit Facet Bodies Appendices

View a topic
What are you looking for in Modeling? Part modeling overview Features created by sweeping Feature modeling Expressions Part Navigator Update Browser Modeling Preferences Path Selection Copy, Copy Feature, and Paste Using Double-Click to Edit Objects Object specific pop-up menus On-screen input boxes in Modeling Input Points from a File Primitives Move Object Part Families Boolean operations Feature Group Group DesignLogic Modeling video examples

A.What are you looking for in Modeling?
How do I?  Create a datum coordinate system  Create a sketch  Extrude a solid body  Revolve and unite a section drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING
        

2

Create a conic edge blend Create surfaces Create expressions Edit features Create an assembly Create product and manufacturing information (PMI) Create a drawing Validate the design Manage files with Teamcenter Don't see what you are looking for?
  

Concepts  Part modeling overview  Feature modeling overview  Synchronous modeling

Click Help.

above to search

Click above to browse Help. Find Siemens training

B. Part modeling overview
The modeling process you follow to design a part is the same whether you design stand-alone parts or design parts within an assembly. The decisions you make at each step depend on your design goals.

These are some of the main steps in the process of designing parts in NX. Start with a new file. 1. Create an empty file for your part model. 2. Add the empty file to the assembly as a new component to design the part within an assembly context. Design parts within an assembly to create proper fit and alignment to other parts, and to avoid unintentional interferences. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

3

Select the History mode. Define the History mode at the top of the Part Navigator

Use history mode to model parts when parameter changes are expected. This is the traditional mode for highly engineered parts. Use History-free mode when you do not know what types of changes to expect, for example for a conceptual design. This mode is often used with Synchronous Modeling commands.

Define your modeling strategy.

Decide if your final part will be a solid body or a sheet body. This will impact your modeling strategy of which features to build first

Solid bodies are preferred for most models because they provide an unambiguous definition of the volume and mass. Sheet bodies are sometimes used for manufacturing or simulation. They may also be used as trimming tools for solid body models

Create datums. Create datum coordinate systems and datum planes to position modeling features. These datums form the beginning of a chain of associativity for the features you add next.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Create features. Create features according to your modeling strategy.

4

1. Start with design features such as extrude, revolve, or sweep to define basic shapes. These features typically use sketches to define sections. 2. Continue adding other features to design the model. 3. Finish with detailed features such as edge blends, chamfers, and draft to add the final details.

C.Features created by sweeping
Features created by sweeping are characterized by moving geometry through space. The geometry being swept is referred to as section geometry. Swept features can be classified into two types:

Vector driven (extruded, revolved)

Guide/spine/path driven

You can sweep either a single section or a set of section geometry.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

5

You can also create swept features with offsets.

You can create a solid body or sheet body from the section geometry, based on the body type setting at creation.

Solid

Sheet

The commands that create features by sweeping include:
      

Extrude Revolve Styled Sweep Swept

Sweep along Guide Variational Sweep Tube

Associativity Features created by sweeping are fully associated with the section or guide geometry.
 

If you delete associated parent curves, such as a sketch that has been extruded into a solid body, you are notified that other features are affected and the solid body is also deleted. If you select a solid face or datum plane to trim or limit a swept feature, the resulting feature is associated to the face or datum plane. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

6

For example, if you select a face to limit the end of an extrude feature, the extrude feature will update when you change the shape or location of the face.

If you select a line, edge, or datum axis to define the direction of extruded feature or the axis of a revolved feature, the resulting feature is associated with the selected reference.

Closed swept features If the guides form a closed loop, the first section can be selected again as the last section to create a closed body.

1. 2. 3. 4.

First section Second section Last section Closed guide

1. Section geometry
You can use the Type Filter to control what type of geometry can be selected for the section:
  

Curves Curve features Sketches

  

Edges Faces Section Segments

You can use the Curve Rule to quickly define the section with fewer number of selections:
   

Single Curve Connected Curves Tangent Curves Face Edges

   

Sheet Edges Feature Curves Region Boundary Curves Infer Curves

After you select the objects for the section, the ends are highlighted by an asterisk if the section is not completely closed.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

7

2. Section geometry and intersections
When defining sections for sweeping, you can select contiguous or non-contiguous geometry.

If you select a set of non-contiguous geometry that extends beyond intersection points, you will get an self-intersection error message.

Stop at Intersection used in conjunction with the Curve Rule setting lets you signal which portions of the section curves to use.

Non-contiguous curves that do not extend to the intersection point can only be used if the gaps are within the distance tolerances specified for the feature. The Extrude and Revolve commands will produce multiple sheet bodies if the gaps are greater than the distance tolerance. How section curve connections are interpolated depends on where section geometry is selected. If there is any ambiguity in the selected curves, asterisks alert you to selection decision areas. Your subsequent selections determine the section. Example 1

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Example 2

8

3. Swept feature error scenarios

Avoid creating a situation where vertices or edges of section geometry create a body of zero thickness.

You will be alerted to possible error situations by display of an asterisk where problem occurs.

If you continue, the operation will be completed, ignoring problem areas and you will get an error message alerting you of a self intersecting section.

When using swept features for boolean operations such as a Subtract or Unite, be sure the feature actually comes in contact with the model.

Cylindrical extrusion and revolve share mass; Unite operation successful.

Cylindrical extrusion and revolve share mass; Subtract operation successful.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

9

Cylindrical extrusion and revolve do not share mass; any Boolean operation will be unsuccessful. 'Tool Solid Completely Outside Target Solid' error message is issued.

  

Specifying closed and opened curves together as one section, or curves intersecting each other, will yield error messages: o 'Gaps in strings or multiple loops'. o 'Selected objects will result in a self intersecting section'. If the selected objects are not contiguous and the gaps are not within the distance tolerance, you may receive a 'The section contains multiple loops' message. Avoid situations where a swept feature would intersect itself if created. This usually happens with revolve features whose swept axis is within the boundaries of the section geometry. You will get an 'Unable to Trim' message if a potential swept feature cannot be intersected with the start or end limiting geometry.

D.Feature modeling
Feature modeling is the process of adding features to your model to create the design. Features that you add are listed in the Part Navigator. You typically start a design with datum features, such as datum coordinate systems and datum planes. These can be used to position other features, such as sketches. Working in History mode, the software maintains associativity between features as you create them. For example, when you create a sketch and revolve it, the software maintains associativity from the sketch to the revolve feature. To see the parent and child relationships of a feature, select the feature in the Part Navigator.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

A feature's parents enable it to recall the inputs and the operation that were used in its creation.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 10 In this example. Feature (3). and the child is said to be "parametric." which is Associative or "associated with" its parents. reparenting and so on. Features can be described by the following characteristics:      The inputs of a feature are its "parents" and the resulting feature object is the "child. If you edit the sketch. 1. a revolve feature." If any object is modified. Other Common Terms Used in Feature Modeling Listed below are the most common terms used in Feature Modeling. an edge blend. and feature (1). The magenta color indicates that feature (0). bodies. the edge blend also updates. siblings. The parent-child analogy can be extended further within NX. Body A class of objects containing solids and sheets. a datum coordinate system. are both parent features of the revolve feature. and it is reasonable to speak of ancestors. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Feature Modeling The term "Feature " is used generally in NX to describe a class of objects that have defining parents. Features include all solids. is selected in the Part Navigator. its associated children are updated (regenerated) to reflect the change. Parents can be geometric objects or numerical variables (known as Expressions). When the revolve feature updates. feature (2). In the case of numerical variables. primitives and certain wireframe objects. The combination of parents and the creation operation is sometimes known as the "history" of an object. the revolve feature updates because it is a child of the sketch. the numbers are known as "parameters" of the child object. and so on. a sketch. orphans. is highlighted in blue to indicate that it is a child of the revolve feature. descendents.

Editing is done by changing the swept creation parameters or by changing the sketch. This method also gives you total control over the editing of that body. 11 Creating Solid Bodies You can create solid bodies by:  Sweeping sketch and non-sketch geometry to create associative features (see Swept Features). Example If the spline is being used as a guide curve and is long and nearly straight and the default distance tolerance (0.00000039 inches.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Solid Body A collection of faces and edges that enclose a volume. Sweeping sketch and non-sketch geometry lets you create a solid body with complex geometry. o Any linear value less than or equal to 0. Creating a solid body using primitives results in a simple geometry solid body.01") is used.  Creating primitives for the basic building blocks.00001 millimeters is considered to be zero for operations on bodies. the spline is approximated using a large arc whose radius could be outside the maximum part size limit of 1000 x 1000 x 1000 meters. it is to your advantage to create the model from a sketch. o Tolerances can have an impact on how bodies get created in modeling space. You can avoid this problem by increasing the distance tolerance. centered about the origin of the absolute coordinate system.00001 millimeters or 0. because primitives cannot always be parametrically edited. such as holes and slots to provide further detail. Sheet Body A collection of one or more faces that do not enclose a volume. Modeling space  All bodies must be within a 1000 x 1000 x 1000 meter cube. Editing the sketch causes the swept feature to update to match the sketch. however.  The smallest linear value that can be applied to a body is 0. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can use primitives when you do not need to be concerned with editing the model. Making changes to primitives is more difficult. Face A region on the outside of a body enclosed by edges. then adding more specific features. Generally.

you must choose to either create a new Operations target solid or perform a Boolean operation with respect to an existing target solid. This includes both solid bodies and sheet bodies. J. Undo Allows you to back up. start points.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Feature Parameter Customer Defaults 12 Use File→ Utilities→ Customer Defaults to specify defaults for Modeling feature parameters and dialogs. the solid body is updated automatically. to an existing previous state. limit points. where several objects are to be swept. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . see the Customer Defaults Help. curves Guide Curves used to help define the path for the sweep operation. Unite Lets you join the new feature with a target solid. Basic Terminology Feature Refers to all solids. separated from other faces by strings of edges. Object Selection In some options. This means that when you edit the curves. Boolean When you create primitives and swept features. Features created using the Thru option of Face Association define vectors in I. Face A region on the outside of a body. and primitives. Body A collection of faces and edges. For further information. Object Selection Defining Points Defining Vectors Throughout all Feature options you are required to select objects. curves Common Concepts The following options and topics appear throughout Feature Modeling options. made up of a collection of faces and edges that do not "close up" to enclose a volume. Otherwise. you must select the body you want to identify as the target. Boolean Operations When you create primitives and swept features. bodies. All direction. the system selects the target solid for you. Undo appears on the main menu bar under Edit. and destination vectors are defined using the Vector Constructor. You can enter I. J. K components mapped to the Absolute Coordinate System. Sheet A body with zero thickness. you can choose to perform a Boolean operation with respect to an existing target solid. reference. K components as real values or expressions. one step at a time. The new solid body will contain the combined volume of the target solid and the new feature. associativity to sketches or nonsketch curves is created with the swept objects or with the path in which they are swept. Target Solid The solid body on which you create new features. and on the MB3 popup menu. including origin points. Section Curves that you sweep to create a body. Solid body A collection of faces and edges that "close up" to enclose a volume. such as Extrude or Revolve. and endpoints are defined using the Point Constructor. All points. If there is only one solid body displayed.

and then setting all faces to a single color. A row defines the U direction of the sheet body. The grid consists of lines that create a net conforming to the curvatures of the body. affected faces of the solid body may have different colors in a high quality shaded image. The density of the U-V grid has no relationship to the mathematical accuracy of the body. If this occurs. both bodies are restored Color and Shading Variances It is possible that while performing operations on solid bodies. If shading of a solid body fails.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 13 Subtract Lets you remove the new feature from a target solid. use Analysis→ Examine Geometry to see if the body is valid. When you attempt to subtract or intersect a swept feature to a solid body. each curve you select defines a row. Here are a few things to keep in mind with Boolean operations:     When you attempt to add a swept feature to a solid body. To properly display a complex body requires many grid lines. if you are creating the sheet by specifying a collection of points or poles. a row is simply a collection of points running in roughly the same general direction. Invalid solid bodies may not shade. If the new feature does not come in contact with the current target solid and can be a standalone solid body. If you perform an undo. choose to Create a new target solid. while a flat body requires very few. Rows and Columns Many of the sheet creation options use the concept of rows. The grid is only a display feature that provides a visual representation of the body. Similarly. You can easily correct this by performing an Edit→ Object Display→ Type→ Face→ Select All. if you are creating the sheet through a collection of curves. If you perform a Boolean operation between a view dependent solid body and a model solid. ensure that the feature you defined intersects the target solid. For example. The shaded image then displays correctly. This defines the V direction. See the figure below. Bodies are pictorially represented by a U-V grid. some faces may acquire colors different from that of the parent solid. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Intersect Lets you create a solid body from material that is common to both the new feature and the target solid. the target solid controls the resultant body. The density of the grid is user-defined and may be modified to best represent the body. A column is defined by the set of points of a curve running roughly perpendicular to the rows. ensure that the feature you defined comes in contact with the target solid.

When creating sheets. the degree) Increase the number of patches for the sheet body Patches A patch is a portion of a sheet. you can:   Increase the number of points per patch (that is.it actually refers to the degree of the polynomial that is used to describe a surface. Degrees Degree is a mathematical concept . Information Options You can check the validity of a free form feature with the Analysis→ Examine Geometry options. Using higher degree sheet bodies reduces the chance of transferring data to other systems which may not support them. Using more patches to create a sheet gives you more localized control over the curvature of the sheet. Lower degree sheet bodies are more pliable. we recommend that you use cubics (a degree of 3) when creating sheets. Poles roughly correlate to the degrees of freedom of the sheet. Any change to the geometry or expressions used to create a smart body cause the body to regenerate. the sketch geometry). You can then edit the feature by editing the original strings (that is. then use that resulting body to create a feature. Use Analysis→ Minimum Radius to find the smallest radius of curvature (including tiny hooks or reversals in the surface) in a face or collection of faces. However. you can use sketch geometry to create a free form body. tolerances and parameters). the creation of a high degree sheet through many points may lead to unpredictable results. Any solid features created from smart bodies are updated as well. The degree of a sheet (in either direction) must be between 1 and 24. and tend to follow their poles much more closely. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . NX uses similar concepts to define sheet bodies. Each sheet body has a degree in the U direction and a degree in the V direction. Creating lower degree sheet bodies results in faster performance during subsequent operations such as machining and display. For example. Thus you can create multiple levels of associativity. Limiting the number of patches improves the performance of downstream applications and produces a smoother sheet. A higher degree sheet is "stiffer" in the sense that you have to move a pole a long way to produce any appreciable change in the shape of the body. You can use Information→ Feature and Information→ Object to display information about a free form feature. Also. it is best to minimize the number of patches used to define the sheet. To increase the degrees of freedom for a sheet.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 14 You can change the grid display for all subsequently created bodies using the Grid Lines options on the Modeling Preferences dialog. Smart Bodies Smart bodies are bodies that "remember" their creation data (strings.

including Slot. the type of body (solid or sheet) created depends on the Body Type modeling preference. you can:   Suppress the blend. that control the location of a feature relative to some existing solid body geometry or datum planes. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Positioning Features. Parameter Values. Through Curve Mesh. When you create a free form feature. Ruled and Section free form feature creation options. The feature can later be positioned or moved using options found under Edit→Feature. You cannot create a nonmanifold solid body by. The horizontal reference defines the length direction of those features that require a length. Parameter Values Each feature type requires you to enter values which define the dimensions necessary for that particular feature. or one of the end section strings is not planar. Through Curves. Positioning Features You can position a feature (or a sketch) relative to existing solid body geometry or datum planes. Solid Creation 15 When using the Swept. for example. a. Pocket. if the Body Type is set to Solid Body. Unite. and the selected section strings form closed loops. and the first and last section string are planar. but one or all of the selected section strings do not form a closed loop. There are two restrictions when it comes to Boolean operations:   You cannot split a target body into two pieces by subtracting another body. and reorder the new feature to come before the suppressed blend. a solid body is created. using Edit→ Feature→ Suppress Feature.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Sheet vs. Create. you must specify the Boolean Operation used to combine the two bodies . Horizontal Reference.g. Subtract or Intersect. If it is necessary to position a feature using geometry that has been modified creating a conflict (e. and Pad. the type of body created is displayed in the Status line. a sheet body is created. a blended edge). Associativity Rules Horizontal Reference Some features require a horizontal reference. Note For these options. which defines the XC direction of the feature coordinate system.. You can select an edge. you are not required to select a Horizontal or Vertical Reference during the positioning of the feature . or datum plane as the horizontal reference. Note If the Body Type is set to Solid Body. position. For example. This is done by creating positioning dimensions (sometimes called dimensional constraints). attempting to Unite two sheet bodies.it is already defined. These are sometimes referred to as the feature's parameters.Create. You can complete a feature without constraining its location by choosing OK before choosing a dimension type. datum axis. face. Boolean Operation If another body already exists (whether a sheet body or a solid body) and you create a free form feature.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  16 Unsuppress the blend. You can change the feature's location by:   Editing the feature's positioning dimensions. using Edit→ Feature→ Unsuppress Feature. The dimensions lock the feature at a desired location. The location of the feature can be changed by simply editing the positioning dimensions that constrain the feature (see the figure below). Note Editing the solid body does not change the location of a feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Moving an unconstrained feature.  Positioning dimensions create an associativity between the feature and the target solid. The feature remains a thru feature whenever the target solid is changed (see the figure below). Associativity Rules The following associativity rules apply to the creation of features:  A feature created using the Thru option is associated to the faces selected as the thru faces.

Position a feature or sketch You can position a feature or sketch relative to existing curves. you must select one of the objects from the target solid. Note For Boss features. datum plane. 2. or datum and the other from the feature or sketch. When you position a boss or hole. Select the objects to dimension. the Perpendicular positioning method is the default. Note The types of curves that are selectable may be limited. you must: 1. that control the location of a feature or sketch relative to some existing curves. 2. there are times when the Positioning Method dialog displays. solid geometry. This is done by creating dimensional constraints. known as positioning dimensions. curve. When selecting the objects to dimension. Enter the new value for positioning. Choose the positioning dimension type. datum planes. based on the type of positioning dimension being defined. 4. Positioning dimensions are associated to the geometry used to create them. If you move or delete geometry. solid geometry. or datum axis (see the figure below). the system automatically selects the object on the feature (the arc center) for you. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  17 Controlling positioning dimension values with expressions. 3. Note You only see those positioning methods that are valid for the feature operation on which you are currently working. Positioning Methods When you are creating features and sketches. and datum axes. For Boss features. To position a feature or sketch. to let you position the feature or sketch relative to other geometry. There are nine dimension types that can be used to constrain the location of a feature. the associated positioning dimension is also moved or deleted. you can edit and rename the positioning dimensions directly on the Positioning dialog. a. Choose OK to reposition the feature or sketch.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 18 Selection of objects varies with the type of dimension you wish to create. creating a conflict (such as with a blended edge). between the edge's midpoint and the intended point. For those positioning dimensions that require the selection of points.e. A Horizontal Reference defines the horizontal direction for dimensioning the feature's location. When using a face or datum plane for a Horizontal or Vertical Reference. the points must be part of the solid body (i. or toroidal face by first choosing Identify Solid Face. For more information. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . using Edit→ Feature→ Unsuppress Once you have added all the constraints needed to locate the feature or sketch. a solid face. If you select the edge (bold) between the midpoint and point B. or a datum axis or datum plane.. you can dimension to a cylindrical. you must select their endpoints. position. allowing you to change the location of the feature at any time. A Vertical Reference defines the vertical direction for dimensioning the feature's location. If it is necessary to position a feature using geometry that has been modified. point A is selected. Horizontal or Vertical Reference When creating horizontal and vertical dimensions. For example. you must select an edge that connects with that point. in the figure below:   If you select the edge (bold) between the midpoint and point A. you can:    Suppress the blend. using Edit→ Feature→ Suppress Create. midpoints. point B is selected. you may be required to define a Horizontal or Vertical Reference by selecting a linear edge. see the section on Edit→ Feature→ Edit Positioning Dimension. For example. the feature is repositioned. if you want to use edges for a horizontal dimension. the reference is formed by the intersection (a curve) of the selected face or datum plane and the selected planar placement face. conical. endpoints. Identify Solid Face In some cases when using points for positioning. When specifying an endpoint. tangency points). and reorder the new feature to come before the suppressed blend Unsuppress the blend. arc centers. The positioning dimension can be edited.

by adding a blend). This accepts the current state of the feature or flips the feature to the other side of the datum plane. the thru hole is created as shown by the dashed lines. the system creates a curve that matches that edge. any Horizontal or Vertical positioning constraints associated with the reference are also deleted. the Horizontal or Vertical Reference has already been selected and is not requested at this time. the constraint is maintained to the original edge (see the figure below). you can see a thru hole being created from the datum plane to the outer face of the cylindrical pipe. The system displays the tool direction (#1). the thru hole is created as shown by the solid lines. reorder the blend after the feature that is positioned relative to the edge (with Edit→ Feature→ Reorder). If you are positioning a sketch. Note Whenever a feature whose edge/face was used as a horizontal or vertical reference is deleted. In the figure below. Techniques for Positioning Methods Editing Edges Used For Constraints When you select an edge of the target solid to constrain the feature to it. you position a feature relative to that edge and try to unsuppress the blend. you will get a warning that the positioning dimension will be deleted. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . it constructs a default reference. If you create a blend and then suppress it. You can accept the viewed direction or flip it. after suppressing the blend. This curve is linked to the target solid. the edge that was blended is redisplayed. You should cancel the unsuppress operation. Directional Axis (Machining) When positioning a feature or sketch on a datum plane. If you accept the displayed tool direction.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 19 If the system determines that no references can be selected as a Horizontal or Vertical Reference. If you choose to flip the displayed tool direction (#2). If. b. If you modify the edge (for example. Note You cannot position solid primitives using positioning dimensions. a machining (tool) direction axis is displayed. and then unsuppress the blend.

Those relationships that need to remain constant or be controlled should be constrained. the feature's location relative to the selected target edge is maintained. you may need to use more than one constraining dimension to fully constrain the location of a feature or sketch. You should decide which dimension best suits your design. the feature's location is constrained using two dimensions. the positioning dimension is created and displayed. you should consider the relationship of the feature to the target solid. in the figure below. Note NOTE: When constraining a feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Full Constraints When creating positioning dimensions for use in relative positioning. For example. the location of the feature to the target solid can be controlled using positioning constraints. The initial dimension indicates the positive value direction for the constraint. If the solid body is edited.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 20 Positive Direction of Constraint Once you have selected the geometry for a constraint. A feature or sketch can be constrained using any combination of dimensions. In other words.

Create the boss and select the curve as the target edge for a Point onto Point positioning dimension (see the figure below). Position to a Curve When prompted for the target edge. in many cases you can select an existing curve. Positioning to a curve can be useful when you want a feature's position to remain relative to another feature's position on a different part. and rectangular pads and pockets can be positioned by their centerlines as well as by their edges. and Parallel dimensions. Vertical.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 21 Position to a Datum When positioning a feature or sketch to a datum plane or axis. such as a Perpendicular dimension or a line to a line. if you wish the position of a boss on one part to match a hole's position on a second part. grooves. you cannot use positioning dimensions that constrain a point to a point. the system projects the datum plane until it intersects with the planar placement face of the target solid. For example. such as a Horizontal. which is used to constrain the feature or sketch. then project the curve onto the first part. The centerlines appear only when the feature can be positioned or repositioned (for example. You can only use dimensions that constrain a line to a point. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . just after feature creation or after choosing Edit→ Feature and selecting the feature). first create an EXTRACTED_CURVE feature from the circular edge of the hole. The intersection between the datum plane and the target face forms a line. such as a Parallel at a Distance dimension. If a datum plane is selected. Position by Feature Centerlines Slots.

when prompted for the target edge. as shown in the figure below. Note You can also select any existing curve. It is located halfway between the top and bottom edges of the groove. when prompted for the target edge. This is done by selecting a target solid edge and then a tool (i. Note A user defined feature must be created using one of the Boolean operations under Attachment Method in order for Add Positioning Dimension to be available when the UDF is imported.e. A single circular centerline appears for a groove. To position to a centerline. which flips the user defined feature about its placement tool face 180 degrees.. you only need to specify a horizontal dimension along the axis. on or off the same part. No positioning dimension menu appears. and are deleted when the feature is deleted. and is equal to the diameter of the groove. you only have to position the groove along the axis of the cylindrical target solid. See the figure below for an example. Position a UDF Positioning a user defined feature (UDF) works the same as positioning any other feature. Centerlines are considered part of the feature. Note You can also select an existing curve. Position a Groove When positioning a groove. Each of the other features has two centerlines. do not dimension to the end arcs of the slot. select the target solid edge and then the centerline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 22 If the feature is modified or reattached. its centerlines are automatically updated. the groove) edge or centerline. on or off the same part. Position a Thru Slot When positioning a thru slot. one horizontal and one vertical. except you have an additional option: Reverse Normal. Instead.

d. or is 90 degrees from the Horizontal Reference. Horizontal The Horizontal method creates a positioning dimension between two points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . or is 90 degrees from the Vertical Reference. A Horizontal dimension is aligned with the Horizontal Reference. Vertical The Vertical method creates a positioning dimension between two points.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 23 c. A Vertical dimension is aligned with the Vertical Reference.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING e. f. there are two possible tangency points. When you create a parallel or any other linear type dimension to a tangent point on an arc. or to the curve. or any existing curve (which need not be on the target solid). This constraint is used to dimension linear distances that are not parallel to the XC or YC axis. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . It takes 3 "ropes" to locate this feature. a pad is dimensionally constrained on a block. In the figure below.g. existing points. arc center points. at the specified distance. You must select the arc near the desired point of tangency. You can also position to a datum by selecting a datum plane or datum axis as the target edge. Parallel 24 The Parallel method creates a positioning dimension which constrains the distance between two points (e. It only locks the point on the feature or sketch to the edge on the target solid. You can imagine a parallel dimension as a rope joining two points at a specified distance.. entity endpoints. or arc tangent points) and is measured parallel to the work plane. Perpendicular The Perpendicular method creates a positioning dimension which constrains the perpendicular distance between an edge of the target solid and a point on the feature or sketch.

on or off the target solid) to be parallel and at a fixed distance apart. for these features. h.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 25 Note For Boss and Hole features. you can edit and rename the positioning dimensions directly on the Positioning dialog. In addition. Angular The Angular method creates a positioning constraint dimension between a linear edge of the feature and a linear reference edge/curve at a given angle. the Perpendicular positioning method is the default. g. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Parallel at a Distance The Parallel at a Distance method creates a positioning dimension which constrains a linear edge of the feature or sketch and a linear edge of the target solid (or any existing curve. This constraint only locks the edge on the feature or sketch to the edge on the target solid or the curve at the specified distance.

The 146_36' angle was created by selecting the lines at the positions marked B. This constraint only locks the point on the feature or sketch to the edge on the target solid. normal to the edge or curve selected on the target solid. one at each end and one at the exact center. The 33_25' angle was created by selecting the lines at the positions indicated by A. This positioning dimension causes the feature or sketch to move from its selected point. or associated datum plane. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . until the point is on the edge. i. Point onto Point The Point onto Point method creates a positioning dimension the same as the Parallel option. but with the fixed distance between the two points set to zero This positioning dimension causes the feature or sketch to move so that its selected point is on top of the point selected on the target solid. Each line has three control points. The figure below shows two lines with their center control points highlighted by asterisks (*). As you can see. j.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 26 Be sure to select the lines to dimension at the proper location. The angle created depends on which side of the center control point you select. selecting the smaller line at a position left of the center control point creates the complementary angle. Point onto Line The Point onto Line method creates a positioning constraint dimension the same as the Perpendicular option. but with the distance between the edge or curve and point set to zero Note The selected point must be on the feature and the line must be on the target solid as an edge. curve.

This positioning dimension causes the feature or sketch to move from its selected edge perpendicularly to the edge or curve selected on the target solid. This constraint only locks the edge on the feature or sketch to the edge/curve on the target solid. Note If you choose a curve when prompted for the target edge. the curve must be linear and must be on the target solid. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . but with the distance between the linear edge of the feature or sketch and the linear edge or curve on the target solid set to zero. Line onto Line The Line onto Line method creates a positioning constraint dimension the same as the Parallel at a Distance option.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 27 k.

These special features for Chain Curves are available with Join Curve. You can auto-chain an entire profile by double-clicking a segment of the chain of curves or edges. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Offset Curve. You can also select edges from different faces for the chain. the system selects the entire sketch or projected curves. the direction of the chain proceeds along the path with the least angle. solid edge. A string can consist of one or more objects. where it is 2 strings. When a chain encounters multiple edges at vertices. if one curve of a sketch or projected curves are selected. solid face. You can use this option to create a bridged free form feature between two existing solid bodies.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 28 3. You can mask the selection of the objects using any of the following: Solid Face Solid Edge Curves Chain Curves Lets you select all the edges of a face at once as objects of a string. For certain functions in Curve and Feature creation. Lets you select a chain of sketch or non-sketch curves. as objects of a string. Lets you select single edges of a solid body as objects of a string. Swept. or point. By default. Each object can be a curve. endpoint of a curve. String Selection Several of the free form feature creation options require that you select curve outlines known as strings. Chain Curves also support the added following features:    You can use Chain Curve to select not only curves but edges for selection profiles. sketch and non-sketch curves alike. Lets you select single curves. The maximum number of objects in one string is 5000 and the maximum number of strings in one free form feature is 150 with the exception of the Ruled body.

Chain Curves lets you select a chain of sketch or non-sketch curves. Point selection is available for Ruled free form feature creation only if the Alignment Control is set to Parameter or ArcLength. and Sweep Along Guide. This can be helpful in determining whether a set of linked curves actually are connected without gaps.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 29 Point Ruled Surface. You must start selecting all the section strings from approximately the same location (from the same end). to prevent the resulting body from twisting (see the figure below). Lets you select a single point as a string. indicating the start of the string selected. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . or the first section string of the Ruled option. Extrude. Tube. Note The system stops selecting chained curves if there is a gap between any of the curves. Revolve. You can select a contiguous chain of curves without selecting the end of the chain by selecting the start curve and choosing OK. Point lets you select a single point as a string. Selecting Section Strings As each section string is selected. the system automatically continues to the next string selection. The direction vectors are used to line up the section strings. a direction vector is displayed. During the selection for f'irst and/or last primary strings of Through Curve Mesh option. as shown in the figure below. Through Curves. you can select an existing point. Through Curve Mesh. When you select a point as a string. as an entire string. Section. or endpoint of a curve.

If you choose to respecify the direction vector. a high curvature. Otherwise. Note The starting location of each section string is point aligned. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . rectangular section string to rectangular section string). smoothed corner body is created to approximate these sharp corners. and Ruled free form feature options.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 30 Objects in each section string can be selected in an arbitrary order. if the selected section strings contain any sharp corners. When selecting faces as section strings. it is recommended that you use the By Points alignment at the sharp corners to preserve them. as shown in the figure below. For Swept. The selected objects are sorted and ordered based on the first object selected.00 for an exact fit of the free form feature to the sharp corners.. the starting object is the edge of the face closest to the location where you selected the face. You can start selecting new objects for the next section string. you can do one of two things:   You can respecify the starting object of the previously selected string by simply selecting an object within that string. which is convenient for section string of similar shape (for example. You can also define the tolerance to be 0. or Boolean operations) may fail due to the curvature. A direction vector is displayed to signify the starting object (the first object selected in the string). Through Curves. Any subsequent feature operations performed on these corners or faces (e. The system will create separate faces joining at the edge formed by the sharp corners. After you have selected all the objects for the desired string. To terminate the selection of a string.g. the system erases the old vector and displays the new direction vector. choose OK. blends. hollows.

tangent objects were required but not defined. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Such objects may split the string into multiple pieces. for certain V direction strings (i.e.e. the following error message is displayed.. Try reselecting the outer loop in another location away from the inner loop. Invalid String Objects The following error is displayed if a string does not contain at least one object or because the tolerance is greater than the string length. Missing Face Referenced by String Object The following error is displayed if an edge(s) selected as a string is missing during updating. the first object selected in the string) on the outer loop is too close to an inner loop (string). String Objects Not Closed The following error is displayed if the starting object (i. Tangent Objects Required For V Direction String The following error is displayed if you are using By Points alignment and the number of objects in a string is not greater than one. Missing Edge Referenced by String Object Unable to Reference Edge The following error is displayed if. guide string and cross strings). String Objects Not Coplanar Coplanar String Objects Required With Inner Loop The following error is displayed if the selected string does not form a closed loop (this is required for Bounded Plane). 31 All the selected objects in a string must be contiguous and all inner loops are ignored except with the Bounded Plane option.such faces/edges cannot be used as strings.. Aligned By Points Required More Than One Object In A String The following error is displayed if the selected string is not coplanar (this is required for Bounded Plane). Gaps in String or Multiple Loops The following message is displayed if the selected faces/edges contain split edges . Split Edges are Found The following error is displayed if a face(s) selected as a string is missing during updating. Invalid Starting Object On Inner Loop Of A String The following error is displayed if invalid string objects are detected. Otherwise.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Error Messages The following error messages may be displayed during string creation.

edges and faces into collections with rules defining how a feature can use them. letting the feature update properly. If you later change the members in a collection during an edit. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . because it followed the Tangent Faces rule. Selection Intent makes selection more efficient. For full details. Selection Intent in Feature Modeling Selection Intent is a Selection Bar tool that lets you select and group multiple curves. the draft would have failed to update during this edit. All Modeling commands that use Selection Intent have customer defaults for the initial Selection Intent rules. its rules remain intact. The following figure shows a model with a draft that was created with the Selection Intent Tangent Faces rule.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING String Contains No Object 32 The following error is displayed if the selected starting object of a string is a sketch reference line/arc. see Snap Point options on the Selection Bar in the NX Fundamentals help. and increases the robustness of updates during edits by relying on higher level objects that capture your intent (instead of low level curves and topology). and the right view shows the model after material and new faces are subsequently added. Note For full details on Selection Intent rules. Snap Point options Snap Point options are found on the Selection Bar to aid you in specifying points and point locations during the creation and editing of geometric objects. When Material is added to the model on the left. Starting Curve Cannot Be A Reference Object a. You choose which rules to use based on what you intend the feature to do. 4. see Selection Intent rules and options on the Selection Bar in the Fundamentals help. the draft still updates correctly (right) If the draft had been defined with single-selected faces instead of the Tangent Face rule. The left view shows the original model. Even though some of the original faces were replaced. the draft still updated successfully. The following figure shows a second example where Selection Intent allows a draft feature and a hollow feature to both update successfully when the model is edited.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Open the creation or edit command for a feature that supports Selection Intent. when the type is set to: o On Curve Vector Specify Plane option. Simple use of Selection Intent In this simple example.right) Where do I find it? Selection Intent options appear on the Selection Bar for commands that support it. 2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 33 Selection Intent allows successful update after changes to the model (before . Selection Intent available with option and type settings Selection Intent is available from within a command for certain option and type settings.  Specify Point option.left. If the rule is for a chain. Use Selection Intent during object selection 1. after . the Connected Curves rule is used to select a connected string of non-associative curves in one step for the section of a Sweep Along Guide feature. b. and then the objects that relate to it. select the base or seed object first. when the type is set to: o  Tangent Plane c. a. when the type is set to either of the following: o Point on Curve/Edge  o Intersection Point Specify Vector option. Choose the rule for the collection needed by the feature you are creating (such as Face Rule or Curve Rule).

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 34 Connected Curves rule selects a string of curves for the section The Tangent Curves rule is used to select 3 spline curves for the section guide. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Tangent Curves rule selects 3 spline curves for the section guide This results in the Sweep Along Guide feature shown below.

Result after trimming away the section fillets and removing one guide spline d. trimming away the curve fillets from the section and one of the splines from the guide results in a successful update.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 35 Resulting Sweep Along Guide feature If you edit the section or guide curves used by this feature. it will still update correctly. Selection Intent collection building When you need to use chaining to build a section or collection of curves or edges for the feature you are creating: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . For example.

Selection Intent begins building the profile or section based on the currently specified Curve Rule and More options. For more information about the representation of Selection Intent in the detailed view of the Dependencies panel in the Part Navigator. On selecting a curve or an edge. Smart deselection works for all curve and face rules. see Selection Intent . Open the Draft dialog box and do the following: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . During subsequent updates. Note For specific procedures on creating a draft see Draft procedures. Depending on the context. In every subsequent update. under Section. except for the Tangent and Connected curve rules. Complete the chain using the middle mouse button. in the Chain folder. they are removed from the chain. see Dependencies panel. it is inferred that you want to remove these specific items from the chain. The cursor changes to Curve Collecting to show you are in wireframe collection mode. the entire chain is deselected. The detailed view of the Dependencies panel in the Part Navigator shows the start and end limits for Stop at Intersection in the Intersection Limits subfolder. Edge or Any. This ensures that during an update the chain can honor the deselections with similar intent. unless you select it while creating another chain. For merged chains. 1. For examples of using Selection Intent to build a section profile. Specify a region with Selection Intent The following example shows how regions can be used with Selection Intent to create a Draft feature. if you deselect objects while editing a chain. Selection Intent smart deselection Once a chain is selected with a specific rule. the first selected curve or edge becomes the seed object. The chain includes all curves and edges currently visible. based on the needs of the feature. Smart deselection captures the intent of deselecting the chain. if the objects are captured again. you can deselect specific objects from the chain. in the Chain folder under Section. The detailed view of the Dependencies panel in the Part Navigator shows the removed objects in the Removed Objects folder. letting you choose the next segment of the chain. normal rule propagation is done and the stored deselected objects are removed from the section after updating the chain.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING     36 The Curve Rule is available for collecting and section building.  For sections using the Stop at Intersection or Follow Fillet. if you deselect a single object. e. The Type filter on the Selection Bar changes to Curve.Building A Section. multiple directions are encountered and the chain stops. Chaining proceeds until no other chaining candidates can be found or. When you start a chain. any object that you deselected in the earlier chain is removed. smart deselections are inferred in the following ways:  For face chains and direct edge chains.

Selection Intent switches the Face Rule to Single Face. we select the top. Select a Stationary Plane for the draft. Click the middle mouse button to complete the region.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 37 a. In the figure below we select three boundary faces. as shown below. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 3. b. 2. 4. Set the Face Rule to Region Faces and select a seed face. to let you select one or more region boundary faces. select From Plane. For the Type. In this example. one that will not move and from which the draft will propagate. horizontal face. Note For an explanation of Face Rules. Once you specify the seed face. see Selection Intent options on the Selection Bar. from which the draft faces are automatically selected.

f. or delete any of the faces. If you later edit. the original Selection Intent rule remains effective. Click OK or Apply to create the Draft feature. See Selection Intent rules and options and Selection Intent Collection and Section Building for more information. as shown below when the source faces are changed. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Building a section in Selection Intent This page shows some simple examples of how to build a section using Selection Intent's section builder options. and the draft updates correctly. add.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 38 5.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Draft body feature If we edit. Tangent Curves to add four collections of curves (1 through 4) to the section (shown below in red). Tangent Curves rule to select a profile of curves The collection of section curves produces the draft body shown below. add or delete any of the section curves. the tapered body still updates correctly (below).[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Draft example 39 In the figure below we use the Curve rule.

Modifying Selection Intent collections and sections You can modify members of a Selection Intent collection the same as you would a list of selected objects. Each collection stops at an intersection. Tangent curves rule to select a collection of curves g. In the figure below we use the Curve ruleTangent Curves with the Stop at Intersection option to add four collections of curves (1 through 4) to a section (shown below in red). giving you the opportunity to specify which way the section should go next. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 40 Editing the section curves later (1) allows the draft body to update successfully Extrude example Following is a simple example of how you can build a section with Selection Intent's section builder to create an extrusion.

due to rules requiring multiple object selection. Replacement Assistant If you edit a collection of objects that is used by a feature. with the new object becoming the seed. the software may not always be able to map the old objects into the new without possibly breaking associativity to dependent objects.Start Chain Between . the Replacement Assistant may appear to let you may map the objects during the modification. Curve Collecting Face Collecting Region Specification Chain Between . For example. 41 Shift/Delay/Click Opens a QuickPick cursor and a dialog box to let you select between the object and the collection that includes that object (All of Intent). If you then right-click one of the selected objects in that collection and change the rule to Tangent Curves. h. the Replacement Assistant may appear to let you resolve the new mappings. the initial collection is replaced by a new one that uses the new rule. the old objects may not map properly to the new. Using right-click to redefine a collection You can right-click an object in a collection that you have selected with Selection Intent and redefine the collection's intent rule.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Shift/Click click Deselects Intent objects and removes them from the collection. In that case. Selection Intent cursors As you initiate a Selection Intent action.End 5. Using right-click option menus to change the intent method also changes the currently active method in the toolbar. The intent rules on the right-click option menu will not always match those on the selection toolbar. Selects objects and adds them to an Intent collection. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . when you select an initial edge with the Face Edges rule you build a collection of faces using that rule and based on that first edge. Removing objects from a collection causes the loss of the rule and the collection becomes a simple list of objects. the cursor changes to signal the collection mode and the current operation. In these cases. If you edit a collection that is used by a feature.

Map objects during modification When you click OK to complete the editing of a Selection Intent section for a feature that supports the Replacement Assistant. The Replacement Assistant is also used during interpart and WAVE modeling. if you edit the section of an Extrude feature and the software determines that the new section objects may need to be identified in relation to the objects they are replacing. The new extruded body. the Replacement Assistant appears at the conclusion of the edit. after the mappings are completed using the Replacement Assistant. Two selection intent Connected Curves collections deselected during edit. Two new Connected Curves collections selected.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 42 Use the Replacement Assistant to define the equivalences between faces and edges of the current object and the replacement object. a. A Selection Intent Mapping with Extrude The original Extrude created with a number of collections using the selection intent Connected Curves rule and the Stop At Intersection option. and you are asked if you want to provide the mapping between the old and new sections. For example. an information dialog box may display stating that your edit has the potential of affecting downstream features. Where do I find it? The Replacement Assistant dialog box appears automatically when your edit of features clarification of how new objects introduced in the edit are to replace old removed objects. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

2. and a two-view display shows the original section displayed on the left and the new section on the right.849537 (Extract Region(7) Angle Toler) 45. Select the objects you want to map in the left view (old-section view). their formulas. 1. or between parts in an assembly. You can insert expression names in the formula strings of other expressions. you can express the thickness of a bracket in terms of its length. You can map as many of the objects as you want (you do not have to map all objects). 3. see Replacement Assistant in the Assemblies Online Help. those the software creates. For each new object you select. in other cases. Click OK to complete the mapping of objects from old to new. Note For details and more information. the Replacement Assistant may appear automatically at the conclusion of an edit. If the length of the bracket is altered. There are two basic kinds of expressions:   User expressions. For example. Expressions created automatically by the software are named with a number. such as the dimensions of a feature or a sketch. functions. a question mark in the Replacement Assistant changes to a green check mark. User expressions can have plain language names.0 45 . the thickness automatically updates.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 43 If you decide to do the mapping. an entry is added to the Replacement Assistant with a question mark next to it. Expressions Expressions are arithmetic or conditional formulas that define some characteristics of features. The formulas within expressions can include a combination of variables. preceded with a lower case "p". and symbols. such as "p53". Select the objects you want for the new mappings in the right view (new-section view). E. Here are some examples of expressions. and their resulting values: Expression name Additional software expression name width length p39 p16 Where do I find it? drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Formula 22 5*width Value 22 110 (Flange(6) Bend Allowance Formula) (p26+(p64*0. You can use expressions to control the relationships between the features of a part. For each object you select. operators.44))*rad((-p24)) 18. You can use expressions to define and control many dimensions of a model. numbers. those you create (also known as user defined expressions). the Replacement Assistant dialog box opens. Software expressions.

click parameter entry options Dialog boxes Formula.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Menu Part Navigator 44 Tools→Expression Right-click an expression in the Part Navigator. You could then use this expression to define the dimensions of a block by entering "width" in the appropriate parameter entry field. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . User expressions User expressions are any expression that you create yourself with the Expressions dialog box. you could create an expression named "width" with a formula string of "5.0". Note If you compare the results of your expressions you may in some cases see apparent inaccuracies between known values.4 2*aln // forechain By editing the formulas. either in the Main panel or Details panel. You can create expressions based on measurements and interpart references.5*width) else (2) base_block_height 16 base_block_length 1 base_block_multiple 8 base_block_width base_block_height*block_multiple (base_block_length/2)*a_multiple block_heighta block_length block_multiple BLOCK(6):Size X div aln railwidth a_multiple/2 base_block_width*block_multiple block_length 3+sqrt(aln) 5. you can edit your model parameters. For example. and choose Edit in Expression Editor and choose From supported Modeling dialog boxes. as with "p53". 1. This may be due to normal system rounding and the nature of floating point arithmetic when used with double precision values. 2. Here is a sample of some user-defined expressions: Expression Name Formula width 22 length 5*width diameter width/3 position if (width<=2)(0. Software expressions Expressions created automatically by the software are named with a number and are preceded with a lower case "p".

is for the diameter of a simple hole feature with a time stamp of 4: p5 (SIMPLE_HOLE(4) Diameter) System expressions are automatically created during many Modeling operations:     Sketch Dimensioning . the system expression p5. Expressions options Listed Expressions Categories Lets you choose a category to filter the expressions displayed in the list window. shown below. Named Shows only expressions that you have created and those you have not created but have renamed. but it is not part of the actual name.An expression is created for each positioning dimension. 3. Expression names are shown in the list window with no regard to case. Feature Creation . Unused Expressions Shows only those expressions that are not being used by any objects in the part file.Expressions are created for the creation parameters of many features (such as extrusion start and end limits.. p2=3.5 You can rename system expressions. and hole depth).e. Select from the following categories: User Defined Shows only expressions that you have created yourself. revolution angle.An expression is created for each dimension (i. Positioning of a Feature or Sketch . For example. Here are some examples of system expressions: Expression Formula p28 (Extrude(14) Start Limit) 15 p3 (Bridge Curve)(6) Match Point 2) 21 p6 (Studio Surface 2X2(11) Angular Tolerance) 0. Object Parameters Shows only those expression parameters for a feature selected in the graphics drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 45 The Expression dialog box may display additional parameter text for system expression names. Creation of Mating Conditions or Assembly Constraints. This additional text follows the name and describes the feature and parameter option it is associated with.5436).

. When this conflict occurs.. Reads a specified text file containing expressions into the current part file. the system either keeps the existing expression or replaces it with the expression in the text file.‖ for each quote (―).. All Shows all expressions in the part file..mypartq. You may therefore wish to avoid using this option with interpart expression filenames that contain these characters. The string is evaluated based on the filter category type (that is. Note   Spreadsheet Edit Legacy parts with Geometric expressions are not listed in the spreadsheet. The spreadsheet substitutes the string ―q. Filter by Name 46 Used with the adjoining filter box to let you enter or select a string of characters to show a subset of expressions by their names. Transfers control to the NX spreadsheet function. Measurements Shows all measurement expressions in the part file.. When control is transferred to the spreadsheet function. and a question mark (?) for each colon (:) it encounters. Filter by Formula Used with the adjoining filter box to let you enter or select a string of characters to show a subset of expressions by their formula.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING window or Part Navigator. You control how expression name conflicts are handled with one of the options shown drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .??myexpression. Attribute Expressions Shows all part and object attribute expressions present in the part file. Import Expressions from File There may be times when you have expressions in the text file that have the same name as expressions already in your part file. Filter by Value. Filter by Value Used with the adjoining filter box to let you enter or select a string of characters to show a subset of expressions by their values. For example. or Filter by Formula) You can enter an asterisk wild-card to filter the list further. NX is idle until you exit from the spreadsheet. Filter by Name. an interpart expression with the formula ―mypart‖::myexpression would appear in the spreadsheet as q.. Filter box Lets you enter a filter string. which you can use to edit expressions.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Note Legacy parts with Geometric expressions. With either of these methods. Enter into the text file all of the names of the expressions that you want to delete. just the name). the system looks at a text file that contains a list of expressions and deletes any expression in the part file that has the same name. If there are conflicts (expressions with the same name) found during the transfer. (You do not have to enter the entire expression. an error message appears. Replace Existing 47 Supersedes the existing expressions that have the same name with expressions contained in the text file. Keep Existing Choose if you do not wish to replace the existing expressions by any expression that has the same name in the text file. the expression in the active part is kept and the expression in the text file is ignored. the expressions may be listed in any order. This option may be used in one of the following two ways:   Export the list of expressions to a text file. As an example. Each expression that is encountered in the text file is deleted from the Expressions List in the part file. When you choose this option.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING below. In the text file delete all of the expressions that you want to keep. the expression in the imported text file replaces the existing expression in the active part. you can choose Accept to keep the new list or Undo to restore the original set of expressions. When you use the Keep Existing setting. Delete Imported The Delete Imported option lets you remove multiple expressions from your part file. Create an empty text file. Import the list using the Delete Imported option. if an expression of the same name exists in your active part and in the text file being imported. If you choose Keep Existing. This setting lets you import only those expressions that do not conflict (do not exist in both files). Note If the expression is used by the model or by another expression. Import the list using the Delete Imported option. one of the following scenarios occurs:   If you choose Replace Existing. it is not deleted. such as p0=distance(40). After the transfer is complete. the system reads the specified text file and attempts to add each expression to the list.

All in Assembly Tree Exports all the expressions in the work part plus all of its components (the assembly tree).0 will become p0=90. p0=angle(12) that evaluates to 90. Note Comments are not included when an expression is linked to another part drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Value . If the formula uses a different unit than the expression. Choosing this option displays a file dialog prompting you for the name of the text file.0 in the exported file).Shows the units for the expression or measure. If the Type is set to String. Type — Shows the expression type. If the Type is set to Number. as defined with the Type option. 48 For additional information and format rules. Note Legacy parts with geometric expressions in a file that is being exported will become "dumb" expressions (for example. the value is a number. see Expression Text File Format. the value is a string.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING cannot be imported.Shows the unevaluated right hand side of the expression formula for each expression. Units . the value is converted to the expression unit. see Expression Text File Format. or by double-clicking the Comment column.Shows the comment for an expression if one has been added by right-clicking and choosing Edit Comment. Expressions list box The list box displays a detailed. Lets you write the expressions in the part to a text file. All files used for importing/exporting expressions possess the file extension ". an angle expression.The name of each expression or measure. All Parts Exports all the expressions in all parts in the session. selecting features to display their expressions in the list. You can filter the expressions that appear in the list using the Listed Expressions drop-down menu and by entering filterstrings. You can browse the graphics window and Part Navigator. if they exist. Comment . Columns The Expressions list box is divided into the following columns:       Name . If the expression is a measure the label (Measure) displays.Shows the value derived by the formula or the measure data. Formula . sortable list of the expressions in the part file. For additional information and format rules.exp". You can choose what expressions to export using the following options: Export Expressions to File Work Part Exports all the expressions in the work part.

Dimensionality Use Dimensionality options to specify the kind of dimension to use for new expressions. Number Creates expressions using a numeric data type. A Measures icon appears if the expression is a measure. as with the number of holes in an instance array). Icons An icon may display with an expression or measure:     A Lock icon appears next to an expression that is locked. The most common types of dimensions used with Modeling expressions are:     Length Distance Angle Constant (that is. which only occurs when an overriding expression has been loaded in the session. For example. you may get a units inconsistency error. you would set the dimensionality of C to Area and the units to mm^2. edit. All types of dimensions specified by the Units Manager are shown in the Dimensionality options list. and controls Use these fields to create. if you create a new expression formula named C that multiplies together two existing length expressions (A and B. the expression text is shown in light blue and the expression formula is not editable. Both the dimensionality and the units you specify for an expression formula must be correct with regard to the input and the expected output. The sqrt function. A Read-only Icon appears if the expression is read-only. Otherwise. dimension-less. Create. edit and query expressions and measures. For all expressions with icons except Lock and Knowledge Fusion. the Dimensionality options list to the right of the Type box becomes available. You must also make sure that the function arguments in your expressions have the correct dimensionality. When Number is the selected Type. The Knowledge Fusion adoption icon appears if the expression is bidirectionally controlled from the Expression editor and Knowledge Fusion. Type Specifies the expression data type. for example. 49 You can sort the listing by the contents of a column by double-clicking MB1 on a column title. created in millimeters) to get an area (C=A*B). special functions. fails with the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING through an Interpart Reference (an interpart expression).

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . See Units Manager in Advanced Simulation Help for further information. the function succeeds. a color name. such as a part description.) You cannot change the dimensionality of a system generated expression.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 50 argument sqrt(x) when used with the Length dimensionality. the following string expression: NAME mick FORMULA y2k+lg+yr+prep+terra When used with these string expressions: NAME lg prep terra y2k yr FORMULA ” Light” ” from” ” Home” ”2000” ” Years VALUE ” Light” ” from” ” Home” ”2000” ” Years” Yields this value: “2000 Light Years from Home” The string expression's formula can contain any combination of function calls.‖ Use this data type to represent an opposing condition. You can use string expressions to direct a part's non-numeric values. The formula for a string expression can be constant. or constants that result in a string when the formula is evaluated. such as ―Text entry‖. For example. or other string attributes. But. String expressions return a string instead of a number. Boolean Creates an expression to support alternate logical states using Boolean values of ―true‖ or ―false. or it can be calculated. operators. because the software cannot calculate the square root of a Length dimensionality unit. String Creates an expression using a string data type. a vendor name. and are defined as double-quoted sequences of characters. if you write the function as sqrt(x*in) for inches or sqrt(x*1mm) for millimeters. (Note that sqrt(x) succeeds when the dimensionality is Constant instead of Length. such as the suppression status for the Suppress by Expression and Component Suppression commands.

except under certain conditions. and K coordinates. Name Lets you specify a name for a new expression. You cannot use any other special characters in an expression name. Formula syntax: Point(0. Both the left hand side (LHS) and the right hand side (RHS) of drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Formula syntax: Vector(0. Expressions names can be in the user‘s supported international language (locale). but can be composed of alphanumeric characters. you could parametrically control a Revolve axis location. You can use the Extended Text Entry option to conveniently specify list expressions with comma separated values of any DesignLogic data type as list expressions using braces {}. Note   Expression names are not case sensitive.0. and Z dimensions. Expression names must begin with an alphabetic character. List Use this data type to streamline NX DesignLogic interactions and provide additional functionality capable of handling a wider variety of design tasks.0) Use this data type in commands that require the specification or reference of a position by expression. For example. ?. Point Creates an expression by defining a position using X. or the minimum distance location of an associative Measure Distance. J. such as Instance Geometry.0. such as -. * or !. Vector Creates an expression by defining a direction using Cartesian I.0) Use this data type in commands that require either the input or the output (measurement) of a direction. Y. Expression names can include embedded underscores. change a name for an existing expression.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Integer Creates an expression using a numerical count without units. you could parametrically control an Extrude direction or a Revolve axis direction. 51 Use the this data type in commands that require a numerical count or quantity. See Expressions name case sensitivity for details. and to highlight and display an existing expression for edit. For example.

bypassing the Manual Input option. You cannot use the editor to change existing expressions. Opens a window where you can edit expression strings and add Insert function and Insert Conditional statements. although you can create new ones. You can enter simple units in a formula. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and are unavailable for change. Any necessary unit conversions display in the Value column of the list window. the unit also changes. Note that file names are not internationalized in NX. If you change the dimensionality type. Click the Functions button to insert a function. Select an expression from the list window to display its formula. This level of protection has been put in place to maintain standard values taken from the thread lookup tables. a warning message displays. Specifies the unit for the selected dimensionality. Unit Available only when the Type is set to Number and the Dimensionality to something other than Constant. If you use different or inconsistent dimensions in the formula.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 52 an expression support internationalized name strings. You can also enter statements in scientific notation. You can still edit these expressions by using Edit→ Feature→ Parameters. Tip Expressions created for Symbolic Threads that have the Manual Input option off are restricted in the Expressions dialog box. For example: 2e+5 for 200000 2e-5 for 0. You can fill the Formula field the following ways:      Enter an expression formula using the keyboard. Formula Use this field to edit the formula for an expression selected from the list. and rightclick Insert Formula. Click the Create Interpart Reference button to insert an expression from another part.00002 Note When you open the Expression dialog box from a function's parameter entry option. you can only edit the formula of the expression you are presently creating. The value you enter must contain a positive or negative sign. or create a reference for an interpart expression. Click one of the Measurements buttons to specify an object measurement from the graphics window and insert it into an expression. Extended Text Convenient when specifying list expressions with comma separated values of any Entry DesignLogic data type as list expressions using braces {}. such as "3mm". enter the formula for a new expression. as well as DesignLogic functions and interpart expressions.

double-click it or use the OK button to open the Function Argument dialog. where you can specify a parameter for the function. Caution Note that when you use string categories in your formula. Spreadsheet Edit. You can also choose a category from the drop-down menu to display a list of functions in a category.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 53 Accept Edit Creates a new expression or finalizes the results of an edit on an existing expression. and Export Expressions to File options. You also can click the Help About Selected Function button to open the help page for the function from the NX Knowledge Fusion Language Reference. The function and any parameter value you assign to it are inserted into your expression formula. the result of evaluating the formula must be a number. and then select the desired function. including the expressions list box and all options. You can Insert functions into your expressions at the cursor position in the Formula box. Import Expressions from File. For detailed information on the Function Argument dialog. and the Listed Expressions. After selecting a function you can get two levels of help on the function: Simple definition help displays for the function at the bottom of the dialog. More Options Opens the Knowledge for Designers Insert Function dialog box. The expression and its value are updated in the list box. Insert Function Use this dialog box to find the standard or user-defined function you want to insert into your expression formula. see Insert drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Presents the entire Expressions dialog box. You can separate functions in the Formula field with standard mathematical operators. Clicking this button accepts the creation or edit changes.      Less Options Functions You can enter a keyword and use the Find button to search for a function name. This is the same dialog used by Knowledge Fusion. Function Argument Dialog When you find the function you want in the function list. Cancels the edit or creation operation and clears the Name and Formula boxes. Reject Edit Reduces the size of the Expressions dialog box and simplifies it by removing the expressions list box.

You can use selection intent and section building to measure the length of a set of curves between intersection points. radius of gyration.Uses the Analysis Arc Length function to measure the arc length of a curve or line. Obtains measurement values from objects in the graphics window for your expression formulas. Lets you create attribute expressions.Uses the Analysis Distance function to measure the minimum distance between any two NX objects such as points. If you use this option to create a distance measure while specifying a feature parameter (for example. See the Math Functions and Legacy Functions topics in the Knowledge Fusion Help and Best Practices for details on functions. or between a line and a planar object. the measure becomes embedded within the expression for the feature parameter. an expression for it is created and inserted at the cursor position of the expression formula you are editing. mass. Measure Angle . between two planar objects (planes. planes. Use attribute expressions when you need to refer to a part or object attribute as a dynamically updated expression. The system creates multiple expressions for area and perimeter. Measurements When you obtain a measure.Uses the Analysis Measure Faces function to calculate area and perimeter values of body faces. For detailed help on any of these measurement options.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 54 Function / Method and Function Arguments Dialog in the NX Knowledge Fusion Dialogs Help. If you select an existing attribute expression from the list. using the Parameter Entry Option menu). Datum Planes or Planar Faces). YC plane. The system calculates the three-dimensional distance and the twodimensional distance relative to the XC. and faces. curves. which you can use to reference part or object attributes.Uses the Analysis Angle function to display angle measurements between two curves. In addition. Measure Bodies . Measure Distance . If the part or object attribute is later modified the expression is updated automatically. See Query an embedded distance measure expression for instructions on how to query an embedded measure expression. the Formula box is drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Reference Expressions .Uses the Analysis Measure Bodies function to obtain volume. edges. it returns the closest point on each object and the delta distances in absolute and work coordinate systems. see the NX Analysis help. Measure Area . Measure Length . centroid and surface area of solid bodies. bodies.

You can either select from this list. in which case you will have to first remove the referencing expression. or use the Choose Part File option to select a part from disk. "x=comp::len"). As with the part attributes. You can select a part attribute and edit it‘s input for the right hand side of the expression (RHS). Note For more information on attributes and the attributes dialog box. When you choose this option.g. Create Interpart Reference Once you have selected a part. You can also create an interpart expression by simply typing it into the text field (e. Reference Object Attribute . You can control this behavior using the option button on the Expressions List dialog showing the list of expressions in the part you have selected. unless it is being referenced by an expression. You do not have to use the Create Inner-Part Reference option to create an interpart expression. see Interpart References. You can change a reference to refer to a new part.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING unavailable. Lets you create an interpart reference. and you will need to select an object to populate the list. A reference to the expression is then inserted in the formula text field at the cursor location. Lets you control the external references from a part file to expressions in other parts. Select an expression from the list and choose OK. Choosing this option displays a dialog containing a list drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .Opens the attributes dialog box. For more information. For example. you can select an object attribute of the model and edit it‘s input for the right hand side of the expression (RHS). the dialog lists the parts available in your session. Reference Part Attribute . select a part from the graphics screen. or delete all references in the work part. Select Object . it adds "in(inch_part::length)" to the text field. delete a selected reference. the reference automatically inserts the units operator around it. If no object was selected. see the topics in the Work with Objects section of the Fundamentals help.Lets you select an object for the attributes dialog box. object attributes appear in the list. the object attribute dialog box is empty. using the following syntax: <part>::<expression> If the part to which you are referring contains different units from the work part. 55 You can remove attribute expressions using the Delete option. all of the expressions in that part are listed. If an object was already selected before clicking this option.Opens the attributes dialog box showing the model‘s part attributes. if a metric part refers to an inch part.

Choose Delete All References. The following would result: x=10y=5. If you change an expression in a partially-loaded part. Choose Change Referenced Part.5x=other_comp::p12 Note that no update of the model occurs in this case.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Edit Interpart of all of the parts containing expressions referenced from the work part. When you change your work part. Lets you open any partially loaded parts in your session. you cannot change its solid bodies. you must use the Open Referenced Part option. given the expressions in the previous example. Choosing this option displays a list of partially loaded parts that you can fully load. For example. the system does not load the full part file for each component part. a warning message is displayed stating that the system has substituted numeric values for the missing expressions. a warning message is displayed informing you that in order to see the full effect of the changes. When using interpart expressions. choose Edit Interpart References and select the part "comp". The contents of the list are controlled by the options at the top of the dialog. the system ensures that the full part file is loaded so you can make changes to the part file. to save memory. When you choose OK. Choose the part "comp_2". The All drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . If there are not. Delete Reference Use this option to delete the interpart references to a selected part. When a part is partially loaded. Delete All References Use this option to delete all interpart references in the work part and replace them with constant numeric values. Open Referenced Parts When you first open an assembly. the expression is updated to: x=comp_2::leny=comp_2::widthx=other_comp::p12 This assumes that there are expressions named "len" and "width" in the new part. References You have the following options to edit interpart references: Change Referenced Part 56 This option lets you change all expressions which refer to the part that you have selected to refer to a new part. You are prompted to select a new part file to reference. The value of the expressions involved does not change. if you have the following expressions: x=comp::leny=comp::widthx=other_comp::p12 Choose Edit Interpart References and select the part "comp". it is possible to change an expression that governs the solid model in a component part without that component being fully loaded. The system replaces all interpart expressions with constant numeric values. only the information needed to display the component part is loaded. For example.

Delete You cannot delete an expression that is in use. Updates the values of expressions that you may have made in an external spreadsheet. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . sketch. such as by a feature. The user requirement is a conditional statement (for example. For example. You can have multiple spreadsheets that are referenced in the Expression dialog box. This option works with those ug_excel_*** functions that can be used in the Refresh Values Expressions dialog box. This only happens if "p17" is not used by any other expression. ―> 50‖). The All Referenced option lists all partially loaded parts whose expressions are referenced by the work part. ―p2 > 50‖). Note The software may automatically delete any expressions no longer in use. In addition. deleting that slot causes "p17" to be deleted as well. etc. Lets you remove a selected user-defined expression. Provides the following requirements options: Requirements New Requirement — Starts the Ad Hoc Requirement dialog box that lets you create a user requirement. you can basically use this button to ―refresh‖ those Spreadsheet expressions that read or write data to the spreadsheet. Note Requirements are not included when an expression is linked to another part through an Interpart Reference (an interpart expression). You can either select a single part from the list. Choose Existing Requirement — Starts the Check Requirements dialog box that lets you add a new check for an expression under an existing requirement. see the Check Requirements Help User Requirement overview. Note For further details. A check placed under this requirement specifies an expression to compare to that conditional statement (for example. mating condition. if the software automatically creates the expression "p17" for the width of a slot.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 57 Modified option lists all partially loaded parts whose expressions have been modified. Because NX does not understand when you have changed any from External information in the spreadsheet. you can set a preference under Load Options to force all component parts to be fully loaded. The functions specify which spreadsheet you will be using. The software only deletes expressions that it automatically created. or use the Load All Parts In List option to load all of the parts in the list box. You can also use the Assembly Navigator to ensure that parts are fully loaded. You can delete multiple expressions to by using the Control key with MB1 to select them.

In the Name box. and the expression is ready to edit. 4. Create an expression 1. To create the expression. o Change the dimensionality and units of user-defined number expressions. 6. The current value/formula automatically displays. 3. . 5. Type a value or formula string in the Formula box. 5. o Choose a Unit type for the expression. o Right-click another expression in the Expressions list box and choose Insert Name to insert that expression's name at the cursor position in the Formula box (you can also double-click an expression name in the list box to do the same thing). Choose Tools→Expression to open the Expressions dialog box. press Enter or click Accept Edit The expression is added to the Expressions list. o Edit the expression formula by inserting or typing new values or formula strings in the Formula box. A B 1 Maximum Length 75 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 2. You can do any of the following: o Rename the expression by editing the existing name or typing a new name in the Name box. To finalize the edit. The Expressions dialog box opens. either Number or String. In the Type box. 2. 6. 4. If you know the name of the expression to edit. or press Enter. click Accept Edit The expression updates in the list box. 3. The expression's name and formula appear in the Name and Formula boxes. The value in cell B3 in the following spreadsheet is assigned to an expression named thickness. If you chose Number for Type. choose the type of expression to create. Make your edit changes. you can: o Choose a Dimensionality for the expression. Access data from an external spreadsheet This example shows how to use a function to access data from an external spreadsheet. you can type it in the Name box and tab to the Formula box. o Cancel the edit by clicking Reject Edit . Edit an expression 1. Choose Tools→Expression. o Right-click another expression in the Expressions list box and choose Insert Formula to insert that expression's formula at the cursor position in the Formula box.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 58 4. type a name for the expression. Click the expression to edit in the list box.

5. if you made five expression edits.xlsx". 4. From the list of functions. In the Expressions dialog box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Click OK. the value of the expression is 2. . "B3" ) 11. 7. click Specify a spreadsheet 8. updated the model. 3. select spreadsheet. from the Or Choose a Category list. 2. clicking Undo once would reverse the last three edits. type B3 10. Note If the spreadsheet is modified. ug_cell_read( "D:\spreadsheets\size_data. select ug_cell_read. In the Function Arguments dialog box. In this example.5 2. 6. and then made three more edits. type thickness.5 59 1. 7. In the Insert Function dialog box. Click Functions . you can update the expression by clicking Refresh Values from External Spreadsheet in the Expressions dialog box. The Expressions dialog box is displayed and the function appears in the Formula box. Click OK. Navigate to your spreadsheet and click OK. Choose Tools→Expression. Undo an expression operation Click Undo on the Standard Toolbar to undo any of the following types of changes you may have made while working in the Expression dialog box:     Update a model Delete an expression Create an expression Any edit done on an existing expression Undo reverses all of the changes made back to whichever of the following occurred last:     The first edit A model update All edits after a model update Choosing OK (only for Tools→ Expression) For example. Verify the value of the expression and click OK. 5. 9.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 2 Width 3 Thickness 15. in the Name box. In the Specify a Cell box.

and the ruler displays the original measure. 2. 8. as well as expressions loaded in the current session by choosing Information→Expression. Expressions syntax operators There are several types of operators that you may use in your expression formulas. including components. 1. Name longstrut Formula 2*bra // standard 10. The Measure Distance dialog box opens in the edit mode. 9. Listing expressions You can list your expressions in the Expression dialog box by choosing All for the Listed Expressions option. Using comments within expression formulas You can add comments in expression formulas using double forward slashes "//" before the actual comment. the measure becomes embedded within the expression for the feature parameter. Query an embedded distance measure expression If you use the Expressions Measure Distance option to create a distance measure while specifying a feature parameter (for example. in the expression: P58 (Simple Hole(26) Depth) = distance62/2 ―distance62‖ is the embedded distance measure. clicking Undo reverse the five previous edits. 11. 60 once would You may continue to undo changes until the expression list is in its original state when you started working on expressions. Click Measure . You can list all expressions in the current assembly. You can query such a distance measure by selecting it in the expression string and clicking the Measure button.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING If you made five edits and then updated the model and the update failed. The double forward slashes tells the system to ignore everything after. Highlight distance62 in the Formula box. using the Parameter Entry Option menu). Comments continue until the end of the formula. For example. Arithmetic Operators drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

Display features. Relational. reference sets. Relational. Part Navigator Name History Mode Model Views Cameras User Expressions drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Select and edit the parameters of items in the tree. user expressions. Arrange how the part is organized. You can use the Part Navigator to:     Update and understand the part's basic structure. whose operands and output are integers. Equality and Logical Operators The following table lists the relational. Decimal places are ignored. and unused items in the tree.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING The following tables list the arithmetic operators. and logical operators. drawings. Arithmetic Operators Addition Subtraction and Negative Sign Multiplication Division Modulus Exponential Assignment 61 + * / % ^ = Note The modulus operator is the same as the C programming language operator. model views. equality. Equality and Logical Operators > Greater Than < Less Than >= Greater Than or Equal <= Less Than or Equal == Equal != Not Equal ! Negate & or && Logical AND | or || Logical OR F. graphical tree. Part Navigator The Part Navigator displays various aspects of your part in a detailed.

000[mm] 50. Click the Part Navigator tab on the Resource bar.000[mm] None Expression p9=0 p10=50 62 No preview available 1. Open the Part Navigator 1. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Model History Datum Coordinate System (0) Sketch (1) ―PROFILE‖ (1) Extrude (2) Extrude (3) Unite (4) Revolve (5) Dependencies Extrude (2) Children Unite (4) Parents Sketch (1) ―PROFILE‖ Details Parameter Start Limit End Limit Boolean Preview Where do I find it? Resource bar Menu Part Navigator tab Tools→Part Navigator Value 0. Pin the Part Navigator open. 2. by clicking the pin icon in the upper left corner.

The expanded tree structure shows features that were used to create solid and sheet bodies. Part Navigator — Main panel The main panel of the Part Navigator provides a comprehensive view of your model.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 63 You can open or display the Part Navigator from any NX application. Select items for use in commands. Use filters to customize what appears in the main panel and to show only the information that you want to see. 2. Part Navigator Name Unused Items Datum Plane (6) Reference Sets Model Sheet Body ―Revolve (5)‖ Revolve (5) Datum Coordinate System (0) Solid Body ―Extrude (2)‖ Unite (4) Solid Body ―Extrude (3)‖ Extrude (2) Sketch (1) ―PROFILE‖ You can use the tree structure to view the following:     solid bodies sketches features dependent geometry    drawings user expressions quick checks drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can:      Get an overall view of your part. and you can view their parent features. Edit the parameters of objects in your part. Select and clear object check boxes to control their visibility.

Part Navigator Name Unused Items Datum Plane (6) Reference Sets Model Sheet Body ―Revolve (5)‖ Revolve (5) Datum Coordinate System (0) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . along with their features and operations. The timestamp order is turned on by default. You cannot expand or collapse feature nodes. Part Navigator tab a. When the timestamp order is turned on:    All features in the work part appear in a history list of nodes in the order of their creation timestamp. Timestamp order You can view the features in your work part in a timestamp order or by dependencies. You cannot view all node types.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  64 views  reference sets Where do I find it? Prerequisite Resource bar Part Navigator must be open. Part Navigator Name Model History Datum Coordinate System (0) Sketch (1) ―PROFILE‖ (1) Extrude (2) Extrude (3) Unite (4) Revolve (5) Datum Plane (6) Note The timestamp order view is not available in the History-free mode. When the timestamp order is turned off:   All bodies in the work part. are shown in the main panel. You can expand or collapse feature nodes.

Clear Information Alerts Pack All Unpack All → Timestamp Order . Switch between timestamp order view and design view 65 You can switch between the timestamp order view and the design view of the main panel of the Part Navigator . To enable the timestamp order view. ↓ To enable the design view.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Solid Body ―Extrude (2)‖ Unite (4) Solid Body ―Extrude (3)‖ Extrude (2) Sketch (1) ―PROFILE‖ b. . . Right-click in the background of the Part Navigator or in the title bar... do one of the following: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Find Current Feature Update to End Find Object. do one of the following:   Choose Tools→Part Navigator→Timestamp Order. and select the Timestamp Order check box.

Displaying items in the Part Navigator Displaying items    All bodies in the work part. You can select or clear a red check box to show or hide an item and its children. with their features and operations. Right-click in the background of the Part Navigator or in the title bar and clear theTimestamp Order check box. c. Selecting and moving items in the Part Navigator When you select an item in the main panel it is highlighted in the graphics window.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING   66 Choose Tools→Part Navigator and turn off Timestamp Order.  You can use the check box to apply global results to a group of features d. are displayed in the main panel. You can expand or collapse feature nodes.  You can select or clear the green check box to display or suppress features. You can select the following nodes in the Part Navigator as input to an open command: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

Reorder features before or after another feature. e. and be of the same type. Node types The Part Navigator main panel shows your model in a tree structure of nodes. when CSYS is available on the Selection bar Type filter. you can select the following objects in the Part Navigator:   Point features as point input. when Point is available on the Selection bar Type filter. Moving items You can drag and drop objects in the Part Navigator to restructure the constituent parts of your model. In this example. Datum CSYS features as CSYS input. have the same name. Unused Items Point x 6 Shortcut menus You can access part-specific shortcut menus by right-clicking either the background area or individual nodes.Main Nodes History Mode /   Shows the current Modeling mode. six unused point objects are packed as a single node.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING     67 Body features as body input. a group or reference set. You can do the following:   Move objects out of their respective folders and add them to the model. Curve features as curve input (if the Feature Curves selection intent rule is available). Body features as face input (if the Feature Faces selection intent rule is available). Packing You can consolidate all identical nodes in the Part Navigator under a single node. the nodes must be on the same layer. You cannot pack an node that can be expanded (a node that has a plus sign). The main nodes are show below. Part Navigator . You can right-click to change between History Mode and History-Free Mode. History-Free See Modeling modes for details. Body objects as face input (if the Body Faces selection intent rule is available). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Items are packed by default in the Part Navigator Note   For packing. When the Select Object option is active in a command.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . This node does not appear in the timestamp order view. See Reference Sets node for details. Measures  Displays measurements you that have defined. Drawing   Displays drafting objects in your model. and the timestamp. Model Views  Creates and sorts your defined views and view sets. a solid model in the part. Solids and sheets shown are those that belong to that model reference set. See Measures node for details. Note You must create the expressions by choosing Tools→Expressions. and angle. See Timestamp Order for details. length. such as drawings or drafting views. such as. See Checks node for details.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Mode Model History   68 Lists the features in the model in the historical order of their creation timestamps. Checks  Shows the check requirements and quick checks that you perform on objects. The Drawing node is also known as the Drawing Navigator. Groups Unused Items    Shows groups that you have created in your model. This node does not appear in the timestamp order view. See User Expressions node for details. distance. For details on how cameras relate to the Modeling view. Cameras  Lists the available cameras. This node appears only in History Mode and the timestamp order view. Model    Shows components of each model reference set. See Unused Items node for details. Reference Sets   Shows the reference sets for the part. See Model node for details. The expressions that you created without using this method do not appear in this node. This node does not appear in the timestamp order view. See Model Views for details. see Modeling View. User Expressions  Shows user expressions that you have created in your model. along with their type. Shows the construction geometry that is not part of. or associated with.

Displays an expression in the model. View Set Solid Body Expression Feature Sketch Promoted Body    Model node The Model node shows objects that belong to the 'model' reference set and their construction hierarchy.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING See the Drafting Help for more information. You can group promoted bodies. Part Navigator Name Unused Items Datum Plane (6) Reference Sets Model Sheet Body ―Revolve (5)‖ Revolve (5) Datum Coordinate System (0) Solid Body ―Extrude (2)‖ Unite (4) Solid Body ―Extrude (3)‖ Extrude (2) Sketch (1) ―PROFILE‖ drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Promoted bodies belong to components of the work part and not to the work part itself. Displays a feature in your model. Displays promoted bodies. If your sketch has groups. so they cannot be referenced by groups or reference sets in the work part. Displays a solid body within a model. Part Navigator . Displays a sketch in your model. This node is found in the Drawing Navigator. This expression is displayed whether or not the expression affects any feature in the model. The promoted bodies are displayed using a promotions icon. Displays a user-defined collection of views under the Model Views node.Object Nodes Sheet             69 Displays a drawing sheet in a model. This node is found under the User Expression node. This node is found in the Model node. they are displayed here.

 Reference Sets node The Reference Sets folder in the Part Navigator shows reference sets in the model. Show at Top Level moves reference sets from the Reference Sets node to the top level of the tree. as necessary. Boolean operations display as features on the target body.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING    70 Datums. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . curves and positioning dimensions also appear in the Model node. with the tool bodies under the Boolean node and their construction history under their body nodes. Part Navigator Name Unused Items Fixed Datum Plane (11) Fixed Datum Plane (12) Datum Coordinate System (15) Line ―Line (17)‖ Lightweight Body   Legacy parts may show nearly all of their objects in the Unused Items folder. Part Navigator Name Reference Sets Lightweight Lightweight Body Model Solid Body ―Extruded (0)‖ Reference Set ―CONST_GEOM‖ Datum Plane (41) Datum Plane (40) Edit Show at Top Level Filter Delete Rename Properties On the shortcut list.  Unused Items node The Unused Items folder in the Part Navigator shows construction geometry that is not associated with a solid model. You can drag and drop items from the Unused Items folder to reference sets or groups. Solid and sheet bodies can appear under other features if the solid or one of its edges or faces is referenced by that feature.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Show at Top Level Part Navigator Name Reference Sets Lightweight Lightweight Body Model Solid Body Reference Set 1 Show at Top Level Part Navigator Name Reference Sets Lightweight Lightweight Body Model Solid Body Reference Set 1 71 Clear Show at Top Level to move them back.8 hub_offset=-((hub_dia-Hole_dia)/2) length=(hole_dia/2)+Key_length You can:    Double-click on an item. or right-click and select Edit. Right-click and select Rename to rename an expression. Part Navigator Name User Expressions D=N/P Hole_Dia=20 Key_length=2.  User Expressions node The User Expressions folder in the Part Navigator shows user expressions you have defined in your model.5 Key_width=3.  Checks node The Checks folder in the Part Navigator shows requirements checks. to edit an expression. Right-click and select Edit in Expression Editor to edit measurements and formulas.2 N=40 P=0. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . quick check items.6 T=D*Sin(90/N) Thickness=10 hub_dia=35 hub_height=3. and their status. Note The Reference Sets folder is not available in Timestamp Order.

If downstream features modify geometry that has been used for measurement. If you have defined measurements in your model. the correct value is calculated at the timestamp of the edited feature.  Measures node The Part Navigator shows measurements in the Measures node. such as rename. Double-clicking on the node. Edit feature parameters in the Part Navigator There are several ways to select and edit existing features directly in the Part Navigator. See the Check Requirements Help or Quick Check Help for more information. Editing it in the Details panel. Part Navigator Name Checks Length. followed by their timestamp. copy. their types are shown (that is. Note Editing a feature with an embedded measure may give unexpected results. Editing it in the Expression dialog box. Use the shortcut menu to perform other actions on measures. Distance. When the check does not meet the requirement. the Part Navigator will show the value at the current timestamp. its icon has a red X.A   72 When the check meets the requirement. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .A Mass.p92.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING In this example. f. Part Navigator Name Measures Distance Measurement (15) Length Measurement (16) Face Measurement (17) Arc Radius Measurement (18) You can edit a measurement in any one of the following methods:     Right-click and select Edit Parameters. Upon accepting the measurement. two checks were created using the Check Requirements validation tool. its icon has a green check. Angle). or reorder. Length.

To edit all measurement and formulas  Right-click and choose Edit in Expression Editor. Open the Details panel to see the feature's expression parameters. Note For more information about editing values in the details panel. 2. 3. Edit parameters in the Details panel 1. To rename an expression  Right-click and choose Rename. Edit expressions in the main panel To edit an expression  Double-click a user-defined expression in the User Expressions folder. or right-click the expression and choose Edit. g. see Edit parameter values in the Details panel. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . o Clear the red check box to hide an item and its children. Double-click an expression you want to change. 4. o Select the red check box of an item to show it. Check boxes in the Part Navigator Red check box  Indicates the current Show/Hide status. Select a feature in the tree list. right-click and choose Edit Parameters or Edit with Rollback.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Edit feature parameters in the main panel Do one of the following:   73 Double-click a feature in the tree list to open the feature's dialog box. Select a feature item in the main panel. Type a new parameter value and press Enter.

h. o Select the green check box to unsuppress the feature. Color Object relationship Red Parent Blue Child Gray Hidden drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 74  Not available when Timestamp Order is active. Parent and child relationships in Part Navigator The different text colors for objects displayed in the Part Navigator indicate both their parent/child relationships and their Show/Hide status. Green check box   Only features have a green check box. or disables suppression. The green check box enables. o Clear the green check box to suppress the feature.

If there is a detailed status message for the feature. nodes listed after drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can reorder the columns. Part Navigator column names and icons The Part Navigator comes with a standard set of columns. Modified Appears when you modify a feature and Delayed Update After Edit is selected. or reorder. Suppressed by Expression Appears when you control a feature's suppression using an expression. You can also specify font colors by using Customer Defaults. and add columns. except for the Name. Choose File→Utilities→Customer Defaults→Gateway→Part Navigator to specify colors. see Configure Part Navigator columns. When you make a feature current (see Make Current Feature). it is displayed in the Status column (No text in the Status column) This is the normal state for a feature node. Column name Name Description Shows the name of each feature in the work part. i.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING   75 See Part Navigator Properties dialog box options for more information. an equal sign appears over the feature's dotted check box. For details. Suppressed Appears if you suppress a feature by clearing its check box. the Name column. or by choosing Edit→Feature→Suppress. For details on how to assign parent/child colors. The icon next to the name of the feature shows the type of feature and an icon shows the current state of the feature. If you suppress a feature using the Suppress by Expression dialog box. see Change parent and child font colors in the Part Navigator. You can display or hide columns. See Suppress by Expression. Inactive Indicates inactive features. Note You cannot hide.

See the following description for Out of Date. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Layer Status . Missing Parents Indicates an unparented datum CSYS. Indicates the layer on which the feature resides.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING that feature become inactive. Alive Indicates that the node is active. Displays a message regarding the current condition of the feature. Inactive Wave 76 Indicates a WAVE link that is broken. This status can change to Active WAVE if the link is later restored. Timestamp Shows the timestamp number of each object or feature. Active Wave Indicates a WAVE link that is active and can be updated. Out of Date Indicates features that have been rendered out-of-date. Broken Links Indicates that the linked feature is a broken link. Update Failed Indicates the feature that failed to be updated. Displayed Indicates the currently displayed view in the Model Views node. Failed Inactive Indicates an inactive feature that failed to be updated. Objects with no timestamp are sorted as if their timestamp number is less than zero. Unloaded Appears in the Drawing Navigator when assembly components are not loaded. See Datum CSYS editing tips for details. Feature Type Shows the system name for a feature.

Add a comment for an object You can add a comment for an individual feature or object in the Comment column of the Part Navigator.   A feature may become out-of-date if a part on which it depends is frozen. Alerts Alerts are temporary and appear only once with the initiating event and usually disappear following another action. 2. Value Used by the Product Definition Editor. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . To add a comment to an object or feature: 1. Right-click and choose Properties. See Name for more information. Created Modified Comment Shows the creation date of the feature. Select the object or feature in either the graphics window or the Part Navigator.  Adding comments and attributes to individual features lets you clarify their use. Part Name j. or otherwise delaying their updating. and adds to the overall display information.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING    77 The message provides some detail to the status icon that appears next to the feature name. even when the condition that caused the alert message remains. such as a Playback or a subsequent edit. the current constraint status appears. For details. Shows the modification date of the feature. Displays the name of the part file in which the feature is created. may be useful if you want to update them at a later time. Out of Date Indicates features that have been rendered out-of-date.  See the Product Definition Editor in the Product and Manufacturing Information Help. click the Feature Attributes tab. Created By Shows the user name of the person who created the feature. In the Properties dialog box. For sketches. see Add a comment for an object. ID  You can change this to any unique number. Modified By Shows the user name of the person who modified the feature.  See the Tolerance Feature Editor in the Product and Manufacturing Information Help. 3. You can also edit the comments. Shows the feature's Comment attribute. Lists informational or pertinent messages that display while creating or editing features. Requirement Refers to an index number that is applied to tolerances. Freezing parts.

click to add or modify comments. Examples of 3D annotations are:      Dimensions Notes Symbols Geometric tolerance Product definition attribute display instances. You can make your own filters using Filter Settings. Part Navigator Name Model Views ―Back‖ ―Bottom‖ ―Front‖ ―Isometric‖ ―Left‖ "Right‖ ―Top‖ ―Trimetric‖ (Work) PMI Assembly Filters Status Displayed   Double-clicking a view in the Part Navigator switches the graphics window to that view and makes it the work view. all the other views in that set update their orientations according to the base view's orientation. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Model Views are especially useful with 3D annotations that depend on their view locations. You can filter all views using the standard system filters. In the Comment column for the object.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 78 4. To edit the comment field in the Part Navigator: 1. If the Status column is enabled.      Model views include the standard orthographic (canned) views. Create an attribute titled Comment of the required Type and enter values appropriate for the type. The value for an object or feature comment is displayed in the Part Navigator window under the Comment column. k. Select the object or feature. Model Views Use the Model Views node in the Part Navigator to manage and organize the graphics views in your part. 2. it shows "Displayed" for the view currently active in the graphics window. When you designate a view in a view set to be the base view. You can add your own user-defined views and view sets.

or accept the default name. right-click and choose Add View. Part Navigator Name Model Views ―Back‖ ―Bottom‖ Filter Add View Add View Set Visualization Preferences 3. see Model View procedures. Change the configuration of the model in the graphics window as needed. a. and press Return or Enter. Part Navigator drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Double-click an existing model view to make it active in the graphics window. Part Navigator Name Model Views ―Back‖ ―Bottom‖ ―Front‖ ―Isometric‖ ―Left‖ "Right‖ “Top” (Work) Double-click node to make it active b. Enter a new name for the view. Change the model view in the graphics window to the view you want. Original Top model view. Move the cursor over the Model Views node. 1. 2. The view you want to create.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 79 Note To learn how to create and edit model views and view sets in the Part Navigator. The new view displays in the model views list and becomes the work view.  Create a user-defined view You can create user-defined model views you can access to custom views using the Part Navigator.

select Save. Part Navigator Name Model Views ―Back‖ ―Bottom‖ ―Front‖ ―Isometric‖ ―Left‖ "Right‖ ―TOP_CLOSE_UP‖ (Work) ―Top‖ ―Trimetric‖ PMI Assembly Filters 2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Name Model Views ―Back‖ ―Bottom‖ ―Front‖ ―Isometric‖ ―Left‖ "Right‖ ―TOP_CLOSE_UP‖ (Work) ―Top‖ ―Trimetric‖ PMI Assembly Filters  Edit a user-defined view 80 1. Change the view to the way you want it to appear. Updated user-defined view to save. Part Navigator Name Model Views Right-click. Double-click view to make active. Original user-defined view. right-click and select the Save option. Double-click the view you have defined to make it the active work view in the graphics window. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Move the cursor over the selected view in the node list. 3.

 Create a view set A view set contains a list of interrelated orthographic views.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING ―Back‖ ―Bottom‖ ―Front‖ ―Isometric‖ ―Left‖ "Right‖ ―TOP_CLOSE_UP‖ (Work) Save ―Top‖ Reset Orientation ―Trimetric‖ Copy PMI Assembly Filters Rename Properties 81 4. You can also rename the view using this procedure. → 2. The view is updated with the new configuration. Orient and configure the view in the active graphics window to conform to the way you want the base view to appear for the new view set. Right-click the Model Views node and choose Add View Set. 1. Find Current Feature drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Note o o When you use Save you also create a preview object that is displayed in the Preview Panel when the view is selected.

6. 4.. The view set is created. Work) ―SET_1_FRONT‖ ―SET_1_BOTTOM‖ ―SET_1_TRIMETRIC‖ Example Normal Top view. From the Base View list. and the new view set is added to the Model Views node list.. 3. From the Add Views list. type a new name for the view set. Part Navigator Name Model Views View Set ―SET_1‖ ―SET_1_TOP‖ (Base. Click OK to create the view set. . the base view becomes the work view. in the Name field. . ↓ Rotated Right view will be base Top view in new view set. select the check box of each standard view that you want to add to the view set. . 82 5. In the View Set dialog box. select the view you want to be the base view. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The base view determines how the other views relate to it and each other.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Add View Add View Set.

Double-click the view set to which you want to add views. 2.  Rename user-defined views and view sets 1. Click OK to complete the changes to the view set. Front. Note You can also right-click and choose Edit on the view set to open the View Set dialog box. From the Add Views list. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Right-click and choose Delete to remove the view. 2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 83 View set: Top (Right). The base view now has the new orientation and the other views in the set are aligned accordingly. select the check boxes of the views you want. 3. Enter a new name and press Return or Enter. Change the orientation using standard view options. With the view set list expanded. 3. such as Rotate. Trimetric  Edit a view set Add views to a view set 1. select the view in the view set that you want to make the base view. Note You can also click the name and rename the view or view set. Change the base view of a view set 1. Double-click the base view in the view set to make it the work view. The View Set dialog box for that view set is displayed. 2. 2. Change the orientation of the base view 1. 3. Select a view or view set you want to copy. Right-click the view and choose Save. Remove a view from a view set 1. Right-click and choose Make Base View.  Copy and paste views and view sets 1. Right-click the name and choose Rename. Bottom. Select the view in the view set that you want to remove. 2. or Orient View. Select the user-defined view or view set you want to rename.

To rename the pasted view. 3. Select features and feature geometry to highlight them in the graphics window. The dependencies are shown in the Parents and Children folders. see Rename user-defined views and view sets. Right-click and choose Delete or choose Edit→Delete. Right-click and choose Copy or choose Edit→Copy. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .  Delete user-defined views and view sets 1. 84 A copy of the view or view set appears in the model views node list with an appended number next to the original name. 3. Right-click the Model Views and choose Paste or choose Edit→Paste.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 2. Select a user-defined view or view set you want to delete. select it in the main panel of the Part Navigator. in the graphics window or by another selection method. Investigate the potential impacts of a planned modification to your part. To see the dependencies of a feature. 2. Dependencies panel Use the Dependencies panel in the Part Navigator to:    View the parent and child relationships of feature geometry within your part.

Datum Coordinate System With Detailed View Dependencies panel. information about the datum coordinate system is displayed in the Dependencies Datum Coordinate System (10) Children Datum Axis (10) Datum Axis (10) Datum Axis (10) Datum Plane (10) Datum Plane (10) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . a. selected. Dependency types Depending on specific interaction with the model. Where do I find it? Prerequisite Resource bar Location in navigator Part Navigator must be open. Part Navigator tab Expand the Dependencies group.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 85 Dependencies Extrude (4) Children Solid Body ―Extrude (3)‖ Parents Section Chain 1 — Feature Curves Seed Sketch (4) ―SKETCH_001‖ Sketch Plane Face ―Face of Extrude (3)‖ Chained Objects Loops Loop 1 (Closed) Direction Sketch (4) ―SKETCH_001‖ The Dependencies panel does not show dependencies for multiple selections. different dependency types are displayed in the Dependencies panel of the Part Navigator.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Datum Plane (10) Point ―Datum Coordinate System (10)‖ Parents Boolean The type of Boolean used to create solid bodies is shown in the Dependencies panel. Chain-2-<type> and so on. Dependencies Subtract (14) Children Solid Body ―Extrude (13)‖ Parents Targets Solid Body ―Extrude (13)‖ Extrude (13) Tools Solid Body ―Revolve (11)‖ Revolve (11) Selection Intent Selection Intent rules are included in the Detailed View of the Dependencies panel.Connected Intersection Limits Start Line ―Line 3‖ End Line ―Line 4‖ Chained Objects Edge ―Edge of Block (4)‖ Loops     Under Section. Deselected objects of a selection chain are shown in a Removed Objects folder inside the Chain drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .Feature Curves Chain 3. Loop 2 (Open) and so on.Generic Chain 2 . The Detailed View shows the Targets and Tools used for creating the Boolean feature. Inside the Loops folder. selection chains are represented as Chain 1-<type>. the Start and End limits are shown in an Intersection Limits folder. loops are designated as Loop 1 (Closed). 86 Dependencies Sheet Body ―Extrude (18) Children Parents Extrude (18) Section Chain 1 . If Stop at Intersection is used as part of selection.

o o Dependencies Extrude (4) Children Unite (6) Parents Extrude (3) Fixed Datum Plane (0) Fixed Datum Axis (2)  Detailed View enabled o Enhanced mode showing more detailed dependencies. o The Children folder shows the descendant geometry that depend on the selected object. Shows dependencies of the same type of object as that selected:  – Features that depend on features. Dependencies panel options Option Detailed View  87 node when two features have linked geometry whose source Description Use this option to see dependency details for a selected feature or object.  – Bodies that depend on bodies. o Parents folder shows the object or feature geometry and the expressions that the selected object depends on.  – Components that depend on components. o The Parents folder shows only parent objects or features.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Dependencies Children Parents Section Chain 1. Detailed View disabled Default mode.Feature Curves Seed Chained Objects Removed Objects Line ―Line21‖ The deselection intent is remembered during subsequent updates. o The Children folder shows only dependent objects or features. b. Circular Dependencies You will see a circular dependency icon is in another feature. Dependencies Extrude (4) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

Back      Expand Next Level 4. Does not show duplicate information. Does not open the Parents and Children folders themselves. the Forward option updates the panel. and Expression.000 [mm] 3. There are three columns: Parameter.000 [degrees] 0. Value. Details panel Use the Details panel in the Part Navigator to view and edit the feature and positioning parameters that belong to the currently selected feature. Resets the panel to the previous display and selection. use the Forward option to return to your previous selection.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Children Solid Body ―Extrude (3)‖ Parents Section Chain 1 — Feature Curves Seed Sketch (4) ―SKETCH_001‖ Sketch Plane Face ―Face of Extrude (3)‖ Chained Objects Loops Loop 1 (Closed) Direction Sketch (4) ―SKETCH_001‖  88 Use the Forward option in the following cases: Forward   When you have used the Back option.000 [mm] Expression p16=0 p17=0 p18=hub_height p19=0 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Details Parameter Taper Angle Start Distance End Distance First Offset Value 0. You can use the Back option for up to 10 selections. You can sort the panel by any of the columns. Expands unexpanded children one more level. If more than one node represents the same object in a folder. When the panel does not show the dependencies of the current selection. then only one node is expanded.800 [mm] 0.

Use one of two ways to edit the value: o Edit the value directly in the Details panel: a. Part Navigator tab Expand the Details group. letting you drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . o Edit the parameter in the Expressions dialog box: a. Change the value of the parameter. c. Tip   It is more efficient to use the Expressions dialog box if you are changing several expressions at a time. Where do I find it? Prerequisite Resource bar Location in navigator Part Navigator must be open.150 [mm] Unite p20=hub_offset Only parameters for a single feature are shown in the Details panel. Editing of expressions does not support Delayed Update on Edit. a. right-click the parameters and choose Edit in Expression Editor. c. In the Details panel. The Expressions dialog box opens with the expression highlighted. Press the Enter key. The new value for the expression triggers an immediate update. b.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Second Offset Boolean    89 – 6. 2. You can export the contents of the Details panel to a browser or spreadsheet. Enter a new value for the expression in the Formula field. b. Edit parameter values in the Details panel You can edit some parameter values in the Details panel if you are in the Modeling application: 1. Double-click the parameter. If a feature is suppressed by an expression. Click OK. the suppression expression is also displayed. In the Details panel. The row for the parameter value highlights. b. Details panel options Option Edit Description Highlights the parameter expression value and enters edit mode. select the expression to be edited.

where you can assign a new parameter value to the expression. Examples of preview objects:  Model Views saved in the Part Navigator Preview  Drawing Sheets Preview Where do I find it? drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can open and close this panel by clicking on its name.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 90 Edit in Expression Editor Rename Export to Browser change it directly in the Details panel. Opens the Expressions dialog box. Exports the contents of the Details panel to a spreadsheet. Export to Spreadsheet   5. your default browser is started. Lets you change the name of the parameter expression. If no HTML browser is running. the contents of the Details panel display appear in its window. Preview panel The Preview panel in the Part Navigator displays images of applicable preview objects. You can use the spreadsheet tools to help analyze or publish the data. Export the contents of the Details panel display to the HTML browser defined for your computer:   If a browser is already running.

Filters Filters let you simplify the information that appears in the Part Navigator main panel. right-click the work view and choose Save. Create a preview of a model work view  In the main panel of the Part Navigator. 6. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . the preview is displayed in the Preview Panel. Part Navigator tab Expand the Preview group. Part Navigator Name Model Views ―Back‖ ―Bottom‖ ―Front‖ ―Isometric‖ ―Left‖ "Right‖ ―Top‖ ―Trimetric‖ (Work) Save Reset Orientation Copy Rename Properties  When you select that view node. Preview Note Additional options for Model View previews are available on the Preview tab when you choose File→Properties.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 91 Prerequisite Resource bar Location in navigator Part Navigator must be open. a.

There are two types of filters that you can use:   System filters User-defined filters that you can create using the Filters dialog box options. When a filter has been applied and is active in the Part Navigator. you have access to the following system filters: Remove All of Type Remove All of This Category Remove All Selected Features Remove All Other Types Remove All of Other Categories Remove All Above Timestamp Remove All Below Timestamp Object collection filters Timestamp filters drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Part Navigator → Name (filtered) Model Solid Body ―Extruded (0)‖ Extruded (0) Extruded (12) Where do I find it? Toolbar Menu Part Navigator→Filter Settings and Apply Filter Tools→Part Navigator→Filter Settings and Apply Filter Right-click (on object) → Filter (System filters) Location in navigator a.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING You can use filters to do the following:   92 Remove the features from display that you are not interested in. For example. When you right-click on an object in the Part Navigator and choose Filter from the shortcut menu. System filters Right-click (in Name banner) → Filter Settings (User-defined filters) System filters provide the ability to remove collections of general types of objects from the display in the Part Navigator. construction geometry. For example. extruded features in a complex model. the Name label on the title bar changes to Name (filtered). Display only the feature types that you want to see. You can see if any filters are affecting the current display of the Part Navigator main panel.

Apply Filter Delete Last Filter Remove Top Nodes Use Filter Filter Settings ↓ Part Navigator Name Model Solid Body ―Extruded (0)‖ Extruded (0) Unite (2) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The first Extruded feature is selected. After a filter is applied.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING This example shows the Remove All Other Types system filter. You can use the arrow allows for sorting from top to bottom or bottom to top . you see filtered next to Name. Part Navigator Name Model Solid Body ―Extruded (0)‖ Extruded (0) Unite (2) Subtract (4) Subtract (6) Cone (9) Edge Blend (10) Extruded (12) 93 When you right-click and choose Filter→Remove All Other Types. you can right-click anywhere in a blank area in the Part Navigator and clear the Apply Filter check box in the shortcut menu to return to an unfiltered state. all other features other than extruded features are filtered out of the main panel of the Part Navigator: Part Navigator → Name (filtered) Model Solid Body ―Extruded (0)‖ Extruded (0) Extruded (12) If there are filters that affect the current display of the Part Navigator.

From the Part Navigator toolbar by clicking Filter Settings . User-defined filters You can create user-defined filters for the Part Navigator using the Filters dialog box. Current tab You can specify a filter based on the inclusion or exclusion of any combination of the following types of geometry or data. Using the shortcut menu in the Part Navigator by right-clicking a blank area or the Name banner and choosing Filter Settings. a filter was created to filter out all but Rectangular Arrays from the Part Navigator display. The Filters dialog box has two tabs. In the following example. You can access the Filters dialog box in one of these ways:    94 From the main menu by choosing Tools→Part Navigator→Filter Settings. Save – saves the specified filter. Everything Datums Sketches All of type ―Circular Array‖ All of type ―Instance‖ All of type ―Edge Blend‖ All of type ―Extruded‖ Form Features drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .     Information Category Name Attribute Selected Major Object     Feature Category Feature Type State Timestamp    Model Views PMI Alerts Include – includes a specified geometry/data type to a filter.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Subtract (4) Subtract (6) Cone (9) Edge Blend (10) Extruded (12) b. Exclude – excludes a specified geometry/data type to a filter. The filter is available only during your current session unless you save it.

select Feature Type. in the Current tab. it appears on the list of saved filters on the Saved tab: Only Failed Features Only Features With Information Only Features With Warnings Only Suppressed Features No Suppressed Features → rect_array_filter From the Saved tab. In the Filters dialog box. Choose Tools→ Part Navigator→ Filter Settings. a filter is created to isolate just the Rectangular Arrays in a model. or right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator and select Filter Settings. you can apply or delete a saved filter. Saved Current Everything All of type ―Circular Array‖ drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . from the Add Filter By list.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING The Part Navigator is updated to reflect the effects of the filter. Click Exclude to specify objects to be excluded. 1. 3. Create and save a filter In the following example. Repeat this process until all objects other than Rectangular Arrays have be excluded. Saved Current Everything All of type ―Circular Array‖ 5. 2. c. The definition appears in the list box. Part Navigator Name (filtered) Model Solid Body ―Extruded (0)‖ Rectangular Array (10) Rectangular Array (12) Rectangular Array (14) Rectangular Array (16) Saved tab 95 After you define a filter. Specify all objects other than Rectangular Arrays to exclude using the menu list that appears below the Add Filter By option. name it and save it. Circular Array 4.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING All of type ―Datum Plane‖ All of type ―Edge Blend‖ All of type ―Instance‖ All of type ―Extruded‖ All of type ―Rectangular Pocket‖ 6. The Part Navigator is automatically updated according to the specified filter. Part Navigator Name (filtered)

96

Model Solid Body ―Extruded (0)‖ Rectangular Array (10) Rectangular Array (12) Rectangular Array (14) Rectangular Array (16) Caution The definitions of the filters are applied from top to bottom, which means that the definitions lower in the list may override the definitions higher in the list.

8. Click Save.

to copy the filter for later use.

The Saved tab is displayed with default filters and any filters filed with the part. The new filter appears in the list with a default name. 9. (Optional) Rename the saved filter. Current Saved

Only Failed Features Only Features With Information Only Features With Warnings Only Suppressed Features No Suppressed Features → rect_array_filter 10. Applying any filter from the Saved tab makes that filter current so the Current page filter list box is updated with this filter's definitions. d. Apply a filter You can apply the filters to control the display of items in the Part Navigator. Apply a system filter 1. In the Part Navigator, select the object. 2. Right-click the object and choose Filter. 3. Select a system filter from the list. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Remove All of Type Remove All of This Category Remove All Selected Features Remove All Other Types Remove All of Other Categories Remove All Above Timestamp Remove All Below Timestamp Apply a user-defined filter

97

Object collection filters

Timestamp filters

1. Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Use Filter from the shortcut menu. 2. Select the filter from the list of defined filters. Only Failed Features Only Features With Information Only Features With Warnings Only Suppressed Features No Suppressed Features rect_array_filter hole_pattern_filter Apply a saved filter from the Filters dialog box 1. Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Filter Settings to open the Filters dialog box. 2. Click the Saved tab. 3. Select the required filter from the list. Current Saved Only Failed Features Only Features With Information Only Features With Warnings Only Suppressed Features No Suppressed Features → rect_array_filter 4. Click Apply. Part Navigator Name (filtered) Model Solid Body ―Extruded (0)‖ Rectangular Array (10) Rectangular Array (12) Rectangular Array (14) Rectangular Array (16) The Filters dialog box displays the definitions of the newly-activated filter in the list box on the Current tab. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Saved Current Everything All of type ―Circular Array‖ All of type ―Datum Plane‖ All of type ―Edge Blend‖ All of type ―Instance‖ All of type ―Extruded‖ All of type ―Rectangular Pocket‖ Apply the current filter You can use Apply Filter to apply the last-used filter or the one that is currently active. Select the Apply Filter option in one of the following ways:

98

Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Apply Filter from the shortcut menu. Find Current Feature Update to End Find Object... Clear Information Alerts Pack All Unpack All Timestamp Order Apply Filter . .

Choose Tools→Part Navigator→Apply Filter. Note You do not need to have the Part Navigator open to apply the filter.

e. Edit a filter 1. Open the Filters dialog box in one of these ways: o Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Filter Settings from the shortcut menu. o Choose Tools→Part Navigator→Filter Settings. Note You can also edit a filter from the Saved tab.

2. To delete a definition in the filter, select it from the list and click Delete . 3. You can also add more definitions to your filter by specifying the Add Filter By options that you want, and then pressing Include New definitions appear in the list. You can insert new definitions above other selected definitions. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 , or Exclude .

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING If nothing is selected, the new definition is placed at the bottom of the list. 4. You can move a selected definition higher or lower in the list using Up Note Definitions are applied from the top to the bottom in the list. f. Rename a filter

99

, and Down

.

1. Open the Filters dialog box in one of these ways: o Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Filter Settings from the shortcut menu. o Choose Tools→Part Navigator→Filter Settings. 2. Click the Saved tab. 3. Click the name of the filter you want to rename. 4. Type a new name. 5. Press Enter or Return. g. Delete a filter 1. Open the Filters dialog box in one of these ways: o Right-click a blank area of the Part Navigator, or the Name banner, and choose Filter Settings from the shortcut menu. o Choose Tools→Part Navigator→Filter Settings. 2. Click the Saved tab. 3. Click the name of the filter in the list that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete . 5. (Optional) If you need to clear the filter from the Current tab: o Click the Current tab.
o

Click Clear Filter

.

h. Filters dialog box — Current You can use the options in the Current tab of the Filters dialog box to create new Part Navigator filters, or you can edit existing filters. Current tab
      

Current filter definition list

Lists the definitions of the filter that you are creating, or the filter that you activate (from the Saved tab). Any modifications you make to the current filter does not affect saved filters. You cannot remove the Everything filter. This filter enables all definitions. You can edit the current list by including and excluding definitions from the Filter Settings dialog box. You can specify more than one definition for a filter. Moves the selected definition up in the list. If the Part Navigator is active, it is updated.

Up

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING
 

100

Down

Moves the selected definition down in the list. If the Part Navigator is active, it is updated.

 

Deletes the selected definition. If the Part Navigator is active, it is updated.

Delete Warning You cannot undo a delete operation. Clear Filter Save Lets you specify the category of objects that you want to use in your filter. After you choose an option, additional options are available to further define the objects. The available options are: Information Category Choose from the following categories:
        

Removes all items from the filter, except Everything. Saves the filter with the current definitions.

Drawing (for Drafting nodes) Checks (for Quick Check feature nodes) User Expressions Model History (for Modeling nodes) Unused Items Reference Sets Model Views

Add Filter By Name Lets you enter a name (or the partial name with the wildcard symbol *) to include or exclude features with the same name or partial name. Attribute Creates a filter that will include or exclude features based on the specified attributes that you define. Selected Major Object Creates a filter based on objects that you select. Feature Category Lets you select from the following options: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING
    

101 Datums Curves Sketches Solids All Features

Feature Type Creates a filter based on one of the types of features that is in your model.
 

State – Displays the types you can choose from: Visible, Suppressed, Unsuppressed, Suppressed by Expression, and Failed. Timestamp – Specifies a timestamp based on Greater Than or Lesser Than a certain timestamp. Example: You can define a filter of all features whose timestamp is greater than the timestamp you specified.

Model Views – Lists filter the nodes under the Model Views root node. You can use the following object types: o Displayed (filters all model views that are currently displayed) o Non Displayed (filters all model views that are not currently displayed) o Canned (filters all canned views)

Option menus and fields

   

Fields vary, according to the Add Filter By option selected. Let you further specify the objects to be used in the definition. Adds the object types that you specified in the Add Filter By fields to the filter. The Part Navigator immediately updates to reflect the change in the filter, if it is active. Removes the object types that you specified in the Add Filter By fields to the filter. The Part Navigator immediately updates to reflect the change in the filter, if it is active.

Include

Exclude

i. Filters dialog box — Saved You can apply filters to the Part Navigator by activating them from the Saved tab of the Filters dialog box. Saved tab Shows the existing filters in your part, both the default filters and those that you have created using the Save option on the Current tab. Saved filters list The default filters include:

Only Suppressed Features drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

102

No Suppressed Features

Up

Moves the selected filter up in the list.

Down Moves the selected filter down in the list. Applies the selected filter.
  

Apply

If the Part Navigator is open, the tree changes to show the effects of the filter. Activating a filter populates the list box on the Current filter page. Any changes you make to the Current filter do not affect the saved filters.

Deletes the selected filter. Delete Warning You cannot undo this delete operation. Once a filter definition is deleted, it cannot be recovered.

7. Part Navigator shortcut menus
Shortcut menus provide you accelerated access to the general commands when you choose Tools→Part Navigator or to specific commands of a selected feature. The general or feature commands are displayed in the shortcut menu depending on:
 

The location of your cursor in the Part Navigator when you right-click to display the shortcut menu. What you select in the Part Navigator tree.

The commands you see depend on whether you select one of more of the following:
    

Features Model Views PMI Expressions Cameras

Where do I find it?

Prerequisite

Part Navigator must be open. Right-click (in column header) → shortcut menu (general options)

Location in navigator

Right-click (selected object) → shortcut menu (specific options)

a. Access Part Navigator shortcut menus Access general shortcut menu commands

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

103

1. On the Resource bar, click Part Navigator . 2. With nothing selected in Part Navigator tree, and with the cursor over any column header (or in an empty area of the Part Navigator), right-click. The general shortcut menu appears.

Note Many of the commands on the general shortcut menu are also available when you choose Tools→Part Navigator. Access specific shortcut menu commands 1. On the Resource bar, click Part Navigator . 2. In the Part Navigator tree, select an item, and right-click. The shortcut menu containing specific commands for the item selected appears.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING b. Feature shortcut menu commands The commands available in the feature shortcut menu depend on the following:
   

104

The feature you select. If you select more than one feature If Timestamp Order is on or off. If you are in History Mode or History-Free Mode. Description Opens the Feature Group dialog box to let you add and remove features from a feature group. See Feature Group procedures for more details. Available only with certain nodes, such as Model Views and Drawing. Lets you expand certain nodes so you can see the contents of sub-containers. A plus sign indicates that you can expand additional sub-containers. Available only with certain nodes, such as Model Views and Drawing. Lets you collapse certain nodes so you can see only the root node containers. Displays the parameter values of a selected feature. The values remain displayed until you refresh them. Lets you show or hide feature and body objects. Items that you hide are still displayed in the Part Navigator, but in a gray text font. Hide Parents – Hides all parents (which can be displayed) of the selected feature. Show Parents – Shows all the parents (which can be displayed) of the selected feature. Examples:
o o o

Command Add/Remove Members

 

Expand

 

Collapse

       

Display Dimensions Show/Hide

If the parent curve belongs to a sketch or feature curve, show all output curves of the sketch or feature curve. If the parent is an edge or face, show the solid that contains this edge or face. Only those commands applicable to the currently selected feature are available.

Note The Action on Show Parents in the Part Navigator customer default affects how this command reacts with objects on different layers. See Customer Defaults for more details. Set WCS at CSYS Make Current
  

Available for CSYS objects, Datum CSYS features, and their components. Lets you set the WCS at the CSYS or the CSYS of the Datum CSYS. The selected feature assumes the highest timestamp allowing you to insert a drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

Available for Boolean nodes only. the layer status is changed to selectable.  Available only for single Boolean node selections.  Selects all the tool features of the selected Boolean including tools of all Booleans nested below the selected Boolean. The selected feature and/or the feature's objects are always visible with this command. The Make Current Tool Feature command is available whenever the Isolate Tool Body command is available. so only those that are applicable to the selected objects appear in the list. o If they are on invisible or visible layers. This command is not available if Delayed Update after Edit is selected. the current node. Isolate Tool Body  Reviews all the tools below the selected Boolean node. Displays only the selected body and the Boolean features of that body in the Part Navigator. all blend features are removed from the Part Navigator tree display. the current node. These filters are context-specific.  Make Current Tool Feature    Extract Body Here Select Tool Features Extracts an associative copy of the body as it exists following the selected feature (in time stamp order). Example: If you use this command on a blend feature. Filter Lets you apply a system filter to the Part Navigator display tree.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Feature   105 feature into your model at that point. Changes the selection to include all the nodes with earlier timestamps than the Select Whole selected node of the same body. The command reviews all the tools below the selected Boolean node. All other features with higher timestamps than the selected feature's timestamp are made inactive. and makes the tool with the latest timestamp. and displays only that body in the graphics window.  Available for Boolean nodes only. Branch  Available for Boolean nodes only. Available commands for selected features in a body:  Remove All of Type – Removes all occurrences of the type of feature selected. Bodies and Booleans   Available only when Timestamp Order is off.  Remove All of This Category – Removes all occurrences of the category of drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . o Any hidden objects are now shown. makes the tool with the latest timestamp.   System filters are based on the objects currently selected in the Part Navigator.

      Enter the Edit Parameters mode for most features by double-clicking the feature. The selected feature and its parent objects are always visible during edit. The categories are: o o o o 106 Datums Curves Sketches Solids Example: If you use this command on a blend feature. If you change the display status of these objects during edit. are removed from the Part Navigator tree display. If objects are on invisible or visible layers.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING the selected feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Edit with Rollback    Recreate  . the model rolls forward to the insert point of that feature before editing. Available only in History-free mode. Objects that were unchanged during the edit are returned to their previous state. they are temporarily moved to the work layer. Reopens a feature's creation dialog box and rolls the model back to its condition just before the feature was applied. Edit Display  Edit Parameters Lets you edit the feature's parameters. See Edit with Rollback for more details. The following commands are available for selected root nodes:      Remove Item Remove All But Item Remove Non-Displayed Remove Displayed – Available for the root node of Model Views only. If you apply this command to a feature that follows the current feature. they are temporarily shown. Remove Canned – Available for the root node of Model Views only. Opens the Edit Object Display dialog box. the changes are retained. If the objects are hidden.       Remove Selected Features Remove All Other Types Remove All of Other Categories Remove All Above Timestamp Remove All Below Timestamp Remove all Outside Range – Available for multiple features selected in a body. where you can change base display parameters for the selected object. all Features of which blend is a part.

When you choose Suppress. You can add the same object to multiple groups.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  107 Recreates a feature using its original size or location parameters. which you can use to unsuppress the feature.       Not available in timestamp order mode. its children are not automatically unsuppressed. This command works the same as the Edit Positioning Dimension function used to edit features. the feature is suppressed and an immediate update is done on the model. You can edit groups or the objects you add to them from elsewhere in the tree. You can use the same command to move them back. you must select the feature's children. the timestamps of the affected features are changed. Reorder After  Similar to the Reorder Feature command. You can use the group property page (by choosing Properties on the shortcut menu) to specify that a group should appear at the top level in the tree of the Part Navigator. Note You can also reorder a feature by dragging it to the desired location in the Part Navigator.  If any selected features cannot be reordered. New Group Lets you create a new group consisting of the currently selected objects.   You can perform the same function by clearing or selecting the green check boxes of selected features. o o The check boxes for the suppressed feature and its children are cleared.  When you use reorder. Note This command is not available if Delayed Update after Edit is selected. Reorder Before / Lets you reorder the selected features before or after another feature. Lets you edit the feature's positioning dimensions. Edit Positioning   Show at Top Level   Suppress / Unsuppress Suppresses.  A feature to be reordered is selected from the Reorder Before or Reorder After lists. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . or unsuppresses the selected features. Groups are displayed as items in the Part Navigator tree. To unsuppress the children. a warning message is displayed. right-click and choose the Unsuppress command. The shortcut menu changes to Unsuppress. Lets you move reference sets out of the Reference Sets folder and to the top level of the tree. You can also include sketches in a group. Note When you unsuppress a feature. These commands work the same as the Suppress and Unsuppress on the Edit Feature menu.

See Feature Group for more information. and curve features. Expand All     Move to Layer   Group Lets you organize features into feature groups from within the Part Navigator. For example:   If you select a datum plane. This command is not available if Delayed Update after Edit is selected. Show both the tool body node and first level tool features below the tool body node. You can drag and drop items to add them in an existing feature group in the Part Navigator. Available for bodies. Show/Hide Body Shows or hides the selected object.      Use this command on features selected in the Part Navigator to display the Feature Group dialog box. If you select a solid body.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  108 See Group in the Managing a Part Help for more details Available for body nodes only. o You can provide a name for the new feature group. o Here you can add additional features. Replace Lets you replace one or more features on a body with another set of features from other bodies in the part. See Editing a UDF in a part for more information. Replace User Defined Feature   Variable Operations You may see additional commands on the shortcut menu that are specific to the object type. Copy  Lets you assign names of your choice to Rename o Features drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Cuts the selected object. you may see Assign Material on the shortcut menu. you may see Datum Plane Grid on the shortcut menu.    The children of the original features are reparented with the replacement features. Opens the User Defined Feature Library Browser to let you replace the selected user defined feature with one from the browser. Lets you move selected objects between layers. Expands the selected body to show all nested Boolean feature nodes. Cut Copies the selected object (feature. See Replace Features of more details. You can select the Add/Remove Members command on the shortcut menu. Shows all the non-Boolean feature nodes that exist at only the first level below the selected body node. view set. and so on) to the clipboard. view. datums. to reopen the Feature Group dialog box and edit the feature group. Feature groups are displayed as separate items in the Part Navigator tree.

Command Add View Description Available only when the Model Views root node is selected.  This is the same data listed in the Feature Browser dialog box which opens when you choose Information→Feature. Use the Properties dialog box to rename features and view the feature creation and modification information. You can choose to list either the child or parent objects. c. edit. view and delete feature comments and attributes.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING o o o 109 Free form features User-defined views View sets. See the Assemblies Help for more information about WAVE and interpart links.   Delete Deletes the selected feature. in Modeling dialog boxes. Information Opens the Information window with data about the selected features. You can click Information for more details about the links that the operation would break before deciding whether to continue or cancel the operation. Click the name of the new view to rename it. See Creating a User-Defined View for more information about user defined views drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日     . and you can get additional information about selected objects. Properties Opens the Feature Properties dialog box. or work views. If a view set or a model view is selected. a message appears to confirm or cancel the delete operation.    If deleting a feature would break interpart links. Creates a new user-defined model view based on what is currently displayed in the graphics window work view.    You can add. Object Dependency Browser Opens the Object Dependency Browser dialog box.   You can browse through information about the objects in the selected feature. Model Views shortcut menu commands The commands you see depend on whether you right-click the Model Views node or you right-click a view. The new names replace system-assigned feature names. such as BLOCK(1). user-defined view or view set. You cannot delete canned views. this command opens the View Set Properties or the Modeling View Properties dialog box. including a list of the features that use them. You cannot rename canned views.

Navigate to Base View   Switches the view in the graphics window to the base view of a view set. You can do the following:   Enable automatic scrolling. Not available if the selected view is not in a view set.  Opens the Visualization Preferences dialog box. Reset Orientation uses the saved configuration to restore user-defined views to their saved state.  For canned views. Save     Make Work View   Make Base View   Opens the selected view in a new graphics window. A saved view can also be displayed in the Preview panel. Opens the View Set dialog box where you can create a new user-defined model view set consisting of your own selected views. See Creating a View Set for more information about creating a view set. Another member view of the view set other than the base view must already be displayed in the graphics window for this option to appear. Assign different font colors for parent and child objects. 8. Not available if the selected view is already the work view. this command restores the view to its default orientation instead of the saved configuration. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Add View Set    110 Available only when the Model Views root node is selected. Paste Visualization Preferences Edit Pastes the view or view set from the clipboard to the Model Views node list. Open in New Window  Available only when the selected view is displayed in the graphics window. Lets you change the base view to the selected view within a view set. or if it is already the base view. Part Navigator Properties dialog box Use the Part Navigator Properties dialog box to change the appearance of the display panels of the Part Navigator. See Editing Model View Sets for more information about editing model view sets. Changes the view in the graphics window to the selected view and make it the work view. Saves the selected view's orientation and parameters The selected view must be currently displayed in the graphics window.  Use this option to set the visualization preferences for the selected view.   Lets you edit an existing model view set. Reset Orientation  Restores the orientation of the view in the graphics window to its saved configuration.

User Replaces System – The Name column shows only the user-defined name. such as SKETCH. Note Features that have no user-defined names are not affected by the Name Display option. only their type (along with the timestamp) is shown. For these features. Where do I find it? Prerequisite Location in navigator The Part Navigator must be open. such as SKETCH "CAR_DOOR_SKETCH". The Columns tab allows you to add. Part Navigator Properties dialog box options The properties and settings of the Part Navigator are organized under the General and Columns tabs. Right-click (column header) → Properties a. Columns Tab Option Description drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING     111 Specify the name display preference.  Font Colors You can specify defaults for the colors and for the Font Colors options in the Customer Defaults dialog box for Part Navigator. highlights that feature node in the listing window when you select a feature in the graphics window.   The General tab deals with display properties of the Part Navigator. delete. such as font color and name. Name Display Lets you specify what appears in the Name column of the Part Navigator for features that you have named. such as "CAR_DOOR_SKETCH". and manipulate Part Navigator columns. You can set this option in the Customer Defaults dialog box for the Part Navigator Shows parent-child relationships of selected objects. the feature's type is shown. General Tab Option Automatically Scroll to Selection Description When selected. System Only – The Name column shows only the feature type. Add or delete your own columns. Enable or disable the display of columns. Reorder the columns that appear in the Part Navigator. settings are organized under the General and Columns tabs. If there is no user-defined name. You can select from the following options:    System and User – The Name column includes both the user-defined name and the feature type. In the Part Navigator Properties dialog box.

 Any features with the same attribute name display their value for the attribute in that column. Creates the user-defined column. Rearranges the display order of the columns. See General shortcut menu commands for more information. Move Up Move Down Delete Attribute Deletes user-defined columns. Right-click to open the shortcut menu. or 2. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Move your cursor to a clear area or to the title row in the Part Navigator.  User-created columns appear in the listing with a tag icon next to them.  Lets you name a user-defined column. Change the Part Navigator display settings 1. Create b.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Columns list   112 Displays a listing of available default column categories. You can select or clear corresponding column check boxes to include or exclude columns in the display.

Note To remove a column. see Part Navigator column names and icons. Sort the entries in the Part Navigator by the attributes that appear in the columns. Choose Columns from the shortcut menu. Reordering columns Use the Part Navigator Properties dialog box to reorder the columns in the Part Navigator. Add or remove each column as needed from the Part Navigator display. 2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING o 113 From the shortcut menu. Select the check box next to name of the column that you want to appear in the Part Navigator. clear the check box. See Configure Part Navigator columns for details about configuring columns. choose Columns to select the columns that you want to display in the Part Navigator. With nothing selected. For a list of the standard column names. 1. move the cursor to the title bar or to a clear area in the Part Navigator window. c. 3. 4. Configure Part Navigator columns Use the Columns command in the shortcut menu to do the following:   Enable or disable the display of columns in the Part Navigator. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . o Choose Properties to open the Part Navigator Properties dialog box and specify the options you want. See Part Navigator Properties dialog box options for more information about the Part Navigator properties. and right-click to open the shortcut menu. You can disable the display for all column names except Name.

Click OK for the new font assignments to take effect immediately. Right-click the title bar. choose either Columns→Configure or click the Properties→Columns tab to open the Part Navigator Properties dialog box. e. or a clear area in the Part Navigator. specify the colors you want by clicking the color swatches for Parent Objects and Child Objects . Change parent and child font colors in the Part Navigator 1. in the Font Colors section. Move the cursor to a clear area on the Part Navigator Main panel. From the shortcut menu. 2. Right-click and choose Properties to open the Part Navigator Properties dialog box. d. 3. Right-click the Part Navigator tab and choose Undock. Font Colors Parent Objects Child Objects 4. Note You can disable the option of having different colors for parent and child objects by clearing the Parent Objects and Child Objects check boxes. Use Move Up or Move Down to reposition the selected column in the list. 2. Undock or dock the Part Navigator Undock the Part Navigator Do one of the following:   Double-click the Part Navigator tab on the Resource bar. 3. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 114 1. On the General tab. or to the title row.

To dock the Part Navigator in different areas of the window: 1. Release to dock the Part Navigator.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 115 or ↓ Dock the Part Navigator  Close the undocked window. Docked at top Docked at right side drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Click the top black banner of the Part Navigator window and drag it to any edge of the screen. 2.

2. you can trigger an update of the model anytime you edit its features. The update starts at the current feature and continues until the model is complete. Generally. Customize the Part Navigator Resource bar To change how the Part Navigator works with the Resource bar: 116 1. In the Resource Bar group: o From the Display Resource Bar menu list. o Select the Pages Automatically Fly Out check box to enable the Part Navigator to open and close automatically when you move the cursor over and off its selected tab on the Resource Bar. Choose Preferences→User Interface to open the User Interface Preferences dialog box. see the Graphics Configuration Guide for your workstation.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING f. Note Customization on Windows™ is done using the Customer Defaults and entries in the Windows™ registry. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .0 used in example). To set the X resource for general background color for the Part Navigator:  Use the format: *Ugraf<release version #>Mnt*background. 3. Note You can open the Edit During Update dialog box directly from the Edit→Feature→Playback command. Update Commands on the Tools→Update menu let you adjust how an update may occur. or until a feature fails to update. To set the X resource for the color of the lines drawn between the features in the Part Navigator:  Use the format: Ugraf<release version #>*Mnt*treeForeground: <color>. Click the Layout tab. giving you the opportunity to correct the cause of the error. Example: *Ugraf600*Mnt*treeForeground: White (version 6. the update halts and the Edit During Update dialog box opens.0 used in example). Customize Part Navigator X-Resources On non-Windows™ systems you can customize certain parts of the Part Navigator display that use X resources found in the Ugraf file.0. select the On Left or On Right option to specify the side of the session window on which you want the Resource bar to appear.0. If a feature fails to update and the Modeling preference Edit During Update Dialog Appears on is specified. For details on examining and setting options in the Ugraf file. <color>. g. Example: *Ugraf600*Mnt*background: LightSteelBlue (version 6. G.

Lets you specify when to update the display with your edits.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 117 1. For example. interpart extractions. you can only perform one edit operation at a time before the system updates the display. you could move one feature and then edit the parameters of another. you can update those expressions using this command. Update menu options Interpart Update Delays the updating of all interpart objects (that is. interpart expressions. See WAVE in the Assemblies help for more details. Make First Feature Current Makes the feature with the lowest timestamp number the current feature. you would have to wait until the update is completed before you could perform another edit operation. if you moved a feature. and updates the model. but not update either in the model until later. Delayed After Edit When this command is cleared. Updates the model with your previously made edits while Delayed After Edit is selected. See WAVE in the Assemblies help for more details. Update Model Feature Replay manual options The following Feature Replay options are available from both the Tools→Update menu and the Feature Replay toolbar. Resumes update of the interpart child objects after it was suspended by an Interpart Update command. When this command is selected you can perform as many edit operations as you want. Available only when Delayed After Edit is selected. For example. For example. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . if you changed feature parameters using an external spreadsheet (as with the ug_excel_read function in Knowledge Fusion). Update for External Change Updates the model with changes introduced from an external data source. but you cannot update the model until you choose the Update command. Update All Feature Replay toolbar Note Feature Replay options work only for those features that appear in the Part Navigator. and mating conditions) until you trigger an update with the Update All command. Note You cannot suppress or unsuppress features when Delayed After Edit is selected.

Automatic Feature Replay Opens the Automatic Feature Replay dialog box. Use the Playback command on the Edit→Feature menu for feature validation and correction. The feature on which you stop the replay automatically becomes the current feature. where you can run an uninterrupted replay of the model. and fix them if necessary. Set a time-interval for each step in an automatic replay. and select a starting feature for an uninterrupted replay of the model using the Automatic Feature Replay command. Feature Replay Use Feature Replay to review how features were used to construct a model. You can:     Manually step through the features of a model using the commands on the Feature Replay toolbar or Tools→Update menu. and updates the model. Play. 2. and updates the model. pause. and updates the model. Make Next Feature Current Makes the feature with the next higher timestamp number than the current feature the new current feature. and updates the model. Review features for problems during a feature replay. Make Next Boolean Current Makes the next Boolean feature with a timestamp number higher than the current feature the new current feature. . Where do I find it? Toolbar Feature Replay drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Prerequisite A feature must appear in the Part Navigator in order to step to it with Feature Replay. Make Last Feature Current Makes the feature with the highest timestamp number the current feature.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 118 Make Previous Feature Current Makes the feature with the previous timestamp number than the current feature the new current feature. Note Feature Replay is not a feature validation tool.

o The Tools→Update menu. 5. to go to the last feature. The Automatic Feature Replay dialog box opens. or choose it from the Note If an update error occurs during feature playback. On the Feature Replay. 2. 2. In the Replay Control group.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Tools→Update→ Make First Feature Current Make Previous Feature Current Make Next Feature Current Make Last Feature Current Make Next Boolean Current Automatic Feature Replay 119 Menu a. to go to the feature previous to the current to go to the feature after the current feature. to go to the next Boolean feature. Access the Feature Replay commands through either of the following: o The Feature Replay toolbar. move the slider to the desired feature timestamp. type the number of seconds you want the replay to pause between steps. Alternately. click the command for the step you want (or choose it from the menu): o o Click Make First Feature Current Click Make Previous Feature Current feature. o o o Note Each time you step to a different feature. Access the Feature Replay commands through either of the following: o The Feature Replay toolbar. the replay may stop. b. On the Feature Replay toolbar. (Optional) Click Pause to pause the replay. Review an uninterrupted replay of the features in a model 1. 4. 6. Click Play to begin the replay. click Automatic Feature Replay menu. type the number of the timestamp for the feature on which you want to begin the replay. 3. in the Timestamp Number box. Click Make Next Feature Current Click Make Last Feature Current Click Make Previous Boolean Current to go to the first feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . that feature is made the current feature and the model updates. Manually step through the features in a model 1. In the Seconds between Steps box. o The Tools→Update menu.

and if it is associative. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Timestamp Number H. 120 Note If you pause the replay. you can manually step through the model by changing the value of the Timestamp Number option. c. Automatic Feature Replay options Replay Control Starts or resumes play of a paused feature replay. and the model updates accordingly. such as non-associative curve parents. Browser Use the Browser graph view window to explore basic parent-child relations between features and their ancestor and descendant objects. Seconds Between Steps Specifies the number of seconds the replay pauses between each step of an automatic feature replay. Once the slider has focus. or move the slider to the timestamp number of the feature from where you want to begin a replay. The feature for that timestamp number becomes the current feature.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING You can click Play again to resume the replay. You can type a number in the box. Non-feature geometry. The feature on which the replay stops becomes the current feature. you can move the slider in sequential steps in timestamp order through the features of the model. you can use the left and right keyboard arrow keys to do the same thing. Pause Specifies the timestamp number of the current feature. in the Part Navigator. Play Pauses a feature replay. are also included in the browser window. If you paused the replay. When you roll-over an object node in the Browser window it highlights in the graphics window.

Shape Studio Information→Browser Right-click a feature→Browse Graphics window Right-click an expression Right-click a feature→Browse Part Navigator Right-click an expression→Browse 1.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 121   You can click an expression parameter in a feature reference node and edit its value directly in the browser window. Where do I find it? Application Menu Modeling. You can explore the ancestors of a feature reference node and determine how they might be affected by an edit. Types of features you can browse You can browse the following feature types in the Browser:      Body-based features Curve features Point features Datum features Sketch features To interact with a node in the browser: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

such as a non-associative curve that is the parent of a feature You can perform the following actions on geometry in the browser:     Hide a body (using Hide Body) Show parents Hide parents Show a body (using Show Body) You can use the following commands on features in the browser:       Suppress Feature / Unsuppress Feature Replace Feature Make Current Feature / Make Current Tool Feature / Isolate Tool Body Delete Properties Edit Parameters and Edit with Rollback 2. Double-click or right-click a node to edit it. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .   Expressions (both feature expressions and user expressions) Non-feature geometry that has relations to a feature. Browse and edit features on a revolve body In this example we will browse a revolve body and edit both it and some of the features related to it. Right-click a node to display a shortcut menu.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING    122 Click a node to expand it. You can also browse non-feature relations.

123 In the graphics window. In the settings pane. select the Pattern [Circular] feature reference node. 4. click the Browse tab.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 1. 5. select the Center on Select box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Open the settings pane by clicking the Settings caption in the lower left corner of the browser window. In the Browse tab. 2. centered on the revolve feature‘s reference node. In the browser window. right-click Browse on the revolve feature. 3. The Browser opens.

9. 11. 10. Right-click the Angular Direction: Offset Angle expression and click Edit. 7. Change the value to 60 and click the green check box. Click the section sketch of the revolve feature. Change the value in the input box to 6 and click the green check box. An input box opens in the browser window. Right-click the Angular Direction: Number of Copies expression and click Edit. 8. 124 Click the input expand handle on the pattern feature reference to see its input items. The angle of the circular pattern updates.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 6. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

The section and the revolve feature update to the new value. 13. 125 Click the expand handle. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 3.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 12. Change the value in the input box to 2 and click the green check box. Browse feature relations In this example we will explore the feature relations between an edge blend and an extrude on which a pattern of countersunk holes has been built. and then rightclick Edit on the input expression for the base vertical dimension.

The browser opens centered on the edge blend‘s reference node. right click Browse.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 126 1. move the cursor over Edge Blend (10) and when it highlights. In the graphics window. with it‘s parent node expanded. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

hover the cursor over the Pattern Face feature node. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 2. 4. In the browser window. Click the parent node of the Pattern Face. The Pattern Face feature highlights in the graphics window. The parent feature relations node opens. The relation between Edge Blend (10). Pattern Face (8). 127 In the browser window. hover the cursor over Extrude (6). 3. The Extrude (6) feature highlights in the graphics window. and Extrude (6) can be seen to be sequential.

Right-click and choose Fit. 128 You can optionally edit the parameters of Extrude (6) by expanding its input node box and right-clicking its input items and choosing Edit. such as a non-associative curve that is the parent of a feature You can perform the following actions on geometry in the browser:     Hide a body (using Hide Body) Show parents Hide parents Show a body (using Show Body) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can also browse non-feature relations. If the Browser becomes cluttered you can reorganize it from within the browse window:   Right-click and choose Rearrange. 6.   Expressions (both feature expressions and user expressions) Non-feature geometry that has relations to a feature.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 5. Types of features you can browse You can browse the following feature types in the Browser:      Body-based features Curve features Point features Datum features Sketch features To interact with a node in the browser:    Click a node to expand it. 4. Right-click a node to display a shortcut menu. Double-click or right-click a node to edit it.

Browser options Graph view Use the graph view to explore feature relations in your part. Elements of a reference node: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING You can use the following commands on features in the browser:       129 Suppress Feature / Unsuppress Feature Replace Feature Make Current Feature / Make Current Tool Feature / Isolate Tool Body Delete Properties Edit Parameters and Edit with Rollback 5. You can:     Pan the graph view window by holding and dragging with the middle mouse button. Edit feature reference nodes by right-clicking and choosing edit from the context menu or by double-clicking. Expand feature reference nodes by clicking their input items expand handle. Move any feature reference node in the browser window by dragging its name handle.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 130 Open parent nodes Input node name/handle Input node expressions Zoom slider Input node expand Open child nodes Suppression Input node items Sets the scale of the view in the Browser window. You can also right-click Isolate on a node connector line to remove drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can also zoom the browser view using the mouse center wheel. Fit Resizes the contents of the graph view window so all currently displayed feature reference nodes are visible. Many of these options are also available in the Settings pane Rearrange Improves clarity and readability of the graph view window by reorganizing its contents and minimizing the number of crossconnectors. Lets you edit the value of an input expression. Expression edit box Displays when you double-click an input expression. Graph view context menu options You can right-click and select any of the following options from the graph view window. Isolate Displays only the currently highlighted feature reference node and its immediately adjacent parent and child nodes.

View tab Relation View Sets the view mode of the browser. and its immediately adjacent parent and child nodes. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Settings To open the Settings pane in the Browser window. expressions do not display in the browser. You can edit the parameter value of an expression by double-clicking the expression. Show Expressions Displays the input expressions of an expanded feature reference node. their parameter values. and if Icon + Text is selected. Note You can also access most of the Settings pane options from the graph view window by rightclicking and choosing from the context menu. Remove from Graph Temporarily deletes from the graph view window the currently highlighted feature reference node. If this option is cleared. Isolate on Select Displays only the feature reference node you select. All Relations Shows all parent and child relations of a feature. Center on select Centers the graph view window on the feature reference nodes as you select them.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 131 adjacent connector lines and their references from the graph view window. click the Settings caption. Timestamp Shows the order in the browser in which features are applied to a body.

You can right-click and choose Isolate on a node connector line to remove adjacent connectors from the graph view window. In this node style you can still double-click nodes and expressions to edit them.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 132 Show Feature Groups Displays Feature Groups in the browser. Icon Provides a more compact view by showing only icons for the node and parameter structure. Contents of the parent and child nodes are collapsed. Icon + Text Shows both icons and descriptive text for each node and parameter. Isolate is also available on the radial menu when you right click and hold on a drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can also isolate a feature reference node by right-clicking and choosing Isolate. Browse tab Node Style Lets you set the complexity of the graph view by adding or removing text from the nodes. Isolate on Select Shows the selected feature reference node plus its immediate parents and children and hides all other nodes.   Contents of the selected feature reference node are expanded. Automatically invoked when you initially select from the Part Navigator.

Display Legacy Feature Names Clear this option to have the names of features display in plain. usually in all capital characters and connected by underscores. Center on Select. Where do I find it? Application Menu Modeling Preferences→Modeling 1. Select this option to show the names of features in the old. Automatically invoked when you initially select from the Part Navigator. I. You can change settings while in the process of creating an object. and for some of those the new values may persist for them throughout the current NX session. Center on Select 133 Pans or shifts the display so the selected feature reference node is centered in the graph view window. inconsistent style. etc. Here are some examples: Plain text feature name Mirror Set Simple Hole Datum Coordinate System Legacy feature name MIRROR_SET SIMPLE_HOLE DATUM_CSYS drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING feature reference node. Isolate on Select. Animate Simulates movement in the graph view window for certain operations. Some settings can also be specified within certain Modeling command dialog boxes. Modeling Preferences Once you set a Modeling preference. Legend tab Includes a list of objects that can appear in the graph view window and their basic definitions. Modeling Preferences — General Specifies the way feature names appear in the Part Navigator and other dialog boxes. such as Fit. subsequently created objects default to it. Modeling preferences are always available during any Modeling operation. translatable text that matches the menu bar names.

Sheet Sets the default body type to sheet body. Revolve. the total allowable tolerance is obtained by multiplying the tolerances by the Optimize Curve Tolerance Factor. such as Extrude. the distance tolerance specifies the maximum allowable distance between corresponding points on the original surface and the resulting B-surface. Through Curves. such as when creating swept and revolved solid bodies and sectioning solid bodies. or the maximum allowable angle between curve tangent vectors at corresponding points. Angle tolerance is the maximum allowable Angle Tolerance angle between the surface normals at corresponding points. Distance Tolerance This value is used throughout the Modeling application. Optimize Curve Tolerance Factor Only available when the Optimize Curve check box is selected. Specifies the default density assigned to subsequently-created solid bodies in the current part. This factor is multiplied by the tolerances to obtain the total allowable tolerance. With this check box selected. and Ruled . a sheet body is produced instead. For example. Through Curve Mesh. if it is not possible for the selected input geometry to produce a solid body with a given command. Density Units Specifies the default density units assigned to subsequently-created solid bodies in drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Specifies the default angle tolerance. Body Type Note that. Specifies the default modeling distance tolerance. Section. when creating sheet bodies. Density Note Use the Assign Solid Density command to change the density value of an existing solid body.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 134 Specifies the default type of body created with certain commands. Solid Sets the default body type to solid body. Used by:           Optimize Curve Ruled Through Curves Through Curve Mesh Sweep Along Guide Swept Section Surface Law Extension Surface Project Curve Intersection Curve Offset Curve in Face This option optimizes the curve from which the developed or section curves are calculated. Sew.

You can still change the density value. choose this option. New Face Properties from If you want the display properties to be consistent within a body. When this preference is set to Parent Body. Available density units are:     135 Lb/Cu In (pounds per cubic inch) Lb/Cu Ft (pounds per cubic feet) G/Cu Cm (grams per cubic centimeter) Kg/Cu M (kilograms per cubic meters) Changing the density units causes the system to recalculate the current density value based on the new units. such as those set under Preferences→ Object. the following blend on a cylinder results in a blended surface with a different color than that of the cylinder (right view).[NX8 HELP] – MODELING the current part. Part Default Specifies that newly created faces use the default display properties of the part. Display Properties for New Geometry Parent Body Specifies that newly created faces use the display properties that are already assigned to the body to which the face is being added. if desired. the following blend on a cylinder results in a new face with the same display properties as the body on which the face is created (right view). When this preference is set to Part Default . drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

Extracted and Specifies the source for the display properties of objects extracted and linked to an drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Boolean Face Properties from Tool Body New face properties that result from Boolean operations are based on those of the tool body. the Subtract operation results in two new faces that have the display properties of the tool body (right view). a Boolean Subtract operation takes place. This results in two new faces that have the display properties of the target body (right view). with the tan cylinder as the target body and the blue block as the tool body. In the following figure.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 136 Target Body New face properties that result from Boolean operations are based on those of the target body. When this preference is set to Tool Body.

if the grid counts are small. The new settings will not cause datums and sketches to be internalized again when you edit the feature. You can still make datums or sketches external using Features the existing Part Navigator commands. assign a larger number of grid curves. Automatically Make Sketch The software automatically internalizes datums or sketches only when you create a Internal to Child child sketch or a child feature. From Parent Object 137 Newly linked objects use the display properties from the parent object in the parent part. Internal datums and sketches do not appear in the Part Navigator. The grid curves are only a display feature. Automatically make sketches internal to their child features when possible. Grid Lines These settings: Automatically Make Datums Internal to Child Sketches   Automatically make datums internal to their child sketches when possible. (You can add grid lines to any previously created sheet body or solid body by using Edit→Object Display command. To obtain a smoother display. However.) Unless U Count and V Count are both 0. Part Default Newly linked objects use the default display properties of the target part. The number of grid curves does not affect the accuracy of the actual surface. the surface may appear to be jagged. freeform.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Linked Geometry assembly with the WAVE Geometry Linker . Specifies the number of grid curves in the U and V directions of the faces of the body you are creating. so you can use these settings to shorten the Model history for a part. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and swept faces. such as those set under Preferences→ Object. the grid display is added to newly created b-surface.

If tolerances cannot be met with the Maximum Degree. Specifies the default maximum number of segments to use with the curve fitting method for developed curves. always creates a B-surface. Advanced The Advanced option is available on certain feature edit dialogs when the Curve Fit Method is presented. and better replicate the curvature properties of the true curve. that spline will be created. Modeling Preferences — Freeform Curve Fit Method Cubic Uses degree 3 splines. and are therefore easier to edit by moving poles. When selected. When selected. Advanced Rebuild Options Maximum Degree Maximum Segments Specifies the default maximum number of degrees to use with the curve fitting method for developed curves. Quintic The software attempts to build the surface without segments until the number of degrees specified by the Maximum Degree parameter is reached. Through Curve Mesh. and if the input geometry would produce a planar surface. Swept. a bounded plane is created instead. If you need to transfer your spline data to another system that only supports degree 3 splines. Curves created with the Quintic fit method have a smaller number of segments than those created with the Cubic fit method. B-Surface A B-surface provides control of a surface's isoparametric curve or flowline data. you must use this option. The curvature distributions are smoother. and use Cubic and Quintic for curves you want to be in tolerance. Provides greater control over the degree and segmentation of developed curves. Freeform Construction Result Controls free form feature creation for the Through Curves. If the maximum degree and maximum segments combined still does not allow the tolerance to be met. and Ruled commands. Note Curve Fit Method only affects the result when the fitting curve must be an approximation.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 138 2. Use Advanced to create curves that are more suitable for styling related tasks. If the result can be exactly replicated by a spline of any degree. Plane Using bounded planes instead of B-surfaces (see below) may enhance the performance and reliability of downstream applications. The Maximum Degree and Maximum Segments settings (see Advanced Rebuild Options below) are also used by certain functions that use the Rebuild option when Curve Fit Method is set to Advanced. Uses degree 5 splines. segments are added until the number set for Maximum Segments is reached. the curve is created and a message displays stating that it does not meet the specified tolerance. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Default values can be specified in the Advanced Rebuild Options.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Animation 139 Controls surface animation functions in certain surface edit and Move Pole operations. either in shaded or wireframe mode. Choose from the following options to produce a preview grid that is respectively more detailed:       None Coarse Standard Fine Extra Fine Ultra Fine The None setting shows no grid at all in wireframe mode. Law Extension surfaces. Preview Resolution Coarse preview grid Fine preview grid Enable Trimmed Animation Use Enables animations of trimmed surfaces during certain surface create and edit operations. such as with Swoop. Sets the resolution of the preview grid. You can change these settings at any time and see immediate results. Enables display of a triangular mesh on surfaces during certain surface create and edit drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and Styled Blend.

and Stiffness will only recall the result of the editing and not how it was created. Deform Sheet. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Linear has a higher success rate than the Soft setting. such as with Swoop. and Styled Blend. Linear Surfaces extended using Linear are usually less smooth and less aesthetically pleasing than those produced by the Soft setting. Degree. and Linear Dimension. Deform Sheet. Match Edge. the feature hierarchy remains in place. When selected. Change Edge. Internal surface C0 or C1 knots or surface poles are added into the extended surface or adjacent surfaces to maintain body integrity. and can be useful in certain cases to avoid functional regressions in your model. Surface Extension Method Controls the quality of extended B-surface faces created or modified by some Synchronous Modeling commands. Move Pole. Move Pole. Stiffness. the Studio Spline command appears on double-clicking a spline.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Triangular Mesh 140 operations. and Move Defining Point. Transform. freeform features are created for the following edit commands: Snip Surface. If this option is not selected. the X-Form command appears on double-clicking a spline. X-Form When selected. Move Defining Point. Pole Smoothing. Note that the Enlarge command disregards the Associative Freeform Editing setting If the Edit a Copy option is selected. Enlarge. letting you return to the original shape by deleting or suppressing selected features. Refit Face. Although you cannot edit these features using their creation parameters. Default Action on Spline Specifies the default editor to use when you double-click a spline. Surfaces are extended as linear tangent. Transform. Xform. Isoparametric Trim/Divide. Make Coplanar. Note The setting for this option is effective only with a Shape Studio license. Studio Spline When selected. Degree. However. Associative Freeform Editing Features created using X-Form. Change Edge. Law Extension surfaces. unparameterized features are created when using the edit commands shown above. Specifies whether the result you get when editing certain free form features remain as free form features or as unparameterized features. Isoparametric Trim/Divide. such as Move Face.

Specifies the line font for B-curve and B-surface polylines when they drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . the color of polylines being edited is the same as that of the underlying body. Lets you specify a custom color from a color palette. the color is the same as that of the underlying body. Specifies one of the following styles for B-curve poles:     Open Circle Filled Circle Plus Sign Cross Polyline Body Color Color Palette Polyline Font When selected. This option produces higher quality. the color is the same as that of the underlying body. Pole When selected. Color Palette Pole Style Lets you specify a custom color from a color palette. smoother surfaces than that of the Linear option. Lets you specify a custom color from a color palette. Pole Body Color When selected. Body Color Color Palette Pole Style Lets you specify a custom color from a color palette.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 141 Soft Surfaces are extended smoothly as C2 curvature continuous. with no unnecessary C0 knot and surface poles added. Specifies the line font for B-curve and B-surface polylines. Specifies one of the following styles for B-curve and B-surface poles when they are being edited:      3D Sphere Open Circle Filled Circle Plus Sign Cross Polyline Body Color Color Palette Polyline When selected. the color is the same as that of the underlying body. Modeling Preferences — Analysis Pole and Polyline Display Specifies the color and font styles of B-curve poles and B-surface polylines. 3. Edited Pole and Polyline Display Specifies the color and font styles of B-curve poles and B-surface polylines when they are being edited.

If the Body Color check box is not selected. inherits the line font for the Grid Line. For more information. There are local features. see Modeling modes . you can choose a new color by clicking the color swatch. You can select one of the following: Modeling Mode History HistoryFree The model is created and maintained using an ordered sequence of features that are displayed in the Part Navigator . C0 Knot Line. C1 Knot Line. If the Font check box is not selected. C1 Knot Line. You can choose Color / to inherit the color and/or the line font from the body that the face belongs to. or C2 Knot Line from the body to which the face belongs. Edit Parameters drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The line font option list is not available for any option with the Font check box selected. The setting you select takes place immediately on clicking OK or Apply . or specify a color and/or line font for the grid line and knot line. C0 Knot Line.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Font are being edited. 142 Face Display Body Specifies the color and line font for grid lines and C0. Font When selected. you can choose a line font from the respective option list. Modeling Preferences — Edit Edit Lets you switch the Modeling mode. and C2 knot lines. C1. 4. inherits the color for the Grid Line. Edit with Rollback Double-click Action (Features) Makes the selected feature the current feature and enters the edit mode. but they are not ordered. The color swatch is not available for any option with the Body Color check box selected. The model is created and edited without an ordered sequence of features. or C2 Knot Line from the body to which the face belongs. Font Body Color When selected.

for example. as required in earlier versions of NX. Direct Edit Lets you edit the sketch directly in Modeling. Double-click Action (Sketches) Allow Editing of Dimensions of Internal Sketch 5. means that one mark is set after five features are created or edited. the software locates the nearest previous mark to that feature. only features that were created or edited after that mark are updated. Enables a warning message to appear when you attempt to delete a feature that has feature dependencies (for example. Modeling Preferences — Update Update Specifies how often the software sets internal update marks during feature creation and editing. Task Environment Enters the Sketch Task Environment. are listed. also place higher demands on memory and disk space. updating can occur on only the most recent changes. a few other features are also updated if they are directly associated to features created or edited after the mark. or Cancel to stop it. When you edit a feature. You can choose OK to continue the deletion. however. where details on the features that will be deleted. A value of 5. Entire models no longer have to be updated. In general. Smaller values.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 143 Enters the feature edit mode without changing the current feature. Note The smaller the value of Features/Mark. Select Task Environment if you have sketches with many dependent features. With these marks. the fewer the number of features that are regenerated when you update the model. Controls whether you can see and edit internal sketch dimensions when the dialog box for the owning feature is open. if you try to delete a feature that is used as a positioning reference by a second feature) Notify on Delete The message dialog box includes an option to open the Information window. Occasionally. Edit Sketch Action Caution Direct Edit updates the model immediately. along with other features that will be affected by the deletion. Edit with Rollback Makes the selected sketch the current feature and enters the Sketch Task Environment. Edit Enters the direct sketch mode without changing the current feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Features/Mark .

lines or arcs are changed. In these cases. There may be cases when a temporary body is dynamically displayed. for example through the editing of curves and bridge features with Edit→ Feature. and a warning message appears if the system is unsure that the body displayed is accurate. Dynamic Update is effective for the following edit operations:     Dynamic Update Editing splines with the Edit Pole and Edit Point commands. Use this setting when continuous dynamic updates would excessively slow your system. Incremental The dynamic update of the child body occurs only when you stop moving the mouse while editing the parent curve (for example. First level drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Editing arc endpoints. while dragging a spline pole). Controls whether Dynamic Update affects the first level child bodies of the parent curve being edited. Note Dynamic updates are not performed when you edit body parameters from the Edit During Update dialog. The display of the changing body is temporary until you complete the edit action. Use this setting when continuous dynamic updates do not excessively slow your system. the temporary body will not be accurate. Continuous The dynamic update of a child body occurs continuously as you move the mouse while editing the parent curve. When selected.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 144 Lets you specify the rate at which the software dynamically updates the display of a body as its parent curves. In addition. Note The temporary body displayed in Edit Curve through Edit Feature may not be the same as the final body if a Boolean operation was used to create the feature. bridge curves. or all child bodies of the curve. This setting renders a real time dynamic response from the graphics window when editing a body's parent curves. warning messages will be generated. whereupon it becomes permanent. Editing bridge curves. Editing line endpoints. in cases where features previous to the selected feature also require update. splines. radii or arc centers. None Disables Dynamic Update during the edit of a body's parent curves. Dynamic Children First Level Allows dynamic updates during edit to occur only for those features that are directly derived from the curve or curves being edited.

the Dynamic Children setting is ignored by the software. Datum/Point View a topic Datum Plane Datum Plane Grid Point Point Set drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . J. Make the problem feature the current feature in the Part Navigator so that you can correct the error. Features that are not updated due to model changes are marked with Update Failed in the Part Navigator so you know to edit them. All Level Allows dynamic updates during edit to occur for all features that are dependent on the curve or curves being edited.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 145 children are defined as the first bodies that can be derived from a curve. New features fail to update. Lets you do the following: Make Current Feature on Error   Stop a part update when an error occurs. If Dynamic Update is set to None. or remove features and then manually resume the update. Specifies whether the report window is displayed after: Generate Warning/Failure Report after Update   The software displays a warning during an update. Edit During Update Dialog Appears on Warnings Displays the Edit During Update dialog box when warning messages are generated during a part update or feature playback. You can edit. and are not hidden or do not lie on an invisible layer. Error Displays the Edit During Update dialog box when errors are encountered during feature playback. Missing References Displays the Edit During Update dialog box appears when missing references are encountered during a part update or feature playback. the Edit During Update dialog box appears if a failure is encountered. If you update or playback your part with this option selected. add.

faces. Datum Plane Use the Datum Plane command to create a planar reference feature to help define other features. Relative datum planes Relative datum planes reference curves. and other datums. edges. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Datum Axis Datum CSYS Plane object 146 1. NX determines how to create a datum plane based on the type of objects you select. Create a datum plane using Infer In this example. Fixed datum planes Fixed datum planes do not reference other geometry. such as swept bodies and features at angles to the faces of target solids. You can create relative datum planes across multiple bodies. Use any of the relative datum plane methods to create fixed datum planes by clearing the Associative box in the Datum Plane dialog box. points. Datum planes can be relative or fixed. as you select them. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Shortcut menu Modeling Feature→Datum/Point Drop-down→Datum Plane Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane Right-click a planar face→Datum Plane a.

Select the second linear edge to define the plane. Select the first linear edge to define the plane. 3.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 1. From the Type list. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Click Datum Plane 147 2. 4. select Inferred .

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 148 5. 1. Click Datum Plane 2. Choose another command or click Apply. b. select Inferred 3. Create a datum plane using offset This example shows how to create a datum plane that is offset from an inferred plane using two lines. From the Type list. . Select the first linear edge to define the plane.

Select the second linear edge to define the plane. Verify the direction of the desired offset. In the Offset group. 5.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 149 4. select the Offset check box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

Create a datum plane using a point and a direction In this example. Click Datum Plane 2. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 150 Drag the direction arrow the desired value of the offset. or enter it in the offset Distance box. 7. 1. NX creates a datum plane through a specified arc center and parallel to a selected planar face. Choose another command or click Apply. From the Type list. c.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 6. select Point and Direction .

Choose another command or click Apply. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The arc center is selected. 151 Select a point through which the datum plane must pass. 5. 6. Click the middle mouse button to advance to the next step. 4. Select a planar face.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 3.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . select Value.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING d. Click Datum Plane 2. From the Type list. From the Angle Option list. Create a datum plane at an angle 152 The following example shows how to create a datum plane at an angle of 115 degrees from a reference plane. Select the front angled face. 1. 4. Select the top right linear edge of the part. 5. select At Angle 3. .

Click the middle mouse button to advance to the next step. Create a datum plane midway between planar faces The following example shows how to create a datum plane that bisects the angle formed by two planar faces. e.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 6. Choose another command or click Apply. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Select the front planar face. . From the Type list. 1. select Bisector 3. 153 Drag the angle handle until the value shows 115 degrees. 4. Click Datum Plane 2. 7.

click Alternate Solution to get a different solution to the selections made. Choose another command or click Apply. 7.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 5. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 6. Alternate Solution was clicked once. (Optional) In the Plane Orientation group. 154 Select the top planar face. In this example.

Specify the second point. Specify the first point. From the Type list. 1. Select an End Point on the bottom surface. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 6. Specify the third point. select Curves and Points. This example will use two arc centers and one end point. Click Datum Plane 2. 3. 4. from the Subtype list. Choose another command or click Apply. Select the arc center in the top face. select Three Points. Select the arc center on the bottom inside face. In the Curves and Points Subtype group.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING f. Create a datum plane through three points 155 The following example shows how to create a datum plane that contains three specified points. 5.

2. In the Coefficients (aX+bY+cZ=d) group. Bisector — Creates a plane midway between two selected planar faces or planes. a line. specify the plane using the equation a*x + b*y + c*z = d. Two Lines — Creates a plane using a combination of any two linear curves. 5. the plane is placed at the bisected angle. etc. a planar edge. Curves and Points — Creates a plane using various combinations of points. Datum Plane dialog box Type Lists the construction methods you use to create planes. If the input planes are at an angle to each other. or a planar face (for example. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日     . 1. For absolute coordinates. Tangent — Creates a datum plane tangent to a non-planar surface. linear edges. In the Type group. and d.    o o . At Angle — Creates a plane at a specified angle from a selected planar object. three points. b. and d boxes. 3. select Coefficients . or datum axes. from the Datum/Point Drop-down list. Click OK or Apply to create the datum plane. a datum axis.). or Inferred — Determines the best datum plane type to use based on objects you select. Type the coefficient values for the equation in the a. a preview of the datum plane displays and updates based on the changing coefficient values. to open the Datum Plane dialog box. 4. select Datum Plane choose Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane. a. specify the plane using the equation a*xc + b*yc + c*zc = d. from the list. a point and a curve. On the Feature toolbar. click WCS or Absolute. b. c.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 156 g. Create a datum plane using coefficients Use this method to create a datum plane based on an equation using four coefficients. c. relative to a second selected object. For WCS coordinates. As you specify values in each box. At Distance — Creates a plane parallel to a planar face or another datum plane at a distance you specify. h.

To access all the parameters of a constructed plane. YC-ZC plane . Constructed — Available when you edit a plane that was created by using an option that is not available on the lists. or datum plane to use as a reference for the angle. you must use the Datum Plane dialog box. plane. View Plane — Creates a fixed datum plane parallel to the view plane. and D coefficients: o Ax + By + Cz = D    Point and Direction — Creates a plane from a point and a specified direction. XC-YC plane — Creates a fixed datum plane along the XC-YC.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING   157 Through Object — Creates a datum plane on the surface normal of a selected object. additional options for that type appear in the dialog box. Inferred You can use the Point Constructor to specify point objects. B. The objects you select determine the plane type and the type of additional objects you select. Planar Reference  Select Planar Object Lets you select a planar face. or YC-ZC axis of the Work Coordinate System (WCS) or Absolute Coordinate System (ABS). non-associative datum plane on the WCS or absolute coordinate system using an equation of A. Coefficients — Creates a fixed. XC-ZC plane .    Type-Specific options Objects to Define Plane  Select Object Lets you select one or more objects to define the plane. On Curve — Creates a plane at a location on a curve or edge. Fixed — Available only when editing a fixed datum plane. At Angle Through Axis  Select Linear Object Lets you select a linear curve. edge. and passing through the origin of the WCS. XC-ZC. C. As you select objects and based on the plane type that NX infers. or datum axis to define the angle's axis of drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

To reverse the direction you can also: When you reverse the offset direction. the plane moves to the opposite side of the reference object. At Distance  Reverse Direction Reverses the direction of the offset.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 158 rotation. The plane normal also reverses in a mirror-like transformation.  Number of Planes Specifies the number of copies of the new plane to create. Offset  Distance Specifies the value for a distance to offset the datum plane. plane. You cannot select an object that is perpendicular to the reference plane Angle  Angle Option Lets you select a method to define the angle of the plane. o Value Specifies the value for the angle. Planar Reference  Select Planar Object Lets you select a planar face. Copies are created drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Perpendicular Makes the datum plane perpendicular to the planar reference object and pass through the through axis object. Sets a degree value in the Angle box.  Angle Appears when the Angle Option is set to Value. Type a value in the Distance box or drag the Distance handle. or an existing datum plane to use as a reference object for the new datum plane. Parallel Makes the datum plane parallel to the planar reference and pass through the through axis object.

such as a planar face. If you select a planar face or datum plane. With all methods you must first specify an origin point and then reference objects. or edge. Three Points Creates a datum plane that passes through three points. or plane. or plane objects to define the bisector plane. linear curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 159 successively and spaced evenly from one another using the same offset value. the datum plane passes through the point. First Plane Second Plane  Select Planar Object Lets you select the first and second planar faces. After selecting the origin point: o o If you select a line. but is parallel to the reference object. linear curve. datum axis. Bisector Curves and Points Subtype Lists subtype methods. the datum plane passes through both objects. such as a line. Reference Geometry drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . datum axis. Point and Curve/Axis Creates a datum plane with a point and a linear object. or edge. One Point Creates a datum plane that passes through a single point. Point and Plane/Face Creates a datum plane with a point and a planar object. datum planes. Curves and Points Two Points Creates a datum plane that passes through a single point and is perpendicular to a second point. datum plane.  Curves and Points Determines the subtype to use based on the objects you select.

Lets you select a planar object. such as a planar face. Lets you select a point and a linear object.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  160 Specify Point Appears for all subtype options except Curves and Points. such as a line. you can use Alternate Solution to get a plane that passes through the second line and is parallel to the first. Lets you select a point and other objects to define the plane. linear edges. Two Lines o o o If you select two lines that are coplanar. or datum axes. linear curve. All tangent subtypes require that you first select a non-planar face. You an also use Alternate Solution to get a plane that passes through the second line and is perpendicular to the first.  Select Object Appears only for the Curves and Points subtype. the plane includes both lines. the plane contains the first line and is perpendicular to the second. Lets you specify each point required by the subtype.  Select Planar Object Appears when the subtype option is Point and Plane/Face. or edge that defines the plane. First Line Second Line  Select Linear Object Lets you select two objects to define the datum plane: linear curves. Tangent Subtype Lists the sub type methods. If you select two lines that are not coplanar and not perpendicular. If you select two lines that are not coplanar but are perpendicular. Tangent  Tangent drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . or plane object to be used with a point to define the plane. datum axis.  Select Curve Object Appears when the subtype option is Point and Curve/Axis. datum plane.

conical.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 161 Determines a subtype to use based on the objects you select. cylindrical. Through Line Creates a datum plane tangent to a cylindrical or conical face and a linear object. Lets you specify a plane that is drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Lets you select one or more objects to define the plane. or spherical. The second object you choose can be any of the following: o o o o o o Point Linear edge Line Face Datum axis Datum plane One Face Creates a datum plane tangent to a selected cylindrical or conical face. or set them as perpendicular or parallel to one another in Angle Option. Angle to Plane Creates a datum plane tangent to a cylindrical face and a planar object or face. Reference Geometry  Select Object Appears when the subtype is Tangent. for example. Two Faces Creates a datum plane tangent to two non-planar faces. You can assign an angle value between the faces.  Select Linear Object Appears when the subtype is Through Line. Through Point Creates a datum plane tangent to a non-planar face and a point. cylindrical or conical faces to define the plane.  Select Tangent Face Appears for all subtype options except Tangent. Lets you select one or more nonplanar.

o Parallel Makes the datum plane parallel to the planar reference.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING tangent to a cylindrical or conical face and a linear object. Angle Appears when the subtype is Angle to Plane. o Perpendicular Makes the datum plane perpendicular to the planar reference object. Sets a degree value. Lets you create a plane that is tangent to a point and a non-planar face.  Specify Point Appears when the subtype is Through Point. Through Object  Select Object Lets you select a single object through which the datum plane will pass. Lets you create a plane that is tangent to a cylindrical face and a planar face. You can select the following types of objects: Through Object o o o o o o Curve Edge Face Datum Plane Datum CSYS drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can type a value in the Angle box or drag the angle handle.  Angle Option Lists the options to specify how the angle is defined: o Value Sets a value for the angle. Angle Appears when the Angle Option is set to Value.  162 Select Planar Object Appears when the subtype is Angle to Plane.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING
o o o

163 CSYS Spherical surfaces and surfaces of revolution Axis of a cylindrical, conical, or revolved face

Curve, edge, or face objects can be planar or non-planar. If you select a conical or cylindrical face, the datum plane is created on the axis of the face. Coefficients (aX+bY+cZ=d)

WCS Creates the plane on the WCS coordinate system.

Absolute Creates the plane on the absolute coordinate system.

Coefficients

a, b, c, d Sets the values for the a, b, c, and d parameters for the equation, aX+bY+cZ=d, to specify a plane. A, B, and C define the direction of the plane normal. D relates to the plane‘s distance from the CSYS origin (=D/SQRT[A^2+B^2+C^2]).

Through Point

Specify Point Lets you define an origination point for the plane.

Normal Direction Point and Direction

Specify Vector Lets you define the direction of the plane.

Reverse Direction Lets you reverse the normal direction of the vector.

Curve

Select Curve Lets you select a curve or an edge. You can select a second object, a face, datum plane, datum axis, or another curve drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

On Curve

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

164

or edge if it will make the datum plane perpendicular to it at the point on curve. Reverse Direction Lets you change the location of the plane from one end of the curve or edge to the other end without changing the location value. Location on Curve

Location Lets you place the plane at a precise location along the curve or edge. Arc Length / %Arc Length Sets a value to position the plane along the curve or edge, either as a distance or as a percentage of arc length. You can type the value in the Arc Length or %Arc Length box, or drag the curve point handle to the desired position. Note Arc length is a position along a curve expressed as a unit of measure distance. The percent of arc length is a position along a curve expressed as a percentage of its total length, a value between 0 and 100. Tip You can right-click the datum plane handle to change between Arc Length and %Arc Length.

Specify Point Appears when Location is set to Through Point. Lets you define an origin point for the datum. You can drag the point handle to a new point position on the curve, as long as it satisfies the current snap point settings. Orientation on Curve

Direction Lets you specify the direction of the plane normal. Select Object Appears when the Direction option is Relative to Object, to let you select an object to which you want to make the datum plane parallel. Specify Vector Appears when the Direction option is Normal to Vector, Parallel to Vector, or Through Axis, to let you specify a vector or axis on which to align the datum drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING plane.

165

YC-ZC Plane

Offset and Reference

WCS / Absolute Specifies the coordinate system on which to create the plane.

XC-ZC Plane

Distance Adds a distance to offset the new plane from the coordinate system.

XC-YC Plane Plane Orientation Appears when there is more than one possible solution for creating the datum plane using the current parameters. Displays the other possible solutions for creating a plane when you click or press the Page Down or Page Up keys. The following animation shows an example of using Alternate Solution with tangent datum planes. Alternate Solution

Reverses the direction of the plane normal. The plane preview always displays an arrow from its center that points in the direction of the plane normal. Common to all types. Offset Available to all datum plane types except At Distance, Coefficients, YC-ZC Plane, XCZC Plane, XC-YC Plane, and View Plane. Offset When selected, it creates a datum plane offset from the defined plane, in the Direction and at the distance you specify. Available when the Offset check box is selected and a base plane has been defined. Distance Enter the value, or drag the handle to the desired offset distance. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

Reverse Direction

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Reverse Direction Settings Available to all datum planes of non-fixed types.

166

Available when the Offset check box is selected and a base plane has been defined. This reverses the offset direction.

Makes a datum plane an associative feature that appears in the Part Navigator with the name Datum Plane. Associative If you clear the Associative check box, the datum plane is created as the Fixed type, and appears in the Part Navigator as a non-associative Fixed Datum Plane. When you edit a datum plane, you can change a fixed datum plane to a relative plane by changing the Type, redefining its parent geometry, and selecting the Associative check box. i. Editing datum planes When editing a datum plane, you can:
    

Change its parameters and parent geometry, when allowed by its defined Type. Change its Type. Convert a relative datum plane to fixed by clearing the Associative option box, or by changing its Type to that of a fixed method. Convert a fixed datum plane to relative by changing its Type to a relative (non-fixed) method. Move a fixed datum plane by choosing Edit→Feature→Move Feature.

j. Size and resize datum planes This example shows how to resize an existing datum plane, and is similar to resizing a datum plane when it is first created. 1. In the graphics window or the Part Navigator, right-click an existing datum plane→Resize Datum Plane. The Resize Datum Plane dialog box opens, and sizing handles appear on the corners and mid points of the datum plane.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

167

2. Use any of these methods to change the size of the datum plane: o Drag the sizing handles to change the length and height of the datum plane. o Click a sizing handle and enter Length and Height values in the on-screen input boxes. o Click a sizing handle and then select a Snap Point location on which to align it (Snap Point is available only with some methods, such as Plane on Curve and Point and Direction). o Right-click a sizing handle and choose Symmetric to constrain the datum plane with equal sides. You can drag a length handle to size both length sides equally, or drag a height handle to size the two height sides equally. Drag a corner handle to size all sides equally. o Right-click a sizing handle and choose Reset Plane Size to return the datum plane to its original size. 3. Finish the resize of the datum plane by doing one of the following: o Click Apply and select another datum plane to resize. o Click OK to dismiss the Resize Datum Plane dialog box. Note You can also open the Resize Datum Plane dialog box by:
 

Clicking Resize Datum Plane on the Edit Feature toolbar. Choosing Edit→Feature→Resize Datum Plane.

Warning You can resize fixed datum planes created in any release, all datum planes created in NX1 or later, and Point and Direction and Three Points datum planes created in V18 and later. You cannot resize or drag older, relative datum planes using the old Datum Plane Pre-NX dialog box.

2. Datum Plane Grid
Use the Datum Plane Grid command to place a grid directly on a datum plane or a plane of a datum CSYS. A datum plane grid is a localized grid that helps you work on an object in your model. Grids typically provide the context of location and size to objects. You can create or edit a datum plane grid in any application where you can create a datum plane, such as Modeling. The following figure shows a datum plane grid. The grid's boundaries are expanded beyond the datum plane to make the grid labels more readable.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

168

You can:
   

Create multiple datum plane grids in your model, which lets you optimize each grid for the object it belongs to. Rotate a datum plane grid within the plane it is located on. Create section curves where the grid intersects the model after you rotate the grid to the orientation you want. Use the model's work plane grid even when datum plane grids are visible.

The parent-child relationship between the datum plane and the datum plane grid is displayed in the Dependencies panel of the Part Navigator. Part Navigator Model History Datum Coordinate System (0) Datum Plane (1) Dependencies Datum Plane (1) Children Datum Plane Grid Parents Datum Coordinate System (0) Where do I find it? Application Modeling and other applications where you can create a datum plane Menu Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane Grid Graphics window Right-click a datum plane→Datum Plane Grid a. Create a datum plane grid The Datum Plane Grid command is available in applications where you can create a datum plane, such as Modeling or NX Sheet Metal. 1. Choose Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane Grid. 2. Select a datum plane or a plane of a datum CSYS, as shown in the following figure.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

169

3. Specify whether the Grid Orientation is From Datum Plane or Custom. If you set Grid Orientation to Custom, you can modify the default orientation with the Specify Orientation option and the manipulator. Note In this step, the grid settings and values are the defaults. If the defaults meet your needs, you can click OK to create the grid. Otherwise, you can continue with the remaining steps in this procedure until the grid appears as you want it. The following three figures show how you can move a grid if, for example, you want to make its labels more readable.

Custom setting with manipulator and default grid

Select a drag handle, and drag the manipulator to a new location

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

170

The datum plane grid moves after you release the manipulator Another way to make the grid labels more readable is to leave the grid in place, but expand the sides.

Drag a green ball to expand the grid boundaries

The expanded grid's labels are more readable 4. Check the Settings and modify them as desired: o Select the Display Grid check box if you want to see the grid, which updates as you continue to define it. o Select the Display On Top check box if you want the grid to be visible through your model. o Select the Display Major Lines check box if you want the major lines in the grid to be visible. If this check box is not selected, only the minor lines are visible (assuming the Display Grid check box is selected). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 5. If you want to inherit attributes from an existing datum plane grid, click Select Grid select the existing datum plane grid.

171 , and

You can then click OK to create the new grid, or continue with the following steps to modify the attributes as desired. 6. In Major Line Spacing, specify the distance between the datum plane grid's major lines. 7. In Minor Lines per Major, specify the number of minor lines in each set of two major lines. One of the minor lines in each set appears in the same location as a major line. For example, if you set Minor Lines per Major to 2, and your major lines are visible, one minor line is visible between each set of major lines. 8. Set the Line Attribute options as desired to specify the grid's color, line style, and line weight (or thickness). 9. In Show Labels, select one of the following: o None — the grid has no labels o Parallel — the grid's labels are visible only when the datum plane grid is parallel to the view o Always — the grid's labels are visible whenever the grid is visible 10. In Origin Reference, specify whether the labels' origin reference is the absolute CSYS, the WCS, or a local CSYS. If you set Origin Reference to Local, the Specify Origin option appears, so you can select a point for the origin. 11. If you want to create section curves where the datum plane grid crosses your model, do the following: o Set the Show Section Curves check box. o In Color Option, specify whether the section curves' color is Body Color or Specify Color. To specify the color, click the Color swatch and select a color.
o

If you want to save the section curves with your model, click Save Copy of Section Curves .

o

Section curves (blue) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

) . or a plane of a datum CSYS. Lets you specify the thickness of minor lines. b. such as dashed. Specify Orientation If you click Specify Orientation . Controls whether the manipulator handles are visible. and only when Grid Orientation is set to Custom. and only when Grid Orientation is set to Custom. Specifies whether the grid orientation is custom or based on the datum plane. Select Grid Line Spacing Major Line Spacing Minor Lines per Major Line Attributes Line Color Major Line Style Major Line Weight Minor Line Style Minor Line Lets you specify the color of the grid's lines. such as dashed. Lets you specify the line style. the Point Dialog can click to help you specify a point to locate the grid. Click OK when you finish defining the datum plane grid. (One minor line appears in the same location as a major line for each set. Appears only after you select a datum plane. for major lines. Appears only after you select a datum plane. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Lets you specify the distance between the grid's major lines. Lets you specify the number of minor lines in each set of two major lines. Lets you specify or modify the orientation and location of the datum plane grid. Lets you specify the thickness of major lines. Lets you specify the line style. for minor lines. icon appears. which you Show Manipulator Appears only after you select a datum plane. Inherit Attributes Lets you select an existing datum plane grid to inherit its attributes for your new grid. Select Datum Planes and Grids Grid Orientation Selectable datum planes include those used to create objects. Datum Plane Grid options Bounded Plane 172 Lets you select a datum plane (for creating a datum plane grid) or a datum plane grid (for editing).[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 12.

Appears only after you select a datum plane. choose File→Utilities→Customer Defaults. and whether they are always visible or visible only when the grid is parallel to the view. revolved features. Lets you save a copy of the section curves with your model. or a local CSYS. Specify Origin Lets you specify the labels' origin. If you enable the Load Exact Representations when Saving Section Curves customer default. and click Find Default . This customer default loads solid bodies or sheet bodies for all visible lightweight bodies on the section plane. 3. and circular arrays. such as datum planes. the Save Copy of Section Curves option sometimes creates approximate section curves from the loaded lightweight geometry. when saving copies of section curves. Lets you select a color for the section curves. the Absolute CSYS. this option uses the loaded solid body and sheet body geometry to create accurate section curves. Save Copy of Section Curves If you do not enable this customer default. Display Major Lines Labels Show Labels Origin Reference Specifies whether labels are displayed. or only its minor lines. Specifies whether the labels' origin references the WCS. is available to help you Controls whether the grid's major lines are displayed.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Weight Settings Display Grid Controls whether the datum plane grid is visible. Lets you specify whether the section curves are in the object's color or a color that you select. Datum Axis Use the Datum Axis command to define linear reference objects to help you create other objects. 173 Display On Top Controls whether the datum plane grid is visible through objects. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Modeling Settings Show Section Curves Color Option Color Controls whether section curves are visible where the datum plane grid crosses the model. extruded features. and only when Origin Reference is set to Local. Tip To find a customer default. The Point Constructor specify a point.

Fixed datum axes Fixed datum axes do not reference other geometry. Relative datum axes Relative datum axes reference curves. In the Objects to Define Axis group. select Datum Axis choose Insert→ Datum/Point→ Datum Axis. On the Feature toolbar. select Inferred 3. edges. and other datums. NX determines the type of datum axis by what is selected to create it. In the Datum Axis dialog box. When later edited. with Select Object to use to define the datum axis. select the objects you want drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can create relative datum axes across multiple bodies.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 174 Datum axes can be relative or fixed. 2. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Graphics window Modeling Feature→Datum/Point Drop-down→Datum Axis Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Axis Right-click an object and choose Datum Axis a. or active. 1. from the Datum/Point Drop-down list. Use any of the relative datum axis methods to create fixed datum axes by clearing the Associative box in the Datum Axis dialog box. points. Create an inferred datum axis This example shows how to create a datum axis using the Inferred type. from the Type list. . faces. the dialog box will show the type NX selected—it will not be the Inferred type.

1. 5. 2. select Point and Direction . you can use Alternate Solution to define a different orientation. 6. with Specify Point active. select Datum Axis or choose Insert→ Datum/Point→ Datum Axis. Create a datum axis from a point This example shows how to create a datum axis located at a specified position and in a specified direction. Note You can also use the Snap Point toolbar or the Point Constructor points. In the following example there are three alternate solutions available. from the Datum/Point Drop-down list. If your selections allow it. 175 dialog box to define 4. b. 7. On the Feature toolbar. 3. For this example: the edge of the hole was selected first and the face was selected next. from the Type list. specify the location for the origin of the datum axis. In the Datum Axis dialog box. In the Through Points group. .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Note You can also use the Snap Point toolbar or the Point Constructor points. Click OK or Apply. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 dialog box to define .

the arc center is selected as the origin of the datum axis. 8. For this example. In the Datum Axis dialog box. select an object to specify the direction. Click OK or Apply. or active. the linear edge is selected. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . c. select Datum Axis choose Insert→ Datum/Point→ Datum Axis. from the Datum/Point Drop-down list. the highlighted edge is selected. 176 5. In the Curve group. . select On Curve Vector 3. from the Orientation list. 1. with Select Curve axis. select Parallel to Vector or Perpendicular to Vector. For this example. with Specify Vector active.. For this example. 2. In the Direction group.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 4. In this example another selected object was used. 7. Parallel to Vector was selected. select the curve on which to place the datum In this example. In the Direction group. from the Type list. 6. Create a datum axis on a curve This example shows how to create a datum axis located on a curve or an edge and relative to either that curve or edge or to another selected object. On the Feature toolbar.

in the Orientation on Curve group. and o specify a value. If you wish the datum axis orientation also to be relative to the selected curve. Note To make the datum axis relative to an object other than the selected curve or edge. to get a parallel orientation. 5. o In the Location on Curve group. For this example. In this example. in the Orientation on Curve group. Note You can also drag the datum axis origin to a desired location on the selected curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 177 4. the Parallel to Object option is used with the selected highlighted edge. For this example. 6. % Arc Length and 50% was used. select either Arc Length or % Arc Length option. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . from the Orientation option list. none of these were used. 8. Locate the origin of the datum axis on the selected curve. select either Perpendicular to Object or Parallel to Object and then select the object to use. Tangent Normal Bi-Normal 7. select an option from the Orientation list to specify the orientation of the datum axis relative to the selected curve.

In the Curve or Face group. 4. from the Type list. select the curve or face you want to use for the datum axis orientation. Click Apply or OK. 3. Click OK or Apply. sphere. from the Datum/Point Drop-down list. Create a datum axis on the axis of a curve or face You can create a datum axis on the axis of a cylinder. cone. On the Feature toolbar. linear curve or edge. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . with Select Object active. select Datum Axis choose Insert→ Datum/Point→ Datum Axis. toroid. d. select Curve/Face Axis . 10. In the Datum Axis dialog box. or 2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 178 9. For this example the toroidal face is selected. 1.

or ZC-Axis.    Type-Specific Options Objects to Define axis  Select Object Lets you select one or more objects that define the axis. appear as the Fixed type during an edit. The objects you select determine the axis type and which additional object types (if any) you can continue to select. or binormal to a point on a curve or edge. You can select an axis type from the Type option list. or planes. Two Points — Creates a datum axis by defining two points through which the axis passes. XC-Axis. Inferred Orientation on Curve drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . or any of the other relative types used with the Associative check box cleared. Fixed — Available only when editing a datum axis. datum planes. ZC–Axis — Creates a fixed datum axis on the ZC-axis of the WCS. YC–Axis — Creates a fixed datum axis on the YC-axis of the WCS. Options that support the determined type appear in the dialog box. Datum Axis dialog box Type 179 Displays construction methods you use to create datum axes. or the axis of a cylindrical or conical face or torus. Intersection — Creates a datum axis at the intersection of two planar faces. or perpendicular or parallel to another object. XC–Axis — Creates a fixed datum axis on the XC-axis of the Work Coordinate System (WCS). On Curve Vector — Creates a datum axis tangent. Curve/Face Axis — Creates a datum axis on a linear curve or edge.   Inferred — Determines the best datum axis type to use based on objects you select. Any datum axis created using the YC-Axis.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING e.    Point and Direction — Creates a datum axis from a specified point in a specified direction. normal.

based on the selected point and a vector. You can select from the list or use Vector Constructor. Point and Direction  Specify Vector Lets you specify a vector to be used with the orientation setting and which defines the direction of the datum axis. Location on Curve On Curve Vector  Lets you specify whether the axis is located on the curve or edge at an Arc Length or a % Arc Length distance from its end. XC-Axis YC-Axis Axis ZC- Create a fixed datum axis on the corresponding axis of the Work Coordinate System. Direction  Orientation Lets you define how the direction of the datum axis is determined. You can use a point type from the list. Arc Length / % Arc Length  The label of this option box changes to match the setting of the Location drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Curve  Select Curve Lets you select a curve or an edge on which to locate the datum axis. There are two options: Parallel to Vector or Perpendicular to Vector. or use Point Constructor.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  180 Alternate Solution Available depending on the object or objects you select. Lets you cycle through the different possible solutions. so there are no input parameters. Through Point  Specify Point Lets you select the origin point for the datum axis.

A datum CSYS consists of the following reference objects:     A coordinate system An origin point Three datum planes Three datum axes You can create a datum CSYS:    At a fixed location relative to the work or absolute coordinate systems. Options common to all Types Reverse Direction Axis Orientation  Reverses the direction of the axis 180 degrees. A non-associative datum axis displays the name Fixed Datum Axis in the Part Navigator. so it is parametrically related to its parent features. Settings 4. Datum CSYS Use Datum CSYS to quickly create a coordinate system consisting of a set of reference objects. Offset from an existing datum CSYS. Associated to existing geometry. An existing datum CSYS at the absolute coordinate system origin is included in many of the default part templates.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING on Curve option. Associative  Makes the new datum axis associative. You can use the reference objects to associatively define the position and orientation of other features. 181 You can enter a value or drag the origin handle along the curve or edge. Uses for reference objects in a datum CSYS drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . An associative datum axis displays the name Datum Axis in the Part Navigator.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and position of sketches and features. Define vector directions for features.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING     182 Define placement faces. You can create another datum CSYS to define the wing coordinate system. Datum CSYS examples Defining critical locations in a product assembly For an aerospace vehicle. you can create a datum CSYS at the absolute origin to define the vehicle coordinate system. Creating features in a detailed part For a detailed part. Define critical product locations in model space and control them with translation and rotation parameters. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Feature→Datum/Point Drop-down→Datum CSYS Insert→Datum/Point→Datum CSYS a. Define constraints to position parts in an assembly. This is useful when there are no convenient edges and faces or when you need to control the location of features with multiple translation and angle parameters. you can use a datum CSYS to help define the location and orientation of features. constraints. You can then use the wing coordinate system as reference to design and position the parts in the wing assembly structure.

from the Reference list. Note The translation and rotation parameters are stored with the datum CSYS feature and can be edited as expressions. In the Datum CSYS dialog box. In the Datum CSYS dialog box. 1.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING b. The existing datum CSYS is located at the origin of the absolute coordinate system and the WCS. select Datum CSYS choose Insert→Datum/Point→Datum CSYS. 6. select Offset CSYS. in the Offset from CSYS group. or 5. On the Feature toolbar. type the required translation and rotation parameters. select the existing datum CSYS. 3. from the Datum/Point Drop-down list. In the graphics window. 2. Z=50. Y=200. the following are used: X=75. Angle Y=25 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . In the Reference CSYS group. The new datum CSYS is offset using translation and rotation parameters. from the Type list. select Selected CSYS. For this example. Create an offset datum CSYS 183 This example shows how to create a datum CSYS that is offset from an existing datum CSYS. Click OK or Apply to create the datum CSYS. 4.

Select the y-axis for the new datum CSYS. or 4. select the Associative check box. 1.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING c. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Select the x-axis for the new datum CSYS. from the Type list. Origin of datum CSYS at arc center of edge 5. y-axis. Y-Axis. 10. X-axis of existing datum CSYS 7. Y-axis of existing datum CSYS 9. from the Datum/Point Drop-down list. 6. 8. In the Datum CSYS dialog box. In the graphics window. select X-Axis. In the Datum CSYS dialog box. select the origin point for the new datum CSYS. 3. 2. Create a datum CSYS with an x-axis. and origin 184 This example shows how to create an associative datum CSYS located at a specific point on a solid body with the X-axis and Y-axis parallel to the axes of an existing datum CSYS. in the Settings group. select Datum CSYS choose Insert→Datum/Point→Datum CSYS. On the Feature toolbar. Origin. Click OK or Apply to create the datum CSYS.

Updating and editing a datum CSYS Unlike faces. Scale Factor The display size is controlled by a scale factor value which must be greater than zero. For help on other options in the dialog box. the Alerts column indicates that the datum CSYS is out of date. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 185 New datum CSYS You can create additional features relative to the datum CSYS. You can edit the datum CSYS to move it dynamically or change its type and associate it to different parent geometry. datum planes. The datum CSYS is fixed relative to the absolute origin. e. Datum CSYS dialog box Note The options shown below are unique to the Datum CSYS dialog box. so it is parametrically related to its parent features. note the following:   In the Part Navigator. If you associate a datum CSYS to parent geometry and the parent geometry is deleted when a model is updated. Changes the display size of the datum CSYS. d. Settings Associative Makes the new datum CSYS associative instead of fixed. edges. datum CSYS features are not deleted when a model is updated. see the CSYS options in the Gateway to NX Help. and datum axes.

the two datum CSYS features and their children are not lost when the model is updated. 5. Point Use the Point command to create point objects. See the Point tool options for details on point types and the Point dialog box. You can create points:    Associated to other geometry. You can edit the datum CSYS features and associate them to new parent geometry at a later time. a sketch and revolved feature are the parents of two datum CSYS features.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 186 In this example. When the sketch and revolved feature are deleted. Offset from existing locations. The Snap Point options on the Selection bar are also available to specify point locations. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Feature→Datum/Point Drop-down→Point Insert→Datum/Point→Point drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Using absolute coordinates and work coordinates.

from the Type list select Curve Points. 3. specify the following: Number of Points = 10. Choose Insert→Datum/Point→Point Set. Recreate the defining poles of a spline. or at the poles of a spline. For this example. 5. Under Parameters. For this example. You can:    Generate points along a curve. Specify the spacing of the points and define where the Point Set feature starts and ends. a face.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 187 6. 2. Under Base Geometry.5 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Point Set feature along a curve Point Set feature at the defining points of a spline Point Set feature on a face Where do I find it? Application Modeling Menu Insert→Datum/Point→Point Set a. In the Point Set dialog box. Ratio = 1. 4. Create a Point Set feature on a curve 1. Start Percentage = 10. you can specify the parameters for the subtype. select Geometric Progression from the Curve Points by list. End Percentage = 100. use the Specify Curve or Edge option to select the base geometry. Specify the Subtype. Point Set Use the Point Set command to create a set of points that correspond to existing geometry.

Point Set feature created at the poles of a spline drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 5.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 6. Create a Point Set feature on a spline 1. 188 Point Set feature created on a curve b. select or clear the Associative check box as required. Click OK or Apply to create the Point Set feature. 2. use the Select Spline option to select the required spline. select or clear the Associative check box as required. Under Settings. Under Base Geometry. 6. Under Settings. In the Point Set dialog box from the Type list select Spline Points. For this example. Click OK or Apply to create the Point Set feature. Specify the Subtype. 4. 7. 3. select Poles from the Spline Point Type list. Choose Insert→Datum/Point→Point Set.

Under Subtype. Under Base Geometry. 7. 5. ensure that the Percentages option is selected. from the Type list select Face Points to create a set of points on an existing face. Under Parameters. Choose Insert→Datum/Point→Point Set. For this example. use Select Face to select the required face. select the Pattern subtype from the Face Points by list. Preview of Point Set feature on the selected face 8. Create a Point Set feature on a face 189 1. Starting V Value = 0 Ending U Value. In the Point Set dialog box. Ending U Value = 75 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING c. 2. specify the number of points in the U and V direction. 4. Selected face 6. Under Pattern Limits. select the required subtype. For this example. specify the following: Starting U Value. 3.

while the straighter sections of curves allow wider spacing. Points are created on the entire face. poles. Curve Points by     Equal parameters spacing method Wider spacing of points Tighter spacing of points Geometric Progression — Spaces the set of points based on a geometric ratio. Spline Points — Creates a set of points at the knots. Subtype Appears when Type is set to Curve Points. tight curves cause tighter spacing. or defining points of the spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Point Set options Type Lets you specify the type of Point Set feature you want to create. regardless of how it is trimmed. Equal Parameters — Spaces the set of points based on the characteristics or parameters of the curve. Check the Settings options and click OK or Apply to create the Point Set feature.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Point Set feature with Ending U and V value = 75 9. Lets you define the spacing of the points along the curve using one of the following options:   Equal Arc Length — Spaces the set of points at equal distances along the path of the curve. 190 Point Set feature on a face d. In some cases. Face Points — Creates a set of points on an existing face. Available options are:    Type Curve Points — Creates a set of points along an existing curve.

each curve is treated individually and points are not created at the specified percentage of the total length of all the selected drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . If you select multiple curves. The value you enter in the Chordal Tolerance box represents the maximum distance between the parent curve and the straight line (chord) between two adjacent points in the set. then points are created at 10 percent of the curve length location on each curve.75 Distance A Distance B = A * (Ratio) Distance C = B * (Ratio) Distance D = C * (Ratio)     Chordal Tolerance — Spaces the set of points based on a chordal tolerance. based on the arc length you entered and the total arc length of the selected curve. If the projected point does not project on the selected curve. If multiple points are selected. Multiple points projected to the same location create overlapping points. The arc length distance must be equal to or less than the length of the curve you select and greater than zero. If multiple curves are selected. Incremental Arc Length — Lets you enter a path length between the points. a point is created at the end of the curve closest to where the projected point would fall. its total arc length is displayed. each point is projected to the curve(s). The points are created from the curve start to the curve end. Specified Projection Points — Projects the selected point to the specified curve and creates a point at that location. Note Points are not created at percentage increments over the entire curve. Curve Percentage — Creates a point on each curve at the distance that represents the percentage you specify. then you enter arc length (the path length you want between each point).[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 191 For example. When you choose the curve. if you specify the following parameters. The total number of points and the partial arc length (the amount of the path length left over) is calculated. the Point Set feature is created as shown in the figure. For example if you select three curves and specify the curve percentage as 10%. a point is created on each curve. Number of points = 5 Start Percentage = 0 End Percentage = 100 Ratio = 0.

there are only two knot points. Each time you select a spline. Knots — Lets you create a set of points using the knot points of an existing spline. if you select multiple curves that are not oriented end to end. Appears when Type is set to Face Points. Face Points by  Pattern — Creates points on the entire face. You can create point sets on as many splines as you like. regardless of how it is trimmed. 192 The point location is based on the curve's parametric orientation. Splines created with poles or by other construction methods do not have defining points to recreate. that is. including the endpoints. These points can be used to create an adjoining spline while maintaining continuity of slope where the two curves join. a point is created at each of its knot points. you need to review the point location to verify that points are created from the end of each curve as expected. Poles — Lets you create points at the poles of any spline.  Appears when Type is set to Spline Points. Spline Point Type  Note Keep in mind that the knot points are the endpoints of each spline segment making up the curve. If the spline has only one segment (for example Bezier splines). When you select the spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . points are created at each pole of the curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING curves.   Defining Points — Lets you select a spline that was created through points and recreate the construction points.

These points can be used to create adjoining sheet bodies while the face's underlying B– Surface maintains continuity of slope where the two bodies join. V= 50% location on the selected face  B–Surface Poles — Allows you to create points at the poles of any face. V= 20% location on the selected face Point created at U = 50%. When you select the face. V= 0% location on the selected face Point created at U = 20%. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . points are created at each pole of the curve. including the points along the edge of the face.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 193 Selected face U direction V direction Points on face  Face Percentage — Adds a point on one or more faces at a location equal to U and V percentage values. Selected face Point created at U = 0%.

Select Spline Lets you select the spline to create the point set feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Appears when Type is set to Spline Points. or Geometric Progression. Select Face Parameters Appears when Type is set to Curve Points. or Geometric Progression. Equal Parameters.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 194 Selected face Points created at surface poles Base Geometry Appears when Type is set to Curve Points. Specifies the start percentage value. Equal Parameters. Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length. Number of Points Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length. Specifies the number of points to create on the selected curve. or Geometric Progression. Appears when Type is set to Face Points. Lets you select the face to create the point set feature. Select Curve or Edge Lets you select the curve or edge to create a point set feature. Equal Parameters. Start Percentage Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length. Select Object for Start Percentage Lets you specify the start location of the point set as a percentage of the length of the curve.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

195

This selection is optional. You can select a cursor location, an existing point, a control point, or a curve, to calculate the start percentage for the Point Set feature. If you select a point, or multiple intersection points, the point on the base curve that is closest to the selected point is used to calculate the start percentage. If you select a curve, the intersection point of the selected curve and the base curve is used to calculate the start percentage. If the two curves do not intersect, the intersection point is still determined using extensions of the curves as necessary. Consequently, it is possible that the Point Set feature ends at a location that is not on the base curve (for example, it is possible to have a percentage less than 0, or a negative percentage). End Percentage Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length, Equal Parameters, or Geometric Progression. Specifies the end percentage value. Appears when Curve Points by is set to Equal Arc Length, Equal Parameters, or Geometric Progression. Lets you enter the end location of the Point Set feature as a percentage of the length of the curve. This selection is optional. You can select a cursor location, an existing point, a control point, or a curve, to calculate the start percentage for the Point Set feature. Select Object for End Percentage If you select a point or multiple intersection points, the point on the base curve that is closest to the selected point is used to calculate the end percentage. If you select a curve, the intersection point of the selected curve and the base curve is used to calculate the end percentage. If the two curves do not intersect, the intersection point is still determined using extensions of the curves as necessary. Consequently, it is possible that the Point Set feature ends at a location that is not on the base curve (for example, an end percentage value greater than 100%). Appears when Curve Points by is set to Geometric Progression. Ratio Specifies the geometric ratio for the spacing of points. Chordal Tolerance Appears when Curve Points by is set to Chordal Tolerance. Specifies the value for the chordal tolerance. Appears when Curve Points by is set to Incremental Arc Length. Arc Length Specifies the value for the arc length. Appears when Curve Points by is set to Specified Projection Points. Specify Point Lets you specify the projection points to define the Point Set feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Appears when:

196

Add New Set

Type is set to Curve Points, and Curve Points by is set to Specified Projection Points, or Curve Percentage. Type is set to Face Points, and Face Points by is set to Face Percentage.

Lets you add a new set of projection points to define the Point Set feature. Parameters Appears when Type is set to Face Points. Lets you specify the number of points in the U and V direction when Face Points by is set to Pattern. Lets you specify the U and V percentage when Face Points by is set to Face Percentage. List Appears when:
 

Type is set to Curve Points, and Curve Points by is set to Specified Projection Points, or Curve Percentage. Type is set to Face Points, and Face Points by is set to Face Percentage. For Curve Points — Lists all the selected projection points. You can also add a new set of projection points as required. For Face Points — Lists all the defined percentage values.

List window

Pattern Limits Appears when Type is set to Face Points, and Face Points by is set to Pattern. Lets you define the two points to be used in determining the parametric bounds. The cursor locations selected will be in a plane parallel to the viewing screen.

Diagonal Points

Selected diagonal points Point set created using the diagonal points as reference Lets you define the start and stop positions of the rows of points as a percentage. The percentage is of the path lengths that the underlying surface occupies in the U and V directions. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

Percentages

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

197

U direction V direction Starting V Value = 10% Ending V Value = 75 % Starting U Value = 15 % Ending U value = 95% Settings Associative Distance Tolerance Select this check box to create an associative Point Set feature. Specifies a value for the distance tolerance.

7. Plane object
You can create an unbounded plane object using the Plane dialog. The plane you create is represented by a 3-4-5 triangle symbol situated with the right angle vertex on the origin point of the plane. The short leg is oriented along the implied X axis and the long leg along the implied Y axis.

Plane Object Symbol The plane symbol represents a flat surface extending infinitely through space. You can use plane objects to cross-section curves and surfaces, and to define limits of surfaces. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Plane objects are non-associative and do not appear in the Part Navigator. The scale of a plane object symbol is fixed. You can delete, hide, and show a plane object. For details on plane type options, see Datum Plane options. Where do I find it?

198

You can add the Plane tool to a toolbar or a menu using either Tools→ Customize or by right-clicking and choosing Customize in the toolbar area.

K.

Curve

View a topic
Line Arc/Circle Lines And Arcs Basic Curves Curve Chamfer Rectangle Polygon Conic Curves (ellipse, parabola, hyperbola) Helix Law Curve Spline Studio Spline Fit Spline Text

1. Line
Use the Line command to create straight line segments. You can:
    

Specify line start and end options using points, direction, and tangency. Specify constraints during line creation, such as creating a line at an angle to another line. Specify start and end limits to control line length, such as selected objects, locations, or values. Define lines on individual support planes. Create either associative or non-associative lines.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

199

Creating a new line parallel to a selected line
   

Start point of the new line Existing line selected as the end limit Existing line selected for a parallel direction Newly created line

Note Associative lines work best when:
 

They are created in small numbers. They are related to geometry and each other in a 3D space.

If all of your lines are on a 2D plane, it may be easier to create a sketch instead of individual lines. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Curve→Line Insert→Curve→Line

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING a. Create a line between two points

200

1. On the Curve toolbar, click Line , or choose Insert→Curve→Line, to open the Line dialog box. 2. For the start point, select the end point of an existing line and drag, as shown in the following graphic. A preview line appears and follows the cursor movement, and an inferred autoplane appears based on the selected line endpoint.

3. For the end point, select the end point of a second existing line.

The autoplane may change to a plane common to both objects. 4. (Optional) Change the length of the line by doing one of the following: o Drag the Limit handles o Type a length value in the on-screen input box. o Change the Start Limit or End Limit parameters in the dialog box or by right-clicking the limit handles. 5. Click OK or Apply to create the new line.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING b. Connect a new line at an angle to another line

201

1. On the Curve toolbar, click Line , or choose Insert→Curve→Line, to open the Line dialog box. 2. Click to select a start point for the new line and drag the cursor. A preview line appears and follows the cursor movement.

3. In the End Point or Direction group, from the End Option list, select At Angle. 4. Select an existing line as a reference from which to measure an angle to the new line. In this example, the line on the WCS is selected.

The preview line is now parallel to the selected line (default angle value is 0). An angle handle appears. The autoplane changes to the plane of the selected line. 5. Drag the angle handle until the value shows 240 degrees.

o o o

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

202

6. In the Limits group, from the End Limit option list, select Until Selected. 7. Select the same reference line you selected earlier. The end of the new line stops at the selected line.

8. Click OK or Apply to create the line.

c. Create a line on a principal axis 1. On the Curve toolbar, click Line , or choose Insert→Curve→Line, to open the Line dialog box. 2. Click to select a start point for the new line and drag the cursor. An inferred plane and a preview line appear as you drag the cursor. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

203

3. Drag the cursor until the preview line snaps to the X axis and the X label appears.

4. Click to set the direction of the line to the axis. The line locks to the X axis and the autoplane changes to match the XC-YC plane.

5. Change the line limits by dragging the start and end handles, or by typing values in the on-screen input box or dialog box.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

or choose Insert→Curve→Line. 2. Drag the cursor to an arc and highlight it. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . On the Curve toolbar. A preview line appears and follows the cursor movement. Click to select a start point for the new line and drag the cursor. Create a line tangent to an arc 1. to open the Line dialog box. 3. d. Click OK or Apply to create the line.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 204 6. click Line .

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 205 4. (Optional) Change the length of the line by doing one of the following: o Drag the limit handles. 5. 6. The autoplane changes to a common plane. Click OK or Apply to create the line. click Alternate Solution to see different lines that can be created. o In the Settings group of the dialog box. as shown in the following graphic. Click the highlighted arc. o Change the length of the line: o Enter length values in the on-screen input box or dialog box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and a preview of the tangent line and line limit handles appears.

Select CSYS drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Normal — Creates a line along the normal direction of a selected object.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 206 e. and if needed. Start Option / End Option       Options specific to a Start Option or End Option Select Object Inferred Lets you select objects to define a line's start or end points (such as curves. Start and end options are chosen automatically by the software based on the objects you select. or points) using Snap Point.   Inferred — Determines the best start and end options to use. An onscreen input box shows the current point position. Point — Lets you create a line using one or more points. edges. Line dialog box Tip Right-click over the point and limit handles in the graphics window to quickly access many of the line options. If you click where there is no point. Point Constructor options. Point Reference Lets you specify which coordinate system to use for the line's start or end points. based on which objects you select. with Point1 and Point2 labels. The start and end points appear as cube-shaped handles. Along ZC — Creates a line parallel to the ZC-axis.    WCS — Specifies the Work Coordinate System (WCS). Absolute — Specifies the Absolute Coordinate System (ACS). Tangent — Lets you create a line that is tangent to a curved object. You can drag the point handles to new Snap Point locations. An on-screen input box is also available to let you specify a 3D coordinate location. CSYS — Lets you select a coordinate system. and if needed. Along XC — Creates a line parallel to the XC-axis. Along YC — Creates a line parallel to the YC-axis. Point Constructor options. Options to start and end a line Lets you define the start and end point options for the line. Select Point Point Lets you select start or end points for the line using Snap Point. At Angle — Lets you create a line at an angle to a selected reference object. the cursor location is used.

You can drag the Angle handle around the start point or type a degree value in the Angle on-screen input box or in the dialog box. Angle Lets you specify the number of degrees to create the line. spline. from which an angle can be measured to draw the line from the start point. A dashed reference line shows the angle as measured against the selected reference object. edge or datum). arc. Select Object Tangent 207 Lets you select a curved object (such as a line. Select Object Lets you select a linear reference object (a curve. A sphere-shaped tangent handle appears with a Tangent1 or Tangent2 label. At Angle   New line start point Existing line selected for the angle reference Preview of the new line Angle handle   If you set the angle to 0 or 180 degrees. or edge) from which a start or end point is derived and which is tangent to a specified object. Lets you select a coordinate system (CSYS) reference for the start point. the Perpendicular constraint drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Available only when Point Reference is set to CSYS. the Parallel constraint symbol appears in the graphics window. If you set the angle to 90 or 270 degrees. measured from the reference object.

Once you select one of these options. the auto-plane changes so it is common to both. edge.  Specify Plane Lets you define the support plane for the line by selecting a plane method type from drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . If the plane is user-defined. Select Plane Enables the Specify Plane option. Normal Select Object Lets you select an object to define the line's end point (such as a curve. Plane Options Locked Plane Makes the auto-plane immovable if you change the start or end points. to let you define a plane on which to construct the line. selected reference objects are projected onto it.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING symbol appears. Changing the start or end points may also move the auto-plane. or ZC axis. Automatically places the line end point on a selected object's normal plane. The label "Normal2" appears. YC. you can use the Limits options to adjust the length of the line. Select from the following options: Automatic Plane The software infers a temporary auto-plane based on the specified line start and end points. Along XC Along YC Along ZC 208 Automatically places the end point on a line parallel to the XC. Common options Use Plane Options in the Support Plane group to specify the plane on which to build the line. A locked auto-plane appears in the color of a datum plane object. face or datum). You can lock and unlock an auto plane by double-clicking it or by selecting this option. If you specify an end point on a different plane from that of the start point.

Distance Available when Start Limit or End Limit is set to Value or At Point. such as the default Inferred method type. Lets you type numeric values to specify the distance from the start and end limits to and from the line start point. Extend To View Bounds  Extends any line you create to the limits of the view boundary. objects. face. Associative lines appear in the Part Navigator with the name LINE.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 209 the option list. They update automatically and can be edited with the Line command. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .  Select Object Lets you select an object to define the line's start or end limit (a curve. Displays different lines that can be created using the current parameters. Until Selected Start Limit / End Limit Lets you start or end the line at the limit of a selected object. Alternate Solution  Available when there is more than one possible solution to creating a line. or by clicking the Full Plane Tool. or datum). Use the Start Limit and End Limit options in the Support Plane group to specify points. You can also cycle through alternate solutions using the Page Down and Page Up keys. Settings Associative  Makes the line an associative feature. At Point Lets you specify points for the start or end limits of the line using Snap Point options. Value Lets you specify numeric values for the start or end limits of the line. edge. or distance values that limit where the line starts and ends.

Create an arc through three points 1. it may be easier to use a sketch. You can specify a support plane or let the system infer one when you create arcs. Insert→Curve→Arc/Circle. a start point is selected at the end point of an existing line. If all your arcs are on a 2D plane. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Curve→ Arc/Circle . drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can use limits to define the start and end point of arcs using one of the constraints. For this example. The type of arc you get depends on the types of constraints you combine. An inferred plane based on the selected line endpoint appears. Note Use associative arcs for a small number of curves that are related to the geometry and to each other in a 3D space. 3. Arc/Circle Use this command to create associative arcs and circle features. You can use associative arc features to project or intersect reference geometry to the support plane. From the Type list. 2. click Arc/Circle or choose Insert→Curve→Arc/Circle. Select a start point for the new arc. Select the end point for the arc.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 210 2.    Arcs are created on the support plane. 4. but they are not features. a. On the Curve toolbar. Note You can also create non-associative arcs with this option. select Three Point Arc. You can create many types of arcs by combining different types of constraints.

5. a preview of the arc appears. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 7. Note If the selected points or objects are not in the same plane the autoplane may change. the selected points or objects are on the same plane. Move the cursor to highlight a middle point for the arc. This may change the autoplane. 6. The preview and the autoplane are based on the currently selected objects. (Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the point handles to new locations. Select the highlighted line end point for the middle point of the arc.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 211 After the end of the arc is selected. For this example.

8. Select a start point for the new arc.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING o o 212 Change the start or end limits of the arc using the Limit options or by dragging or rightclicking the limit handles. 6. Create an arc using a tangent point On the Curve toolbar. select Point. o o b. Change the constraint type of a point using the dialog box Start Option. Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc shown in the preview. Select an end point for the arc. a start point was selected at the end point of an existing line. 3. select Point. select Three Point Arc. and a preview of the arc appears. An inferred plane based on the selection appears. 5. For this example. 2. or by right-clicking a point handle. click Arc/Circle or choose Insert→Curve→ Arc/Circle. from the End Option list. 1. In the End Point group. Click the middle mouse button. In the Start Point group. 4. For this example. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . or Apply to create the arc. From the Type option list. End Option or Mid Option lists. the end point of a line is selected. OK. Select the Full Circle check box to form a complete circle. from the Start Option list.

click or choose Insert→Curve→Arc/Circle. Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc shown in the preview. a tangent start point on an existing arc is selected. Click the middle mouse button. From the Type list. select Tangent. Create an arc using three tangent points On the Curve toolbar. c. 10. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . the circle is selected. or Apply to create the arc. (Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the point handles to new locations. o Change a point's constraint type using the dialog box. 2. Select a start point for the new arc. 3. In the Start Point group. Select the Full Circle check box if you want the arc to form a complete circle. For this example. from the Start Option list.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 7. 1. o o o Click Alternate Solution to cycle through alternate arcs. An inferred plane based on the selection appears. For this example. That midpoint now has a tangent constraint. OK. o Change the start or end limits of the arc using the dialog box Limit options or by dragging or right-clicking on the limit handles. This may change the autoplane. Select the object. 8. or by right-clicking a point handle. select Three Point Arc. select Tangent. 4. from the Mid Option list. In the Mid Point group. 213 9.

(Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the point handles to new locations. from the Mid Option list. 8. This may change the autoplane. In the Mid Point group. 7. o Change the start or end limits of the arc using the options in the Limits group of the dialog box. an existing arc is selected for the end point and a preview of the new arc appears. For this example. For this example. select Tangent. or right-clicking a constraint handle. select Tangent. Select a middle point for the arc. 6. or by dragging or right-clicking the limit handles. End Point. o Change a point's constraint type using the Start Point. Select an end point for the arc. o Click Alternate Solution to cycle through alternate arcs. The following graphic shows examples of some possible alternate solutions. 9. In the End Point group. or Mid Point option lists in the dialog box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . an existing arc is selected. from the End Option list.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 214 5.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . from the Start Option list. click or choose Insert→Curve→Arc/Circle. An inferred plane based on the selection appears. From the Type list.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 215 o Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc. For this example. 3. Click the middle mouse button. select Tangent. 4. Select the Full Circle check box if you want the arc to form a complete circle. o d. 1. a tangent start point on an existing line is selected. OK. Create an arc using two tangent points and a radius value On the Curve toolbar. Select a start point for the new arc. select Three Point Arc. In the Start Point group. 2. or Apply to create the arc. 10.

Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc. or Apply to create the arc. In the End Point group. 8. select Tangent. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . in the Radius block. A preview of the new arc appears. Click the middle mouse button. In the Mid Point group. from the End Option list. Select an end point for the arc. from the Mid Option list. For this example. 6. o Enter a different radius value. o Change a point's constraint type using the dialog box. or by dragging or right-clicking the limit handles. o o o Click Alternate Solution to cycle through alternate arcs. a radius value of 30 is entered. o Change the start or end limits of the arc using the dialog box Limit options. 9. an existing line is selected. type the radius value and press Enter. In the Radius group. This may change the autoplane. (Optional): Do any of the following: o Drag the any of the point handles to new locations. Select the Full Circle check box to have the arc form a complete circle. 10. OK.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 216 5. 7. For this example. or by right-clicking a constraint handle. select Radius.

In the Radius group. 3. select Point. click Arc/Circle or choose Insert→Curve→Arc/Circle. An initial preview of the arc based on the start point and the specified radius appears. select Radius 6. In the Start Point group. from the End Option list. a line end point for the arc's mid point is selected. with Select Point active. in the Radius box. For this example. the radius of the previewed arc remains locked. Select a mid point for the arc. As you move the cursor around. You cannot specify the start constraint with a radius value. select Point. In the Start Point group. a start point is selected at an existing line end point.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 217 e. select a start point for the new arc. In the Type group. 8. (or in the on-screen input box) enter a radius value and press Enter. 1. 7. An inferred plane based on the selection appears. For this example. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . from the Mid Option list. from the Start Option list. 5. In the End Point group. 2. Note You can specify either the end or the middle constraint with a radius value. select Three Point Arc. 4. from the Type list. In the Mid Point group. Create an arc using a radius value On the Curve toolbar. but not both.

OK or Apply to create the arc. the arc and the inferred plane display. 3.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 218 9. or right-click a constraint handle. o o o Click Alternate Solutions to cycle through alternate arcs. o Change the start or end limits of the arc using Limit options. from the Type list. You can specify the arc center by entering coordinates or by selecting a point. Select the Full Circle check box to have the arc form a complete circle. 4. o Select an object you want the new arc to be tangent to. or drag and right-click the limit handles. Specify a radius for the arc using one of the following: o Select an object. Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc shown in the preview. select Arc/Circle from Center. On the Curve toolbar. f. In the Type group. o Enter a value for the arc radius in the on-screen input box or in the Radius box in the Arc/Circle dialog box. When you specify the arc center. 2. Select a center point for the new arc. click Arc/Circle or choose Insert→Curve→Arc/Circle. This may change the auto plane. Click the middle mouse button. Create an arc or circle from center 1. 10. This example shows an existing arc center is selected for the center of the new arc. (Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the point handles to new locations. o Change a point's constraint type using the dialog box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

6. from the End Limit list. For this example. o Drag the center point handle to a new location or right-click the center point handle and choose Point Constructor to specify a new center using coordinates o Right-click the end handle and use the shortcut menu to change its constraint type. Arc/Circle dialog box Type drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 5. 8. 7. Note This may or may not be available. o o g. Select the object where you want to limit the end of the new arc. the line on the left is selected for the end limit of the new arc.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 219 For this example. In the Limits group. Select the Full Circle option to have the arc form a complete circle. Click the middle mouse button. a line's end point is selected for the radius value and for the start limit. Click Complement Arc to create a complement to the arc. OK or Apply to create the arc. It depends on the selections made. o Click Alternate Solution to cycle through alternate arcs. select Until Selected. (Optional) Do any of the following: o Drag the start handle to a new location. This may change the autoplane.

or CSYS coordinates. and D-Z fields appears. Lets you select the start point for the arc. CSYS — Defines points relative to a reference coordinate system using Select CSYS. D-Y. Point Constructor — Displays the Point dialog box.   Inferred — Determines the best option and constraint type to use to specify the start of the arc. ACS.  Point Reference   WCS — Defines the points relative to the Work Coordinate System. As you move the cursor. A tangent sphere-shaped handle appears with a Tangent label If the support plane is user-defined. As you move the cursor.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Sets the type of creation method to use to create the arc or circle. arc. an on-screen input box with D-X. the fields are updated to show the current distance from the ACS. the fields are updated to show the current distance from the selected CSYS. Point2 is the end point. conic. An onscreen input box with XC. the fields are updated to show the current distance from the WCS. Snap Point options are available on the Selection bar to help you select objects. Point — Lets you specify a start point for the arc. An on-screen input box with X. and Point3 is the mid point Start Option  Tangent — Lets you select a curve object (such as a line. Absolute — Defines the points relative to an Absolute Coordinate System. Start Point Appears when Type is set to Three Point Arc for the arc or circle. Select Object Select Object — Lets you select the start point. YC. Lets you define the start point of the arc or circle relative to the WCS. selected reference objects are projected onto it.  220 Type  Three Point Arc — Creates an arc when you specify three points that the arc must pass through or two points and a radius. When you select a reference coordinate system. and Z fields appears. Arc/Circle from Center — Creates an arc when you specify an arc center and a second point or radius. and ZC fields appears. As you move the cursor. or spline) from which a start point is derived that is tangent to a selected object. The point constraint appears as a cube shaped handle with a Point label. Lets you specify the start point constraints. Select Point drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Lets you specify a point to be used as the point reference. Y. Point1 is the start point.

YC. Lets you specify the constraints for the mid point.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING You can use the following Select Point options to specify the point. Appears when End Option is set to Radius. Lets you specify a value for the radius of the arc or circle. Select Object Specify Radius Center Point Appears when Type is set to Arc/Circle from Center for the arc or circle. and Tangent options for the end point constraints work the same as the Start Option constraints. Select Object Select Object — Lets you select the end point. Works in the same way as start point Select Object options. End Option Radius — You can specify a radius constraint for the end or middle points by entering a value in the Radius on-screen input box or the Radius box in the Arc/Circle dialog box. The Inferred. . Lets you specify a value for the radius. Point Constructor — Displays the Point dialog box. Mid Option The Inferred. You can enter a radius value after specifying the first constraint. Tangent. Point. Lets you select the mid point for the arc/circle. Lets you select a point or location for the arc center. and Radius options for the mid point constraints work the same as the End Option constraints. In addition to the Snap Point options you can use the XC. Lets you select the end point for the arc or circle. ZC on-screen input boxes to specify the coordinates of the center of the arc. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Available when Mid Option is set to Radius. Specify Point Point Constructor — Displays the Point dialog box. 221 Lets you specify the end point constraints. Point Constructor — Displays the Point dialog box. Point. End Point Appears when Type is set to Three Point Arc for the arc or circle. Specify Point — Lets you specify the start point. Specify Radius Mid Point Appears when Type is set to Three Point Arc for the arc or circle.

or create a new plane. An autoplane appears. End Option 222 Inferred. Lets you specify the end constraint. To define the start limit.  Select Plane — Lets you select an existing. You can also enter a radius value in the Radius on-screen input box. Point. Through Point Appears only for the Arc/Circle from Center type of arc/circle. Unless you lock the plane. so that it does not move automatically if you change the start or end constraints. You can change the plane constraint at different points in the line creation process. Plane Options Changing either the start or end constraints may also move the autoplane. — Displays a list of available plane methods when you click . Automatic Plane — Infers a temporary plane based on the arc or circle's start and end points. the autoplane moves to support a plane common to both. Lets you specify the point for the Point type of end constraint. drag the limit handle. Radius Support Plane Lets you specify the plane on which to build the arc or circle. If you specify an end constraint on a different plane from the start constraint. or type values in the on-screen drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 — Displays the Plane dialog box.  Lets you enter a value for the radius constraint for the end or mid point of the arc. Appears when type of plane option is set to Select Plane. Specify Plane Plane Constructor Inferred Plane Limits Start Limit Lets you specify the start of an arc or circle. You can also double-click to lock and unlock an auto plane. and Radius options for the mid point constraints work the same as the End Option constraints for the Three Point Arc type of arc/circle. Point Reference Radius Appears when Type is set to Arc/Circle from Center for the arc or circle. Tangent. . you can enter the start limit value in the dialog box. it may change when you change the constraints. Lets you specify the plane.  Locked Plane — Makes the autoplane immovable.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Specify Point — Lets you specify the start point.

or body. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Lines And Arcs Lines and Arcs is a special drop-down menu and toolbar that lets you quickly create associative or non-associative lines and curves using pre-defined constraint combinations.    223 Value — Lets you type a value for the start of the arc. To create simple associative and non-associative arcs without having to open the Arc/Circle dialog box. Lets you create a complement to the arc. Complement Arc Settings Specifies the arc as an associative feature and is displayed in the Part Navigator with a name such as Arc (3). Lets you select objects. Until Selected — Lets you select a curve. Associative arcs are updated automatically and can be edited with the Arc/Circle command. Available when Start Limit us set to Until Selected. datum. edge. to define the start of the arc. for example. You can reverse the current arc limits and display the complement by double-clicking a limit handle. You can also use the Page Down and Page Up keys to cycle through alternate solutions. You do not have to open a dialog or operate any icon option controls. Lets you specify the arc as a complete circle.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING input box. 3. Associative Caution Note that arcs created in the Drafting application with this option selected are associative. Angle Select Object End Limit Full Circle Sets the Value or At Point type of start limit to the value you specify. Use MB2 to cancel out of Lines and Arcs. Alternate Solution Tip Right-click the arc/circle point and limit handles in the graphics window to quickly access many of the following options. face.   Use MB1 to create a line or arc. Cycles through the various possible solutions if an arc or circle's constraints allow more than one solution. use the options in Insert→Curve→Lines and Arcs. Let you specify where an arc or circle ends. At Point — Sets the arc limits at the start and/or end point. The End Limit options work the same as the Start Limit options. but they do not appear in the Part Navigator and they cannot be edited.

Select the end point location. 3.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING     224 Snap Point rules apply to most of the line and arc creation options. Line Point-Point 1. o Specify a length in the on-screen input box and press the Return key. If you use the Associative option: o All point constraints are stored with respect to absolute coordinates. 2. To create the line do one of the following: o Rubberband the line to get the desired length and click MB1. 3. Creates a line using a start point and a parallel constraint ( Angle constraint set to 0/180 degrees). o Specify a length in the on-screen input box and press the Return key. Select the start point location for the line. You can edit associative curves using Edit Parameters or the Part Navigator Details Panel. Creates a line using start and end point constraints. Line Point-XYZ 1. 2. YC or ZC direction constraint. 3. 2. Where Do I Find It? Insert→ Curve→ Lines and Arcs Lines And Arcs Toolbar a. To create the line do one of the following: o Rubberband the line to get the desired length and click MB1. This option works like a toggle switch. Plane constraints are not used. Line PointParallel 1. Lines And Arcs Basic Procedures Overview How To Related Topics Choose this option to specify that the curve you create is an associative feature. Associative drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Lines and arcs are created automatically when all constraint conditions are satisfied. o Editing associative lines and arcs created with the Lines and Arcs menu opens the Associative Line and Associative Arc/Circle dialogs. Select a line for a parallel constraint. Note You can not edit associated line or arcs if they are created in the Drafting environment. Creates a line using a start point and an Along XC. Click MB1 to create the line. Select a start point location for the line. Associative curves update automatically if their input parameters change. Move the cursor around the start point to snap to the desired X. Y or Z inferred direction. Select a start point location for the line. o Select an object to limit the length of the line.

Select a start point location for the line. Select a start point location for the line. followed by pressing the Return key. Select an end point location constraint for the arc. 2. Line PointPerpendicular 1. 2. Select a middle point location constraint to create the arc. Creates an arc using three point constraints. Select a start point location constraint for the arc. Line TangentTangent 1. Creates a line using a tangent to tangent constraint. To create the line do one of the following: o Rubberband the line to get the desired length and click MB1. Select a line for a perpendicular constraint. Arc Point-PointPoint 1. o Select an object to limit the length of the line. Uses the Extend Line to Screen Bounds option with the currently selected line creation method to create a line bounded by the view limits. Creates a line using a start point and tangent constraints. 2. Use MB1 to select a curve for the tangent constrain and create the line. Creates an arc using start and end point constraints and a tangent constraint. followed by pressing the Return key. Use MB1 to select a curve for the tangent constraint and create the line. Once you have selected the start point you can optionally enter a length for the line by: o o rubberbanding a length.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 225 Creates a line using a start point and a perpendicular constraint ( Angle constraint set to 90 degrees). Line PointTangent 1. 3. or entering a value in the on-screen input box. Unbounded Line This option works like a toggle switch. or entering a value in the on-screen input box. Once you have selected the start point you can optionally enter a length for the line by: o o rubberbanding a length. o Specify a length in the on-screen input box and press the Return key. 3. Select a curve for a tangent constraint for the line. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 2.

Select a curve for the first tangent constraint. Creates a complete arc circle with start and end tangent constraints and a specified radius constraint. Arc TangentTangent-Radius 1. followed by pressing the Return key. Select a third tangent constraint curve to create the circle. followed by pressing the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Select a middle point to create the circle. Select an end point location constraint for the arc. Select a curve for the second tangent constraint. Circle TangentTangent-Radius 1. 3. Select a start point for the circle. 3. Select a third tangent constraint curve to create the arc. o Enter a radius in the on-screen input box. Select a start point for the circle. 2. 2. 2. 3. Arc TangentTangent-Tangent 1. Circle TangentTangent-Tangent 1. 3. Select a curve for the second tangent constraint. 3. Select a curve for the first tangent constraint. o Enter a radius in the on-screen input box. Select a tangent constraint curve to create the arc.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Arc Point-PointTangent 1. 2. Specify a radius and create the arc using one of these methods: o Drag the cursor and rubberband the preview arc until it has the desired radius and click MB1. Creates a complete arc circle using start and end point constraints and a tangent constraint. Select a curve for a tangent constraint. Creates an arc that has tangent constraints with three other arcs. 2. Select a start point location constraint for the arc. Select a curve for the first tangent constraint. 3. Creates a complete arc circle using three point constraints. Select a curve for the second tangent constraint. 226 Creates an arc with tangent constraints to two arcs and has a specified radius constraint. Select an end point for the circle. Select a tangent constraint curve to create the circle. Circle PointPoint-Tangent 1. Creates a complete arc circle with tangent constraints to three other arcs. 2. 3. 2. Circle PointPoint-Point 1. Select an end point for the circle. Select a second curve for another tangent constraint. Specify a radius and create the arc circle using one of these methods: o Drag the cursor and rubberband the preview arc until it has the desired radius and click MB1.

Circle CenterPoint 1. the Basic Curves dialog is displayed. 2. Overview drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . depending on which of the icons you choose. Select a center point constraint. Specify a radius and create the arc circle using one of these methods: o Drag the cursor and rubberband the preview arc until it has the desired radius and click MB1. Brings up the Fillet mode of the Basic Curves dialog. Brings up the Arc mode of the Basic Curves dialog. 4. plus two editing methods. which gives you options for editing parameters of basic curves. Creates a center-based arc circle using center and radius constraints. which gives you options for trimming basic curves. The unique options are described in the appropriate individual curve creation sections. The icons at the top are the curve types that you can create. Circle CenterRadius 227 1. Brings up the Edit Curve Parameters mode of the Basic Curves dialog. Basic Curves When you choose this option. Circle CenterTangent 1. followed by pressing the Return key. which gives you options for creating lines. Select a tangent constraint curve to create the arc circle. Select a center point constraint. 2. Brings up the Circle mode of the Basic Curves dialog. o Enter a radius in the on-screen input box. Line Arc Circle Fillet Trim Edit Curve Parameters Other options on the Basic Curves dialog vary. which gives you options for creating circles. Basic Curves Dialog Icons Brings up the Line mode of the Basic Curves dialog. which gives you options for creating arcs. Select a center point constraint. Options that are common to more than one curve type are described in the Overview. Creates an center-based arc circle using a center and tangent constraints. Brings up the Trim mode of the Basic Curves dialog. Select a start point constraint to create the arc circle.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Return key. which gives you options for creating fillets. Creates a center-based arc circle using center and start point constraints. 2.

Break String Breaks the string of curves at the place where you chose this option. when the Basic Curves dialog is active. but String Mode remains active (i. There are two types of data entry fields in the dialog bar:   Location fields .These fields control parameters of the curve. The data entry fields in the dialog bar vary depending on which type of curve you are creating. such as length of a line. turn the button OFF. These fields track the location of the cursor. To stop string mode.. or radius of an arc. any values you key into the dialog bar are relative to the last defined point. and which options you have selected. just to the right of the work layer input box. as you are creating a curve.e. a. Common Options Delta When this option is ON. String Mode Lets you create an unbroken string of curves. Parameter fields . if you create more lines or arcs. To break string mode and start it again with the next object created. Gives you valuable feedback while you are creating curves. the display shows what the curve will look like based on its current definition.This controls the number of decimal places displayed in the fields. such as what kind of point is highlighted. or by specifying a cursor location or using the Point Constructor. this is what the dialog bar looks like when you are creating lines. choose Break String or press MB2. or whether you have highlighted an object. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . the end of one object becomes the beginning of the next.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 228 The Basic Curves dialog is available from both the Create Curve dialog and the Sketch Tools dialog.XC. Basic Curves Creation Tools The Dialog Bar The dialog bar is a series of data entry fields that appear at the bottom of the graphics window. YC. The Status line is located below the graphics window. In most cases. or you can use them to input a fixed value. and ZC. Provide quick access to frequently-used options for specific curve types. Point Method Lets you specify points relative to existing geometry. The Basic Curves dialog provides you with several tools to make curve creation faster and easier. When this option is on. they will be in another unbroken string). Basic Curves Tools and Common Options Tools Dialog bar Preview of Object Creation Shift/MB3 Popup Menus Status line Text fields in which you can enter values for the location or parameters of the curve that you are creating. There are also two options on the User Interface Preferences dialog that affect dialog bar interactions:  Decimal Places . For example.

This controls whether or not the fields track the current location of the cursor.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  229 Tracking . in most cases you will see a "preview" of what the new curve will be. twice for "replace" mode).e. YC. arc. When a parameter field (such as length. you see what the curve will look like. or circle. the top two options are not displayed. . (When you are creating circles. When you are creating a curve in the Basic Curves dialog. you can use the <Tab> key or click MB1 in the field you want (once for "insert" mode. you can accept it by completing selection of the currently highlighted geometry or indicating a screen location. i. the location you have specified is accepted and an asterisk is displayed in the graphics area indicating that point. When the curve looks correct. To display this menu. The figure below shows what the popup looks like when you are creating lines and arcs. or ZC field has focus. Shift/MB3 Popup Menus When you are in line. or circle creation mode in the Basic Curves dialog. The shape of the curve is previewed. before it is actually created. and you press <Enter>. arc.. You can also change some of the parameters of a curve right after you create it. as with any other Motif text field. Preview of Object Creation As you go through the steps to create a line. arc. The content and function of the fields are discussed in the individual curve creation sections. as you are dragging it.any field other than the three mentioned above) has focus and you press <Enter>. To give a text field focus. the values in all parameter fields are accepted and applied to the curve being constructed. As soon as you finish creating a line. Here are the general rules that apply to keying in text in the dialog bar fields:    When the XC. you can enter new values in the parameter text fields and the newly created object will be updated accordingly (unless you are using String Mode). radius. so that you know what the curve will look like before you create it. move the cursor to the graphics window and press <Shift>MB3. etc. there is a special popup menu you can use.) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . or circle. all curves other than fillets are created with some type of dragging method. This popup menu changes depending on what type of curve you are creating.

the Point Constructor is displayed. or by using the Point Constructor. objects.) Use Lock Mode when your next action would normally cause the line creation mode to change. regardless of the creation method. The snap angle is ignored. Select Face The Select Face option lets you select a face and use it as the limiting object for a line. Inferred Point Cursor Location Existing Point End Point Control Point Inferred Point Intersection Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Quadrant Point Select Face Point Constructor The Inferred Point method affects the following points:    Cursor locations Control points (end point. control points. several things change:    The cursor location is no longer tracked in the dialog bar. is bounded by the limits of the view. and you want to avoid that. and arc centers are prehighlighted to help you select them. (String Mode is unavailable. c. midpoint. When you choose OK or Back from that dialog. This option is unavailable when you are in any other curve creation mode. Control points are no longer highlighted.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING b. existing point) Arc centers The type of point currently selected is displayed in the Status line. After you select a face. If you choose the Point Constructor method. Note See the Snap Point Tool for specific types of point inferencing methods that are available when specifying points and point locations during the creation and editing of certain geometric objects. work similarly to those in the Point Constructor. Basic Curves Point Method Creation Option 230 This option menu lets you specify points relative to existing geometry. you are automatically returned to Infer mode. or by specifying a cursor location. except for Inferred Point and Select Face. you are returned to the Basic Curves dialog. Basic Curves Line There are several options on the Basic Curves dialog that are unique to line creation. When you use an option other than Inferred Point. As you move the cursor around the graphics area. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Unbounded Lock Mode / Unlock Mode . any line that you create. The options on this menu (shown below). Basic Curves Dialog Options (unique for line mode) When this option is ON.

or at an angle to an existing line. You can choose Unlock Mode to free up the line being created.e. by keying new values into the dialog bar text fields and pressing <Enter>. Dialog Bar Angle If you specify the first point.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 231 Parallel options Options for creating parallel lines. To change the Angle Increment. the word "Parallel" is displayed in the Status line. parallel to line A. the mode of line creation that is currently "rubberbanding" in the graphics window is locked. to switch to a different mode. However. and ending at a point projected from the endpoint of line B. When you have specified the start point and selected line A. the line Increment snaps to each degree of increment that is specified in this field. When you choose Lock Mode. the line will snap to that endpoint . At this time. The Angle Increment is effective only when the Point Method is set to Inferred Point. to determine the projection for the end of your new line. Lock/Unlock Mode When you are creating a line that is parallel.) Other options on this dialog are common options (i. enter a new value in the field and press the <Enter> key. the Angle Increment is ignored.not what you want. and you want to avoid that. then drag the cursor around the graphics window. if you try to select the endpoint of line B. The lines can be parallel to a WCS axis. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can change the angle and/or length of a line immediately after you create it. shared by several modes) that are described in the Overview. (The new value will not become effective until the <Enter> key is pressed. Line Creation Special Dialog Bar fields for Line Creation.. or at a specified distance from a selected line. the button changes to Unlock Mode. and you choose Lock Mode. the new line "rubberbands" parallel to the line A. If any other Point Method is used. You can use this option when your next action would normally cause the line creation mode to change. perpendicular. Let's say you wanted a line through a point.

Offset (in the dialog bar) . the XC-YC plane of the WCS).0 inch line that is parallel to ZC. Parallel at Distance From . Now you can select the endpoint of Line B to establish the end of the new line.  Basic Curves Parallel Options There are several options that help you control the creation of a parallel line: Parallel to . If you want to edit the line. if you create a 5. each new line is created at the specified distance from the line that was originally selected.0 inch line that is parallel to XC. you must use the Edit Curve options. and ZC fields display the location of the line's start point. When it is set to New.The distance that the new line is offset. Dialog Bar Fields The following fields are available in the dialog bar during line creation and editing: The XC. but keep it parallel to the ZC axis.These buttons are used to create a line parallel to the XC..[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 232 Press MB2 to choose Lock Mode. YC. choose the button for the desired axis. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . each new line is created at the specified distance from the last line created. The Length field displays the length of the line. and specify the end of the line.This line affects line creation when you are creating a series of parallel lines. the result is a 6.e. which is the default action. and then use the dialog bar to change the line's length to 6. or ZC axis. Specify a point. When this option is set to Original.0 inches. Note Any edits made immediately after creation of a line parallel to the ZC axis are made in the work plane (i. For example. YC.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 233 The Angle field displays the angle of the line. The Offset field lets you enter a value for creating a line parallel to another line at the specified distance. you can establish precise values for the angle and/or length of the line by keying the values into the text fields in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter> immediately after creating the line. This is usually the angle measured counterclockwise from the XC axis. YC.  Basic Curve Line Creation Methods Below is a list of all available Basic Curve line creation methods. However. or ZC axis Through a point and at an angle to the XC axis Through a point and parallel. There is also a quick reference sheet of the most commonly used methods. Between two points Through a point and horizontal or vertical Through a point and parallel to the XC. for certain creation methods. The following sections cover these methods in detail. For most line creation methods. or at an angle to a line Through a point and tangent or perpendicular to a curve Tangent to a curve and tangent or perpendicular to another curve Tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line Tangent to a curve and at an angle to a line A bisector of the angle between two lines Midway between two parallel lines Through a point and normal to a face Parallel at a distance Line Between Two Points drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . perpendicular. you can enter a value for an angle measured from another line.

if you specify a cursor location for the second point. or keying a value into the Length field in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter. or values established by keying numbers into the XC. the XC. when the Point Method is set to Infer. YC. 3. selecting geometry. if you choose Point Constructor from the Point Method option menu. or ZC. the line will remain at the constant length. The points may be cursor locations. 2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 234 To create a line between two points. the line snaps to vertical or horizontal if it is within the Snap Angle. if you want to key values into the dialog bar. YC. Line Through a Point and Parallel to the XC. Be aware that. choose XC. you can also just key in the desired length immediately after the line is created. the line snaps to the nearest angle as determined by that value. Line Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Line Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical If. or ZC axis: 1. As always. control points. The line rubberbands in the graphics area. define the first point. you define the second point using a cursor location. Establish the length by specifying a cursor location. and ZC fields in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter. YC. Note Remember. and the Angle Increment value is not zero. simply define the two points. Define the start point. YC. To create a constant length line through two points. or ZC Axis To define a line through a point and parallel to the XC. YC. You can also define the points with the Point Constructor. or ZC field must have focus when you press Enter. then key in the length in the Length field in the dialog bar and press Tab. When you define the second point. Under Parallel to on the dialog.

perpendicular. when the line starts to rubberband. 6. use Preferences→User Interface. To turn Tracking OFF. If Tracking is ON. or at an Angle to an Existing Line To define a line through a point and parallel. Move the cursor around. You may do the first two steps in either order. it will show the angle of the line relative to the WCS. You can also create a line by any method. perpendicular. Make sure you use the <Tab> key. or at an angle to an existing line: 1. 4. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Define the start point of the new line. Define the start point. Key in the desired angle into the Angle text field in the dialog bar and press the <Tab key. Establish the length by specifying a cursor location.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING To define a line through a point and at an angle to the XC axis: 235 1. 2. or entering a length value in the dialog bar. If you use <Enter>. then change the newly created line to a specific angle by entering the desired value in the Angle field Note Angles are measured counterclockwise from the XC axis. The Status line shows you which mode is being previewed. The angle used during the "preview" is whatever happened to be in the Angle field of the dialog bar at the time you selected the line. Note You should be aware that the line at an angle from a point on the reference line may not be a true perpendicular line unless the reference line lies on the construction plane or is on the WCS. Rather. Select the existing (reference) line. and tab out of the field. or angled line. being careful not to select one of its control points. A line at this angle rubberbands in the graphics area. If you want to create a line at a specific angle to the selected reference line. 3. not the <Enter> key. tab to the Angle field in the dialog bar. at the length specified in the Length field. Depending on where your cursor is. 5. 2. you can preview the parallel. key in the desired angle. selecting geometry. the Angle field in the dialog bar will not display the angle you keyed in. Perpendicular.  Line Through a Point and Parallel. the line is created at the specified angle from the XC axis. 3.

in the plane of the WCS. if you are creating a tangent line. A tangent line is created in the plane of the selected curve or. The same is true for the solid line and cursor. You may select the curve first. then define the point. selecting geometry. 2. then outside. then select the limiting geometry. Sometimes. the curve until the line snaps to the other side. You can use the same method with conics and splines. if the curve is nonplanar. Select the existing curve. you may find that the rubberbanding line is on the wrong side of the curve. Move the cursor inside. being careful not to select one of its control points. 3.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 236 7. establish the length by specifying a cursor location. Line Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to Another Curve drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . or by entering a Length in the dialog bar. press MB2 to choose Lock Mode (the default action). The figure shows two examples of creating a line through a point and tangent or perpendicular to an arc and a circle. Define the start point of the new line. If selecting geometry to specify the length of your line would result in the line type being changed. The line rubberbands tangent and (if you defined the point first) perpendicular to the selected curve. you must define the point first. or selecting the object in that position. When the desired line is displayed. Notice that the dashed line shows the line you would get with the dashed cursor in that position. Line Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a Curve To define a line through a point and tangent or perpendicular to a curve: 1. When the desired line is displayed. If you are creating a perpendicular line. select the highlighted geometry.

The line rubberbands tangent to the selected curve. The rubberbanding line is shown parallel. Notice that the dashed line shows the line you would get with the dashed cursor position. move the cursor inside. If the line is rubberbanding on the wrong side of the curve. Move the cursor over the second curve. move the cursor inside. Select the line. Line Tangent to a Curve and Parallel or Perpendicular to a Line To define a line tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line: 1. being careful not to select one of its control points. select the second curve. Notice that the line snaps either tangent or perpendicular to the curve. or at an angle to. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 2. 3. The line rubberbands tangent to the selected curve. depending on the cursor location. being careful not to select one of its control points. 2. When the desired line is displayed. the curve until the line snaps to the correct side. then outside. again being careful not to select one of its control points. If the rubberbanding line is on the wrong side of the curve. then outside. The figure shows examples of creating a line tangent to a circle and tangent or perpendicular to another circle. Select the curve. Select the first curve. The same is true for the solid line and cursor. the selected line.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 237 To define a line tangent to a curve and tangent or perpendicular to another curve: 1. the curve until the line snaps to the correct side. perpendicular. depending on the cursor position.

and tab out of the field. Tab to the Angle field in the dialog bar. by keying in the value in the dialog bar. again being careful not to select one of its control points. Rather. you would get the dashed line with the cursor in the dashed position and the solid line with the cursor in the solid position. key in the desired angle. establish the length by specifying a cursor location or selecting geometry. when the line starts to rubberband. then select the limiting geometry. When the desired line is displayed. press MB2 to choose Lock Mode (the default action). move the cursor inside. it will show the angle of the line relative to the WCS. Line Tangent to a Curve and at an Angle to a Line To define a line tangent to a curve and at an angle to a line: 1. depending on the cursor position. In the figure. the Angle field in the dialog bar will not display the angle you keyed in.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 238 3. 2. or at an angle to. If the line is rubberbanding on the wrong side of the curve. Now the line rubberbands at the specified angle. 3. establish the length by specifying a cursor location. use Preferences→User Interface. the selected line. To turn Tracking OFF. selecting geometry. or by entering a Length in the dialog bar. The line rubberbands tangent to the selected curve. You can establish a specific length immediately after the line is created. When the desired line is displayed. then outside. The rubberbanding line is shown parallel. perpendicular. the curve until the line snaps to the correct side. If Tracking is ON. Select the line. being careful not to select one of its control points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . If selecting geometry to specify the length of your line would result in the line type being changed. 4. The angle that is used initially is the value that was displayed in the Angle field of the dialog bar when you selected the line. Select the curve.

selecting geometry. 2. The four possible bisector lines rubberband as you move the cursor around the screen. Select the first line. press MB2 to choose Lock Mode (the default action). establish the length by specifying a cursor location.  Line that Bisects the Angle between Two Lines To define a bisector line: 1. Line Through a Point and Normal to a Face drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Select two nonparallel lines. A new line rubberbands parallel to the selected lines and midway between them. Select a line parallel to the first line. or by entering a Length in the dialog bar. When the desired line is displayed. The selected lines do not have to intersect. 3. Line Midway Between Two Parallel Lines To define a line midway between two parallel lines: 1. establish the length by specifying a cursor location. It begins at the projection of the closest endpoint of the first selected line onto the new line. selecting geometry. or by entering a Length in the dialog bar.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 239 If selecting geometry to specify the length of your line would result in the line type being changed. The endpoint nearest where you select this line determines the start point of the new line. When the desired line is displayed. 2. The figure shows how the cursor position determines which of the four possible bisector lines is displayed. then select the limiting geometry.

The value in the Offset field in the dialog bar determines the distance between the selected line and parallel line. 2. The line rubberbands from the point. 2. the offset distance can be measured either from the last created line (New) or from the original selected line (Original). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Line Parallel to Another Line at a Distance You can use the Parallel at Distance From options to create a series of parallel lines. Define the point.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 240 To define a line through a point and normal to a face: 1. If the point is on the face. The offset line is created. Choose the Select Face option on the Point Method menu and select the face. Select the base line. You can select the face first. Turn String Mode OFF. When you are creating multiple parallel lines. keeping the center of the selection ball on the side of the line that you want the offset measured in. To define a line parallel to another line at a distance: 1. but if you do. you will not see any rubberbanding. limited to its intersection with the face. The line will just be created after you specify the point. The line is created through the point and normal to the face. the line rubberbands normal to the face until you specify a limiting point or object. Enter the offset distance in the Offset field in the dialog bar and press <Return. You cannot create a line parallel at a distance when you are in string mode. 3.

the order of some of the creation steps can be reversed. press <Return again. To create another line at a different offset.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 241 4. To create another line at the same offset. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . key in that value and press <Return.  Quick Reference on Line Creation Methods Note With most line creation methods.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 242 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

Specifies how the points (or other objects) that you select will be used to define the arc. you define the center point. Full Circle Alternate Solution Creation Method Arc Dialog Bar Fields Basic Curves Dialog Options (unique for arc mode) When this option is ON. The dialog bar includes special fields for arc creation and editing. shared by several modes) that are described in the Overview. YC. and ZC fields display the location of the arc's start point. The Radius field displays the radius of the arc. (However. end With this method.e. there are several options on the Basic Curves dialog that are unique to arc creation. Dialog Bar Fields The following fields are available in the dialog bar during arc creation and editing: The XC. regardless of the creation method. or spline. The start and end points can be adjusted by entering angle values in the dialog bar. the previewed arc changes and you will not get the result you want. The object selected for tangency to an arc cannot be a parabola. one of these objects can be selected for tangency to a complete circle.. can be used only while the arc is being previewed. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . If you choose Alternate Solution after moving the cursor to the dialog.)  Center. Basic Curve Arcs When you are in arc creation mode.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 243 d. or which passes through two points and is tangent to a selected object. you can create an arc that passes through three points. Creates the complement of the currently previewed arc. is created as a complete circle. as shown below. These options are covered in this section. end. Creation Method There are two basic methods for creating arcs:  Start. hyperbola. start. then the start and end of the arc. Other options on this dialog are common options (i. point on arc With this method. any arc that you create.

tangent to an object.) For all arc creation methods.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING The Diameter field displays the diameter of the arc. end point Center. point on arc or tangent to an object Start point. one of these objects can be selected for tangency to a complete circle. (However. The points may be cursor locations. measured from the XC axis and moving counterclockwise. 244 The Start Angle field displays the beginning angle of the arc. End Point. end point. end point Note The object selected for tangency cannot be a parabola. The following sections cover these methods in detail. start point. you can establish precise values for the radius or diameter by keying the value into the text field in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter> immediately after creating the arc. Note The Start Angle and End Angle fields are unavailable when you are using the Start. or spline. Point on Arc creation method. hyperbola.    Start point. End. measured from the XC axis and moving counterclockwise. The End Angle field displays the ending angle of the arc. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Point on Arc or Tangent to an Object To create an arc using this method: 1.  Basic Curves Arc Creation Methods Below is a list of all available arc creation methods. or values established by keying numbers into the dialog bar and pressing <Enter>. There is also a quick reference sheet of the arc creation methods. Start Point. control points. Define two points.

or values established by keying numbers into the dialog bar and pressing <Enter>. 3. hyperbola. This may be a cursor location.) drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Define a third point or select a tangent object (other than a parabola. Choose the Center. specify a cursor location. If the start point is an endpoint of the tangent object. Select a tangent object (other than a parabola. End Point To create an arc using this method: 1. or spline). This establishes the radius of the arc and the start angle. Define the center point. or spline). End Point To create an arc using this method: 1. When the desired arc is displayed. Its endpoints are the two defined points. This may be a cursor location. Center. select limiting geometry. Define the end point. or values established by keying numbers into the dialog bar and pressing <Enter>. Start Point. 2. Define the start point. the arc will come off the end of the selected object and be tangent to it. 4. 2. control points. Tangent to an Object. 245 2. Start Point. This method is similar to the previous one.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING An arc is displayed by dragging. hyperbola. in a counterclockwise direction from the second point. Start. 3. An arc rubberbands starting at the point and tangent to the selected object. End button to turn the option ON. or enter an end angle in the dialog bar. (Remember that you can get the complement of the previewed arc by pressing MB2 for Alternate Solution. but is intended to let you define tangency at the endpoints of an object. An arc is rubberbanded. control points. Define the second point.

there is a summary of circle creation methods. Basic Curves Circles In the first portion of this section.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  Basic Curves Quick Reference Arc Creation Methods Note In many cases. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Following that. a copy of the previously created circle is created. the order of some of the creation steps can be reversed. each time you define a point. with its center at the specified point. it is not available in circle mode. YC. Note The String Mode option is unavailable. Dialog Bar Fields The following fields are available in the dialog bar during circle creation and editing: The XC. the various options on the dialog that pertain to circle creation are explained. and ZC fields display the location of the circle's center. Multiple Positions Basic Curves Dialog Options (unique for circle mode) When this option is ON. 246 e.

The circumference of the circle passes through this point. diameter. and ZC values in the dialog bar). start angle. or by entering the XC. or end angle by keying the value into the text field in the dialog bar and pressing <Enter> immediately after creating the circle (while it is still selected). and ZC fields for the second point will be applied relative to the first point. This becomes the center of the circle. radius or diameter Center point.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING The Radius field displays the radius of the circle. Radius or Diameter To create a circle using this method: 1.) Center Point. For all circle creation methods. YC. The following sections cover these methods in detail. 2. YC. tangent object Center Point. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Define a second point. (If the Delta option is toggled ON. you can establish precise values for the radius. Define the radius or diameter in the dialog bar. This becomes the center of the circle. and ZC values in the dialog bar). point on circle Center point. Center point. Point on Circle To create a circle using this method:   Define a point (by selecting it in the graphics area. 247 The Diameter field displays the diameter of the circle. There is also a quick reference sheet of the arc and circle creation methods. by one of the Point Method options. YC. any values that you enter in the dialog bar XC.  Basic Curves Circle Creation Methods Below is a list of all available circle creation methods. Define a point (by selecting it in the graphics area or by entering the XC.

2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Center Point.  Basic Curves Quick Reference Circle Creation Methods drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . This becomes the center of the circle. and ZC values in the dialog bar). YC. Select an object. Tangent Object 248 To create a circle using this method: 1. The circle is created tangent to this object. Define a point (by selecting it in the graphics area or by entering the XC.

and splines. 4. Enter the radius of the fillet. Note Fillets in active sketches are created with the Sketch Fillet dialog. 2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING f. Choose the type of fillet you want to create. Radius Defines the radius of the fillet. Specify the approximate center point of the fillet.) Point Lets you use the Point Constructor to select some or all of the curves to fillet. lines. The general procedure to create a fillet is: 1. arcs. instead of the Curve Fillet dialog that is described in this section. 5. Select the objects. Trimming shortens or extends the selected curves to join with the fillet. 3 Curve Creates a fillet between three curves. Constructor Overview The figure below shows the three types of fillets you can create in NX. which can be any combination of points. some trimming options are changed or are not available. Constructs a fillet between two curves. conics or splines. including points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Indicate how you wish to trim the objects. You can also specify how the curves are trimmed when the fillet is created. Basic Curves Fillets 249 When you choose the Fillet option. Inherit Lets you define the values of the new fillet by selecting an existing fillet. you need to choose a trimming option. Fillet conics. A 2 Curve two curve fillet is generated in the counterclockwise direction from the first selected curve Fillet to the second. You can use the Fillet option to "round off" the intersection between two or three selected curves. lines. Trim Options If you choose to create a two or three curve fillet. circles. 3. the Curve Fillet dialog is displayed. Create Fillet Dialog Options Simple Fillet Creates a fillet between two coplanar nonparallel lines. (Depending on the fillet option selected.

it is deleted. The Delete Second Curve and Trim Third Curve options are not available. 250 You can use the Point Constructor to select one. you can choose to trim the first. The Point Constructor remains modal until you choose OK or Back. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . In 3 Curve Fillet. two. some trimming options are changed or not available. last. or both curves. none of the curves are trimmed.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Note Many of these steps are done simultaneously when creating simple fillets. Choose one of the following trim options: Trim First Curve Delete Second Curve Trim Third Curve In 2 Curve Fillet. Depending on the fillet option selected. last. you can choose to trim the first. Trimming shortens or extends the selected curves to join with the fillet. Trimming Options If you choose to create a two or three curve fillet. or all three of the curves for a 2 curve fillet or 3 curve fillet. Note If the trimmed curve has a length equal to zero and there is no associative connection to the curve. There is a quick reference sheet about creating fillets at the end of this section. The figure below shows two examples of fillets created using the Point Constructor. or both curves and delete the second curve. you need to choose a trimming option. Note Points cannot be trimmed or extended. If you do not select any of the trimming options.

Both lines are selected at the same time. Undo After you have created a fillet and trimmed the original curves. Using the cursor location method in the Point Constructor selects a position in the X-Y plane of the WCS. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The position you select is projected normally to the first curve to help determine where the fillet should start. The fillet that is created is directly related to where you select the lines. You must position the selection ball in such a manner as to include both lines. indicate the approximate center point of the fillet curve. Indicate the center by using the cursor or the Point Constructor. Note The trim options and Point Constructor are not available.  Simple Fillet Creates a fillet between two coplanar nonparallel lines. You determine the size of the fillet by entering a value for the radius. The lines are automatically trimmed to the points of tangency with the arc. This is different from the normal method for indicating the arc center.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 251 Define the Fillet Center After selecting the curves to be rounded. which specifies a point in a plane parallel to the viewing screen. you can choose Undo to delete the fillet and reverse the trim.

The fillet created by this method is tangent to both curves. lines.  2 Curve Fillet Constructs a fillet between two curves. A two curve fillet is an arc generated in the counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the second. conics or splines. Each line extends or trims to the arc.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING If the selection ball contains only one line. it is created in a plane based on the location of the points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . circles. Fillets Between Two Points If a fillet is created between two points. Position the center of the selection ball nearest to the intersection where you want the fillet formed. The point determines how the fillet is created. the reference plane is defined by a vector between each point (A) and the vector parallel with the ZC axis (B). Cannot find two lines within the selection ball radius 252 Both lines are selected by indicating a single point. In the figure below. an error message displays. it indicates the center of the arc. The fillet is created in the plane containing each point and normal to the reference plane. including points.

the fillet cannot be constructed. the fillet plane is the plane that contains the tangent of the first curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Fillets Between One Point and Another Curve If only one curve is a point. The two curves do not need to lie in the same plane and the fillet is completely independent of the WCS. the fillet plane is defined as the plane which contains the vector between the point and the fillet tangency point (A). Fillets Between Two Curves If neither curve is a point. and the tangent of the filleted object (B) (see the figure below). The plane is normal to the vector that is normal to both tangents. The fillet plane is totally independent of the WCS.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 253 Note If the vector between the two points is parallel to the ZC axis.

Use Tangent Outside if you wish to have the selected arc lie outside of the fillet to be created. To have the fillet lie inside the selected arc. lines. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The three curves do not have to lie in the same plane. If One Curve is an Arc If any one of the curves selected is an arc. you are required to supply additional information to create the fillet: Tangent Outside Fillet Within Circle Circle Within Fillet Tangent Outside To have the selected arc lie outside of the fillet. The Radius option is not available. A three curve fillet is a circular arc generated in a counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the third curve. conics. If the original curve is not tangent to the fillet arc. The curves are trimmed to the tangent point of the fillet. To have the selected arc to lie inside the fillet. arcs. and splines.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 254  3 Curve Fillet This option creates a fillet between three curves. which can be any combination of points. The fillet is constructed in such a way that the center of the arc is equidistant to all three curves. the extrapolation of the curve necessary to intersect the fillet is calculated and displayed (except for points and splines which cannot be extrapolated).

Circle Within Fillet is chosen after selecting Curves 1 and 2. In the figure above. Curve 3 is trimmed to the point of tangency. This causes the selected arcs to lie within the fillet. This causes the fillet to lie within the selected arc. Fillet Within Circle If you want the fillet to lie inside the selected arc. Fillet Within Circle was chosen after Curve 2 was selected. Curve 1 is trimmed from its starting point to the point of tangency. With automatic trim. Curve 2 is deleted. Circle Within Fillet If you want the selected arc to lie inside the fillet. or if the filleting procedure is unable to converge to a fillet center.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 255 In the figure above. and Curves 1 and 3 are trimmed to the points of tangency. Curve 2 (arc) is deleted. use Fillet Within Circle. With automatic trim. use Circle Within Fillet. and Curves 1 and 3 are trimmed to their points of tangency to the fillet. In the figure above. Tangent Outside was chosen after Curve 1 was selected. Curve 2 is deleted. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Error Messages The following error message is displayed if the three curves you selected cannot form a fillet arc. With automatic trim.

In this case.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Invalid Fillet Defined 256 The latter occurs when the maximum allowable number of iterations (100) used to find a point on each of the three curves that is equidistant from the indicated fillet center is exceeded. choosing another approximate fillet center may yield a fillet.Fillet Not Created  Basic Curves Quick Reference Fillet Creation Methods g. Edit Curve Parameters This option lets you edit most types of curves without having to leave the Basic Curves dialog. choosing another approximate fillet center may create a fillet. The following error message is displayed when the system is unable to solve the set of quadratic equations. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Trim The Trim option on the Basic Curves dialog opens the Edit→Curve→ Trim Curve dialog. This option has the same functionality as the Edit Curve Parameters dialog found under Edit→Curve. In this case. No Solution .

When indicating the approximate intersection point between the curves. Note The offset is measured along the path of the curve and is not necessarily a linear distance. you have the option to remove the chamfer and restore the original curves. Enter either an offset and an angle with respect to the first curve or an offset for both curves. Select the curves that form the corner to be beveled. Curve Chamfer This option creates a beveled corner between two coplanar lines or curves. arcs. use the Edit Fillet option on the Edit Curve dialog. 257 5. the offset is the same along both curves. To create a curve chamfer: 1. and conics. splines. Note Many of these steps are done simultaneously when creating simple chamfers. select the side of the intersection where you want the chamfer created. Indicate how you wish to trim the two curves. For simple chamfers. After the chamfer is created. Creates a beveled corner between two coplanar lines. 3.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING To edit a fillet. Creates a beveled corner between two coplanar curves including lines. 5. This option also gives you more control over the trimming than when creating simple chamfers. 2. You may create the following types of chamfers: Simple User Defined Offset Offset is the distance between the intersection of the two curves and the beginning of the chamfer line. Choose the type of curve chamfer to create. either Simple Chamfers or User Defined Chamfers. 4. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Indicate the approximate intersection point between the curves.

a. To create a chamfer between other types of objects. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 2. Simple Chamfers Creates a beveled corner between two coplanar lines.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 258 Angle A chamfer can also be created using one offset and an angle. The angle is measured from the second curve. To create a simple chamfer: 1. The lines are shortened or extended as needed to create the chamfer. Note This option only works with lines. see User Defined Chamfers. Select the corner such that the two lines are both within the selection ball and the center of the selection ball is inside the desired corner. Enter an offset and choose OK.

Trimming Options The following options are available for trimming the original curves: Automatic Trim . Manual Trim . No Trim .  Define an offset from both curves. You then specify whether to trim the curve and which side of the chamfer to trim. restore the original curves (using Undo) and choose Manual Trim. Use one of the two following approaches to create user defined chamfers:  Define the offset from the first curve and an angle from the second curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING User Defined Chamfers 259 Creates a beveled corner between two coplanar curves including arcs. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .Lets you select which chamfered curves you want trimmed. This option gives you more control over the trimming than when creating simple chamfers. splines. The selected side of the chamfer is cut from the geometry. and conics.Automatically causes both curves to either extend or shorten to join the chamfer curve (see the figure below). If the original curves do not trim as you wanted.Leaves the original curves unaltered.

Specify the number of sides. or XC-ZC plane. Procedure To create a rectangle: 1.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 260 6. two of its edges are created parallel to the YC axis. Indicate the second corner. either drag the cursor to the desired location and click the mouse button or enter the coordinates. Rectangles are created in the XC-YC. 2. a rubberbanding effect takes place. Note If the rectangle you are creating does not lie in the XC-YC. YC-ZC. This allows you to see the rectangle before it is actually created. To create a polygon: 1. or XC-ZC plane. 2. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The Rectangle option is available from both the Create Curve dialog and the Sketch Tools dialog. YC-ZC. Rectangle Lets you create a rectangle by selecting two diagonal corners. use Point Constructor or enter the coordinates. When using the cursor to define the corners. 7. Polygon Creates a polygon in a plane parallel to the XC-YC plane of the WCS. Indicate the first corner. Choose the size method.

Circumscribed Radius This option defines the size of a polygon given the radius of a circumscribed circle. Specify the origin for the polygon. The orientation angle is the angle the polygon is rotated away from the XC axis in the counterclockwise direction.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 3. Enter the radius of an circumscribed circle. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Note The software does not create the circles or the reference dimensions shown in the figures on this page. They are included here only as visual aids to support the text. This angle indicates where the first corner of the polygon is located. An inscribed radius is also the distance from the origin to the middle of a side of the polygon. Enter a value for the length of one side of the polygon. A circumscribed radius is the distance from the origin to a corner of the polygon. 4. The origin is the point defining the center point of the polygon and is specified using the Point Constructor. The number of sides specified defines the shape of the polygon. This length is applied to all sides. Inscribed Radius You can define the size of a polygon by entering the radius of an inscribed circle. There are three methods available for defining the size of a polygon. 261 Inscribed Radius Side of Polygon Circumscribed Radius Polygon Dialog Options Enter the radius of an inscribed circle. Enter either a radius and orientation angle or length of side and orientation angle.

in a plane parallel to the work plane (the XC-YC plane). Conic Curves (ellipse. Lets you create an hyperbola. parabola. Specific types of conics are created when working with geometric constraints or certain types of applications.). There are four types of conic curves you can create: arc/circle.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 262 8. etc. An ellipse and a general conic are described using construction techniques (major and minor axes.). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . A parabola and hyperbola require more of a "textbook" definition (focal length. The type of curve that results from the section depends on the angle at which the section passes through the cone (see the figure below). Each is a separate icon under curve creation. vertices. Overview of Conics Conics are created mathematically by sectioning cones. The General Conic option gives you another way to define ellipses. ellipse. etc. end slopes. and hyperbolas. Lets you create conic sections. hyperbola) Lets you create an ellipse. parabola and hyperbola. Lets you create a parabola. A conic curve is located with its center at the point you specify. parabolas.

Major diameter is usually equal to the true diameter of the circle. The semimajor and semiminor values refer to half the length of these axes. Note The Ellipse option is available from both the Create Curve dialog and the Sketch Tools dialog. Ellipse Creating an ellipse is most useful when you want to draw a foreshortened circle. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . One good use for conics is in blending transitions between two existing curves where reversals in slope (or bumps in the transition curve) are a problem (see the figure below). a. Semimajor and Semiminor An ellipse has two axes: a major axis and a minor axis (the midpoint of each is at the center of the ellipse). as shown below. In some instances they can be more useful than splines. because it lets you specify the major and minor diameters. To create an ellipse: 1. Minor diameter usually represents the amount of foreshortening.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 263 Conics curve in a single direction. 2. Define the creation parameters of the ellipse. The longest diameter of the ellipse is the major axis. the shortest diameter the minor axis. Indicate the center point of the ellipse using the Point Constructor. The default ellipse is created in a plane parallel to the work plane.

In NX. only one of these curves is constructed. To create a hyperbola: 1.one on either side of its center. The hyperbola is rotated from the positive XC axis about the center and lies in a plane parallel to the XC-YC plane. Indicate the center of the hyperbola using Point Constructor. Hyperbola This option allows you to create a hyperbola.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 264 Start and End Angle An ellipse is created in the counterclockwise direction about the positive ZC axis. By definition. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . a hyperbola contains two curves . The start and end angles determine the starting and ending positions of the ellipse and are measured from the major axis. b. The center lies at the intersection of the asymptotes and the axis of symmetry passes through this intersection.

lying in a plane parallel to the work plane. The focal length must be greater than zero. The default parabola is constructed with its axis of symmetry parallel to the XC axis. however. To create a parabola: 1. Indicate the vertex for the parabola using the Point Constructor. the lower value is automatically made the minimum and the higher value the maximum. The focal length is the distance from the vertex to the focus. The pivot point is at the center of the hyperbola and the angle of rotation is referenced from the positive XC direction. DY values determine the length of the curve. Define the parameters of the hyperbola. 2. c. always lies parallel to the XC-YC work plane. Width parameters for a hyperbola are the Minimum DY and Maximum DY. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The angle the semi-transverse axis makes with the XC axis is defined as the rotation angle of a hyperbola. Width parameters for a parabola are the Minimum DY and Maximum DY. 265 A hyperbola has two axes: a transverse axis and a conjugate axis. The relationship between these two axes determines the slope of the curve. Minimum DY and Maximum DY limit the sweep of the parabola on either side of the axis of symmetry. Parabola A parabola is a set of points equidistant from a point (the focus) and a line (the directrix). If a Minimum DY value is entered that is algebraically greater than the Maximum DY value. Minimum DY and Maximum DY limit the sweep of the hyperbola on either side of the axis of symmetry. A parabola created by defining the vertex location and keying in values to describe the curve. Define the creation parameters of the parabola. The angle is measured in a counterclockwise direction.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 2. The semi-transverse and semi-conjugate parameters refer to half the length of these axes. Note A parabola created by selecting five points on the curve lies in the plane defined by those points.

The slope is projected to the plane of the conic. parabola. the lower value is automatically made the minimum and the higher value the maximum. Anchor 2 Points.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 266 DY values determine the length of the curve by limiting the displayed width of the parabola. If the slopes are not in the plane generated by the points defining the conic. Rho. the slope(s) lies at the end(s) of the conic. Creates a conic given two points on the conic section. Anchor. anchor. To create a general conic: 1. 2 Slope. and the projective discriminant. Rho (which is used to determine a third point on the conic section). Creates a conic given two points on the conic section. 2. the slope at the first point. an anchor point to determine the starting and ending slopes. depending on the mathematical results of the input data. Creates a conic section defined by four coplanar points. The conic always passes through each point you specify. d. Creates a conic section defined by three points on the conic and the intersection point of the two end tangent vectors. Rho. a parabola. It is measured in a counterclockwise direction with a pivot point at the vertex.  5 Points This option lets you create a conic section by defining five coplanar points. with a slope at the first point. With the two methods utilizing slopes. 1 Slope 3 Points. and the projective discriminant. and hyperbola options. Rho General Conic Construction Methods Creates a conic section defined by five coplanar points. 3. Specify the remaining points of the conic and/or define the slope. If a Minimum DY value is entered that is algebraically greater than the Maximum DY value. The resulting conic is either a circle. Creates a conic using an equation where the controlling conic parameters are user defined. General Conic This option creates conic sections by using either one of the various loft conic methods or the general conic equation. Define the points using the Point Constructor. or a hyperbola. and the slope at the third point. 2 Slope 3 Points. Choose a construction method. an ellipse. the starting and ending slopes. the conic is not created and an error message is displayed. unless points lie on the two branches of a hyperbola. since it allows several different methods for defining the curve. Rho Coefficients 2 Points. or remaining coefficients. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Construction Methods 5 Points 4 Points. Indicate the location of the first point of the conic using the Point Constructor or define the first coefficient. Creates a conic section defined by three points. The rotation angle of a parabola is the angle formed between the axis of symmetry and the XC axis. The General Conic option is more flexible than the ellipse.

The tangent vector does not need to lie in or be parallel to the plane of the curve. it will pass through the points starting at the first point and ending at the fifth. Even though points on both branches are defined. Lets you define the slope by entering an angle. Lets you use a direction relative to the first point of the curve which lies along the slope. If the conic section created is a hyperbola. 1 Slope Creates a conic section defined by four coplanar points. an ellipse. or a parabola. Lets you define the slope by selecting a curve endpoint. only one of the two branches is created (see the figure below).  4 Points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Controlling the Slope To control the slope of the curve at the endpoint (the first point in the conic). the first and fifth points are not necessarily connected.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 267 If the conic section created is an arc. use one of the following options: Vector Components Direction Point Slope of Curve Angle Defines the slope of an imaginary line from the origin through a position you enter in work coordinates. with a slope at the first point.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Vector Components 268 The Vector Components method enables you to define the slope of an imaginary line from the origin through a position you enter in work coordinates (see the figure below). an imaginary line is calculated from the current position on the conic through the direction point. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . vector components would be used if you knew the slope should be over three inches in the X direction and up two inches in the Y direction. Direction Point Direction Point lets you use a direction relative to the first point of the curve which lies along the slope. With the point defined. Slope of Curve Slope of Curve lets you define the slope by selecting a curve endpoint (see the figure below). This method is used when you have an existing curve which represents the slope of the curve at the first point. As an example. The slope is defined by indicating a point in the direction of the desired curvature. The slope defined with vector components is parallel to the imaginary line. The selected curve does not have to lie in the same plane as the conic.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 269 Angle Angle lets you define the slope by entering an angle. the slope at the first point. The derivative vector is computed from this angle. The angle specified is in the work plane and is always measured counterclockwise from the positive XC axis. and the slope at the third point. Lets you use a direction relative to the first point of the curve which lies along the slope. To control the slope of the curve at the endpoints. use one of the following options: Vector Components Direction Point Defines the slope of an imaginary line from the origin through a position you enter in work coordinates.  3 Points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 2 Slope Creates a conic section using three points.

and the projective discriminant. The position of the anchor point (the intersection point of the two vectors) is used to calculate the slope of the conic at the first and third points.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Slope of Curve Angle Lets you define the slope by selecting a curve endpoint. Consider a line you construct from the anchor point to the midpoint of the line connecting the two endpoints of the conic section. The third point on the conic section lies somewhere along this line. Rho Creates a conic given two points on the conic section. Anchor Creates a conic section defined by three points on the conic and the intersection point of the two end tangent vectors.  2 Points. Use the Point Constructor to specify the three points. Anchor. Lets you define the slope by entering an angle. The farther away the anchor is from the endpoints.  3 Points. is used to determine a third point on the conic section. the more rounded the slope of the curve (see the figure below). the conic section is created. The anchor provides a method of modifying the slope of the curve. The projective discriminant. Rho. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 270 Once the end slope is specified. an anchor point to determine the starting and ending slopes.

the distance D1 is determined from the value entered for Rho.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 271 In the figure above.  Coefficients This method creates a conic using the equation Ax2 + Bxy + Cy2 + Dx + Ey + F = 0 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . a hyperbola is created. an ellipse is created. The value entered for Rho must be between 0 and 1. The Rho value can be used to control the elongation of the curve in place of a third. The Rho value represents a decimal fraction of the distance from the endpoints to the anchor. The type of conic section created is determined by this value. The appropriate conic section is created after Rho is entered. The closer the Rho value gets to one. the more elongated the conic becomes.    If Rho is < 1/2. If Rho is > 1/2. intermediate point. If Rho is = 1/2. a parabola is created.

E. centered at the origin of the WCS. Lets you define the slope by entering an angle. B. and the projective discriminant. limiting form of a conic. If Rho is = 1/2. The projective discriminant. The type of conic section created is determined by this value. Lets you define the slope by selecting a curve endpoint. 2 Slope. To control the slope of the curve at the endpoints. C. The conic created lies in the work plane. The default coefficients define a circle with a unit radius. D. the starting and ending slopes. an ellipse is created. The third point on the conic section lies somewhere along this line. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The coefficients method is useful when converting curves from another graphics system. a hyperbola is created. Lets you use a direction relative to the first point of the curve which lies along the slope. The orientation and shape of a conic.  2 Points. use one of the following options: Vector Components Direction Point Slope of Curve Angle Defines the slope of an imaginary line from the origin through a position you enter in work coordinates.    If Rho is < 1/2. Rho Creates a conic given two points on the conic section. If Rho is > 1/2. Rho. since it represents the data commonly used in the database to redefine a conic. is used to determine a third point on the conic section. The lines defined by the two points and their respective slopes are intersected to establish the anchor point. Consider a line constructed from the anchor point to the midpoint of the line connecting the two endpoints of the conic section.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 272 where the controlling conic parameters (A. a parabola is created. and F) are user defined. The value entered for Rho must be between 0 and 1. and degenerate conic can be defined by entering the desired coefficients.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 273 9. Create a helix with a fixed radius This example shows how to create a helix with a fixed radius by defining its direction and location. The resulting helix is both a spline and a helix feature. Fixed radius helix Number of Turns = 3. Turn Direction = Right Hand (counterclockwise) Pitch Radius Linear law variable radius helix Number of Turns = 3 End Value = 2 (distance from the helix end point to the helical axis) Turn Direction = Right Hand (counterclockwise) Pitch Start Value = 1 (distance from the helix base point to the start point) Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Curve→Curve Drop-down→Helix Insert→Curve→Helix a. and a fixed or variable radius. its pitch (the distance between each turn). its orientation. The following are examples of helices with both a fixed radius and a law controlled radius. Helix Use the Helix command to specify the number of turns the helix makes about its axis. its turn direction.

specify the base point of the helical axis (around which the helix will turn). in the Number of Turns box. The end of the line that is selected determines the direction. 5. type a value for the number of turns you want the helix to make about its axis. NX uses the ZC-Axis and the WCS for the helix base point 8. The Specify the orientation dialog box appears to let you select the Z-Axis for the helix. or the Left Hand option for a helix that turns clockwise. For this example. In the Point dialog box. In the Pitch box. 2. a value of 2 is entered. the center of the highlighted arc is selected for the base point. Click Define Orientation. For this example. For this example. the Right Hand option is selected. For this example. a value of 1 is entered.5). type a value to define the separation distance between each turn.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 274 1. 7. In the Turn Direction group. 6. Note The value can be less than 1 to make a partial turn (such as 0. In the graphics window. For this example. click the Right Hand option for a helix that turns counterclockwise. In the Helix dialog box. Note If you do not select the Define Orientation option. 3. In the Radius box. type a value for the constant radius of the helix. 4. the red highlighted edge is selected. but it must be greater than 0 (zero). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . For this example. Choose Insert→Curve→Helix. select an existing edge that you want to use to define the orientation of the helical axis. a value of 3 is entered.

5). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . For this example. Create a helix with a law controlled radius 3 1 Enter Radius = 2 Right Hand This example shows how to create a helix with a law controlled radius. to close the Point dialog box. In the Pitch box. a value of 3 is entered. Click OK or Apply to create the helix. the Number of Turns box. Note The value can be less than 1 to make a partial turn (such as 0.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 275 9. Click OK. The helix is created with its base point on the specified arc center point. 4. 10. Number of Turns: Pitch: Radius Method: Turn Direction: b. Choose Insert→Curve→Helix. 3. In the Helix dialog box. type a value for the number of turns you want the helix to make about its axis. but it must be greater than 0 (zero). a value of 1 is entered. 1. type a value to define the separation distance between each turn. In the Radius Method group. 2. For this example. click the Use Law option.

7. type a value for the distance from the start point of the helix to the base point on the helical axis. . a value of 1 is entered. click the Right Hand option for a helix that turns counterclockwise. the Right Hand option is selected. in the Start Value box. In the Helix dialog box.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 276 5. In the End Value box. click the Linear option. a value of 2 is entered. 9. Click OK. In the Law Function dialog box. For this example. in the Turn Direction group. Click OK or Apply to create the helix. type a value for the distance from the end point of the helix to the helical axis. The helix is created in the default ZC direction on the WCS. In the Law Controlled dialog box. 8. or the Left Hand option for a helix that turns clockwise. 10. For this example. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 6. For this example.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 277 Number of Turns: Pitch: Radius Method: Turn Direction: 3 1 Use Law = Linear Start Value: 1 End Value: 2 Right Hand c. The value must be greater than 0 (zero). Helix dialog box Option Description Number of Lets you specify the number of turns the helix makes about the helical axis. 4 turn helix (right) Pitch Set the distance between turns of the helix along the helical axis. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . A value of 0. Turns A value of 1 is equal to one helical turn.5 is equal to half of a helical turn. The pitch must be greater than or equal to zero. 2 turn helix (left).

5 pitch helix (left). Angle Tolerance Radius Method Helix created with a linear law Enter Radius Specifies a value for a fixed radius of the helix in the Radius box. 0. The radius remains constant throughout the length of the helix. The default value is taken from the Distance Tolerance preference. Lower the value to decrease the deviation. Available only when you edit a helix.2 pitch helix (right) Distance Tolerance Available only when you edit a helix. The lower the value.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 278 0. Controls the deviation of the spline that composes the helix from that of a true theoretical helix (which has no deviation). the higher is the number of control vertices required to describe the spline. dialog box to let you select a law to control the radius of the helix. Selects the one of the methods to specify how the radius is defined. Controls the maximum allowable angle between normals at corresponding points along the helix. Use Law Opens the Law Function. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . A helix defined by a law can have a variable radius.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 279 Helix created with a constant radius Turn Direction Lets you specify the direction of the turns around the helical axis. end value: 5). The base point for both helixes is along the XC axis. Creates a helix in a user-defined orientation and location. as shown in the bottom part of the following figure. as shown in the top part of the following figure. and were created using a pitch of 0 (zero). Left Hand turn direction Note The example helixes shown here are 2D. Define Orientation If you do not use this option. Right Hand turn direction Left Hand The helix starts at the base point and curls to the left (clockwise). with the Radius Method set to Use Law – Linear Law (start value: 0. the positive ZC direction is used for the direction. Right Hand The helix starts at the base point and curls to the right (counterclockwise).5.

and Z components. the copied law curve will not update correctly. and Z Components Law Curve uses a combination of X. Otherwise. You can use Information→ Object to display nonparametric or feature information about a law spline. YC=0. Note     A law curve is approximated according to the Distance Tolerance and Angle Tolerance set in the Modeling Preferences dialog.. 10. Controlling the Orientation of Law Curves There are two ways you can control the orientation of a law curve. Using the Law Subfunction. an X component may be a linear law. you must use a combination of the these options (that is. results in a curve in the ZC-YC plane at X=100). Law Curve Creates a spline using the Law Subfunction. A law spline is defined by a set of X. as explained below. a Z component defined by a constant law with a value equal to zero. an X component with a constant law value equal to 100.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 280 Displays the Point dialog box to let you define the base point for the helix orientation. and the Z component may be a constant law). Point Constructor If you do not use this option. To create a law curve: 1. (Optional) Control the orientation of the spline by either defining an orientation and/or base point. By combining different options. If you edit a law curve using Edit→ Transform→ Scale or Point Fit. You must select a law type for each component using Law Subfunction options. choose and define a law option for each of the X. Y. You must specify a law for each of these three components. a. or specifying a reference coordinate system. the base point is the current XC=0. For all law splines. you must select Reuse Original when you paste it from the Paste Feature dialog box. You can define both two-dimensional and three-dimensional law splines. For example. Y and Z components to define a law spline.e. Y and Z components. and ZC=0. a two-dimensional law spline requires that one plane has a constant value (i. Similarly. results in a curve in the XC-YC plane at Z=0. When you copy a law curve that was created using the By Equation law subfunction. Define Orientation drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Choose OK or Apply to create the curve. 3. the spline's creation parameters are removed. Any law curve that is to be greater than 360 degrees must be constructed using either the Helix command or the By Equation law subfunction. Y. X. 2. a Y component may be an equation law. you can control the mathematical characteristics of each component and the spline.

2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 281 The Define Orientation option lets you control the orientation of the spline by specifying a local Z-axis and point. Y. then choose Specify Csys Reference on the Create Coordinate System dialog and follow this procedure (as illustrated in the figure below): 1. The datum planes and axes for the reference coordinate system must be created before you create the spline. Note If you select any plane of a Datum CSYS. Select a third datum plane or a datum axis to establish the Origin Reference. The local Z-axis is normal to this plane. the current XC=0. If you select an axis. The cross product of the Z-axis with the X-axis defines the local Y-axis. similar to using the Z-Axis. specify the X. the origin is the intersection of the axis with the first selected plane. YC=0. and steps 2 and 3 are skipped. The advantage of this method is that. Select another datum plane as the Horizontal Reference. as shown by a conehead vector. 3. the spline changes accordingly. Coordinate System You can also control the orientation of the spline by specifying a coordinate system using three datum planes or two datum planes and a datum axis. and Z law. If you do not define an orientation. If the vector is pointing in the wrong direction. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . X-point option of the Coordinate System Tool. The local X-axis points along the intersection of the two planes. if you change the datum planes and/or axes (by altering the geometry they are associated with). as indicated by a conehead vector. and ZC=0 is used as a default base point. You can also define a base point using the Point Constructor option. then the entire Datum CSYS coordinate system is used for the Law Curve. If you do not define a base point. the current WCS is used. If you select a plane. Select a datum plane as the Placement Plane. choose Reverse Placement Normal. choose Reverse Horizontal Reference. To use a coordinate system. the origin of the reference coordinate system is the intersection of the three planes. If the vector is pointing in the wrong direction.

where the X and Y components consist of equations that create a circle and the Z component is determined by a law curve. Examples of Law Curves The example in the figure below shows a spline created using the Law Curve option. which creates a smooth transition in Z as the equations create the circular shape in X and Y. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . A simple sketch was used to define the law curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 282 Note If you delete any datum plane or axis that defines a local coordinate system for a spline. the spline is deleted. which consists of two lines and two fillets.

The last figure shows an example of a simple parabola. The Z components are constant laws with a value of 0 (results in a planar curve in the XC-YC plane) and the Y components are equation laws. which defines the parameter space of the function. The next figure shows two splines. It varies from 0 to 1.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 283 Note The required expressions must be created before you create the spline. The X component of the dashed line is a cubic law from 0 to 1. The X component is a linear law from 0 to 1. The Y and Z component are the same for both splines. The Z component is a constant law with a value of 0 (results in a planar curve in the XC-YC plane) and the Y component is an equation law. The X component of the solid line is a linear law from 0 to 1. The "t" variable is an internal system variable that is required with By Equation laws. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

the spline does not necessarily pass through the points. All splines created in NX are Non Uniform Rational B-splines (NURBS). In this section. except at the endpoints.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 284 11. Note The Spline option is available from both the Create Curve dialog and the Sketch Tools dialog. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The spline passes through a set of data points. but not pass through it. A specified tolerance is used in "fitting" the spline to its data points. There are four creation methods for splines: By Poles Through Points Fit Perpendicular to Planes Causes the spline to gravitate towards each data point (that is. pole). Common Concepts The figure below shows three of the spline creation methods. the terms "B-spline" and "spline" are used interchangeably. The spline passes through and is perpendicular to each plane in a set. Spline You can create splines using one of several methods.

The chain then moves on and selects the point closest to that point.) Point Chain Methods All of the chain methods build a string of points based on the selected objects. Let you indicate points to form a rectangle. and curvatures that describe its shape. Lets you use the Point Constructor to define the spline points. You then must specify the first and last points. For example. then the point closest to that point. This lets you create splines with an unlimited number of points. You then must specify the first and last points. The system begins the chain by searching the set of points for the one closest to the start point. Defining Data A spline is created using either defining data or poles. Point Specification Methods With Through Points and Fit. You specify which points are to be considered for the chain. since each segment is limited to a maximum of 25 points. All points within the rectangle are selected. Specifying Points from a File For splines created with By Poles. the spline passes through them within a specified tolerance. the curve passes exactly through all of the defining points. Spline Type Point File Type Through Points Series of Points with Slope and Curvature By Poles Series of Points Fit Series of Points Segments (Curve Type) Splines are created in one or more segments. the Fit option only allows slopes to be assigned to the endpoints. It is possible that some of the original set of points will not be included in the chain if they were not one of the "next closest points" before the end point was found. you must first choose a point specification method in order to specify the points that will define the spline: Chain From All Chain Within Rectangle Chain Within Polygon Point Constructor Points From File Lets you specify the start and end points. For the other points. When you use the Fit method. The points chosen for the chain are marked with an asterisk in the system color. The table below shows which type of point file should be used for each spline type. and so on until the point selected as the end point is found to be the next closest point. All points within the shape you have created are selected. It also appears on the Create Spline Through Points and Create Spline By Poles dialogs. Slopes can be assigned to any point that the curve passes through exactly. The minimum number of points drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 285 This section discusses concepts that are common to several Spline options. For this reason. you can also choose the Points From File option and specify the points using a point file. However. Lets you specify a point file to use. (This option appears on this dialog only for Fit. then selects all the points in between. Let you indicate points to form a polygon. slopes. Defining data includes the points. when you use the Through Points method. Through Points and Fit. the curve only passes exactly through the endpoints. most are common only to By Poles and Through Points.

we recommend the use of cubics (a degree of 3) when creating splines. display. 4. 5). and tend to follow their poles much more closely. splines are open . Higher degree curves are more likely to contain undesirable oscillations. Closed and Open Splines In general. and they reduce the chance of transferring data to other systems which may not support them. We do not recommend that you use a degree of one (1). This option is only available for multiple segment splines. Note When you create a closed spline. For this reason. A higher degree curve is stiffer in the sense that you have to move its poles a long way to produce any appreciable change in the shape of the curve. Note The Curve Degree option is not available if you make the curve type Single Segment. Lower degree curves are more pliable.the spline is closed automatically. However. As explained above.they start at one point and end at another.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 286 required for all splines is one more than the degree of the spline. Curve Degree Every spline has a degree . Use the default degree of three (3) unless you have some good reason for doing otherwise. which start and end at the same point. and all splines are limited to a degree of 24. Closed splines. can be created by choosing the Closed Curve option. since this produces curves with corners that may not work in downstream applications. The degree is generally one less than the number of points in a spline segment. Creating lower degree curves results in faster performance during subsequent operations such as machining.a mathematical concept referring to the degree of the polynomial that defines the curve. you do not specify the first point as the last point . the degree of a NX spline must be between 1 and 24. you cannot have a spline with less points than the degree. Curve Analysis Display drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . A Single Segment spline is a Bezier curve. a Multiple Segment spline is a B-spline (the divisions between spline segments are not visible). The degree of a single segment curve is dependent on the number of its specified points. You should use lower degree curves whenever possible (3. etc.

etc. color. line font. color. By Poles The data points that you specify for a By Poles spline are called the poles or control points of the curve. layer. and their minimum or maximum values in the U direction. the weight and coordinates of each pole. number of segments.) plus some spline specific information such as degree. their maximum length. such as the number of teeth. and the spline's polynomial/rational status. The Complete listing option adds the continuity and coordinates of each knot point. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . tolerance. See Curve Analysis in the NX Analysis help for details. Analysis→Curve allows you more control of some of the Curve Analysis Display parameters. Information Options You can use the Information options described below if you want a more comprehensive analysis of your spline. Information→ Spline provides the same spline specific information as Information→ Object. Information→ Object provides basic object information (layer. except at the endpoints. number of each continuity type of knot points. and/or the number of segments) for each defining point. The spline gravitates towards each of its poles. weight. To control other display parameters (for example. or Curve Analysis Display).[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 287 You can display curve analysis information for any curve or spline using the Curve Analysis tools from the Analyze Shape Toolbar. use Edit→ Object Display. a. curvature. and additional information (which may include the coordinates. but usually does not pass through any of them. The figure below shows the differences in a spline's shape when the same data points are used for through points and as poles. or from Analysis→ Curve. number of poles.

follow this general procedure: 1. Curve Degree The degree is generally one less than the number of points in a spline segment.) Closed If this option is toggled ON. Curve The degree is generally one less than the number of points in a spline segment.e. 2. a slope constraint is automatically Curvatures applied. (It is a mathematical concept referring to the degree of the polynomial that defines the curve. Points Lets you specify a file containing data points that you wish to use for the spline. then choose OK. Create Spline By Poles Dialog Options Curve Type Splines can be created in one (Single Segment) or more (Multiple Segments) segments. and the spline's degree must be at least 3. the spline will be closed (i. the Create Spline Through Points dialog appears. You can also define slope and/or curvature at any or all of the points. Assign Slopes Lets you specify or edit the slope at any point.) Closed Curve If this option is toggled ON. Specify the points for the spline. Each segment is limited to 25 points. When you choose Through Points. When you choose By Poles. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .. it will start and end at the same point). File To create a Through Points spline. Each segment is limited to 25 points. This option also helps avoid unwanted undulations (reversals of curvature) in the curve. the specified points are interpreted as vertices of a control polygon. Using poles gives you much better control of the overall shape and character of the curve. Points From Lets you specify a file containing data points that you wish to use for the spline.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 288 If the spline is created using By Poles.. Set the parameters on the Create Spline Through Points dialog.e. it will start and end at the same Curve point). Assign Lets you assign the curvature of a point on the spline. using one of the point specification methods. the Create Spline By Poles dialog appears. Through Points A Through Points spline passes through a set of data points. Create Spline Through Points Dialog Options Curve Type Splines can be created in one (Single Segment) or more segments (Multiple Segments). the spline will be closed (i. From File b. (It is a Degree mathematical concept referring to the degree of the polynomial that defines the curve.

By Vectors draws a scaled vector from the minimum-distance point on the spline toward the defining point. (It appears in place of DXC when you choose the Angle slope method. Remove Removes the user-defined slope from the active point. DXC. 3. DYZ. and the Data current active point. By Markers puts special markers around the qualifying data points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .) Deviation Lets you evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. If none of the selected points have Slopes assigned slopes.This option calculates the slope internally for all points by making inferences from the data points specified. Vector to Point. 4. Defines the vector that specifies the slope when the slope method is Vector Component. curvatures. If the selected point has no assigned Slope slope. Slope Method Automatic Slope . The Assign Slopes dialog is displayed. For each qualifying defining point. Assign Slope Use Assign Slopes to specify or edit the slope at any point. Vector Component . Repeat these last two steps until all slopes have been specified. Direction to Point. Enter values to define a vector that specifies the slope (see the figure below). None is the default. Follow this procedure: 289 1. Assign Slope Dialog Options Slope The method that will be used to assign a slope to a selected point. this option redisplays all the specified points.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 3. Choose the Assign Slopes button. slopes. this button is unavailable. and DZC fields are available. Undo Available when editing a spline using the Change Slope option (choose Edit Curve and select the spline). Specify the correct parameter values and/or geometry for the slope method you selected. and Angle. Assign slopes and curvatures. Threshold Used with the By Vectors and By Markers options of the Deviation function (see above). or you can choose By Vectors or By Markers for a graphical display of the deviations whose minimum distance between spline and defining point exceeds the value entered in Threshold. then choose OK to create the spline. Click anywhere near a point . 2. the DXC. The length of the vector is determined by scaling the actual deviations. An "*" appears at the point and its number is displayed in the Status line. and DZC Angle Defines the value of the angle when the Slope Method is Angle. Redisplay After a refresh. then choose OK.When you choose this option. Choose one of the Slope Method options. Remove All Removes the user-defined slopes from all points. Slope of Curve. 5. Vector Component. this button is unavailable. Slope Methods are Method Automatic Slope. DYC.the closest point is selected. Notice that there is no selection ball on the cursor.

the following drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .This option works the same as the Vector to Point option. Note If you change the slope at a point whose curvature has already been assigned.This option matches the slope at the specified point to the slope at the endpoint of an existing curve. where you enter the desired slope angle (the DYC and DZC fields are unavailable). the magnitude) is not significant. The angle is specified relative to the work coordinate system. the distance between the two points (i. counterclockwise about the ZC axis.Use this option to define the slope at a point by specifying another point. a slope constraint is applied automatically.e. Removing the slope constraint at a point also removes any existing curvature constraint at that point.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 290 Direction to Point .When you choose this option. Slope of Curve . The existing curvature is always rotated so that the new slope and new curvature are always orthogonal. when you specify curvature at a point that does not have a specified slope. Angle . the magnitude of the vector) determines how strongly the slope affects the shape of the curve. using the Point Constructor. Otherwise. The vector between the two points defines the slope of the curve at that defining point. Otherwise.. Assign Curvatures There are some general rules that affect assigning curvature to the points on the spline:   Curvature constraints can only be applied to a point when slope constraint has also been specified. the DXC field changes to the Angle field. Vector to Point . The angle is measured from the XC axis in the XC-YC plane. Therefore. Note You can only change curvature on a spline whose degree is three or more. Note You can only apply slopes to a curve whose degree is greater than one. but not its magnitude. the following error message is displayed: Assigning Slopes Is Not Allowed On Degree 1 Splines Creating splines with a degree of one (1) is discouraged in any case. you can get an unexpected result where the curvature's direction changes. Also.e.. The only difference is that the distance between the points (i.

If the selected point has Remove no assigned curvature. Assign Curvatures Dialog Options The method. Curvature Removes user-defined curvature values from all points. You can use Assign Curvatures to specify or edit the curvature at any point. choose OK to select the other curve. Used with the By Vectors and By Markers options of the Deviation function (see above). or curvature values. this option is unavailable. Repeat these last two steps until all curvatures have been specified. Choose one of the Curvature Method options. Choose the Assign Curvatures button. Note If you use the Curvature of Curve option on a point that already has a defined slope. curvatures. For each qualifying defining point. Radius Lets you evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 3. this option is unavailable. this option redisplays all the specified points. The slope from the end of the other curve is also inherited. The length of the vector is determined by scaling the actual deviations. and the Redisplay current active point.With this option. An "x" appears at the point and its number is displayed in the Status line. tangents. you can match the curvature to the curvature at the endpoint of another curve.the closest point is selected. Click anywhere near a point . After you select this option and indicate at which point to apply the curvature constraint. Follow this procedure: 1. Curvatures After a refresh. then choose OK. Curvature Methods Curvature of Curve . By Markers puts special markers around the qualifying data points. 2. Specify the correct parameter values and/or geometry for the curvature method you selected. either Curvature of Curve or Enter Radius. Data Available when editing a spline using the Change Curvature option (choose Edit Curve Undo and select the spline). slopes. Method The radius used for the Enter Radius curvature method.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING error message is displayed: Assigning Curvature Is Not Allowed on Splines With Degree Less Than 3 291 If a spline is defined using points. Threshold Removes the user-defined curvature value from the active point. If none of the points have Remove All curvature assigned. The Assign Curvatures dialog is displayed. By Vectors draws a scaled vector from the minimum-distance point on the spline toward the defining point. None is the Deviation default. the slope inherited from the other curve overrides the existing slope value. 5. 4. or you can choose By Vectors or By Markers for a graphical display of the deviations whose minimum distance between spline and defining point exceeds the value entered in Threshold. this data is removed if you perform nonuniform scaling (under Edit→Transform→Scale). that will be used to assign a Curvature curvature to a selected point. Notice that there is no selection ball on the cursor.

c. resulting in more spline segments. This method only gives you indirect control over the allowable distance the spline may deviate from a data point. You can use fewer segments if the spline has a higher degree.1 mm. the definition is simplified. Note When importing a spline created by the Fit method from a part file which uses different units. The number of segments you should specify depends on the degree of the spline you want to create.Lets you specify the number of segments (in Segments) in the spline. you may define how the spline is created by choosing one of the following methods: By Tolerance . since it requires much less computation.When you choose this option. The system attempts to reduce the spline data while ensuring that the maximum distance from any raw data point to the spline to be created is less than the error value you specify. if you edit it the shape may change. and a warning message ("Negative radius is not allowed. By Template . This option is faster than the By Tolerance method. the absolute value is used. The Error value is the maximum distance from any data point to the created spline. 2. Although the shape of the curve is not changed after it is imported.1 inch tolerance in an inch part file. the best possible fit is made without adding any more knot points. Since you are not forcing the spline to pass exactly through the construction points. the tolerance value is not changed.Lets you select an existing spline as a template in which the degree and knot drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Note If you enter a negative value for the radius of curvature. then choose OK. select the data points for the spline. For example. To create a spline using the Fit method: 1. 3. the new curve will use a tolerance value of 0. if the spline was created using the By Tolerance method. the Radius field becomes available. Enter the desired radius of curvature. Using the absolute value") is displayed in the Status line.Lets you specify the maximum allowable distance (in Tolerance) that the spline may deviate from a data point. Using one of the displayed point specification methods. Choose OK. A tighter tolerance causes the spline to be closer to the data points. if a spline was created using a 0. given the number of segments. Create Spline By Fit Dialog Options Fit Method After you have specified the data points and the Create Spline by Fit dialog displays. the shape of the data. By Segments .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 292 Enter Radius . Fit You can create a spline by "fitting" it to the construction points with a specified tolerance. A general rule of thumb is that you need one segment for every time the slope varies as much as 90 degrees. Once you have the data points you can specify the creation parameters as needed from the Create Spline By Fit dialog. and the degree of tolerance that you are trying to achieve. This method reduces the amount of data needed to define the spline. and you import it into a millimeter part file. With this method.

due to the least squares computation. The fitting curves created with the By Template option can be used whenever you want fitted curves to have the same degree and same knot sequence. Opens the Assign Slope dialog to let you specify or edit the slope at an endpoint. The error values define the distances that the spline deviates from the data points.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 293 sequence are used in the fit process. (It is a mathematical concept referring to the degree of the polynomial that defines the curve. Only the end slopes of splines created using the Fit method are definable. A diamond is displayed in a color other than the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Change Weights . Lets you control the shape of the spline by changing the weight factor of any of the data points. a fitted spline in which the degree and knot sequence are the same as the template spline is created.) Controls how closely the points must conform to the data points. The larger the weight value. and then change its' weight value from the displayed default. Then. The value for the weight of a selected point must be greater than zero. Information Display Once the spline is created. you are prompted to select a template spline. First use the By Template option to refit all of your splines from which the surface is to be constructed. Note Splines created using the Fit method are not supported for nonuniform scaling under Edit→ Transform→ Scale. When you have finished assigning weight values to points click OK to return to the Create Spline by Fit dialog. although there is no guarantee that the curve will pass through the point. or Sweep along three guides with zero tolerance. After selecting a template spline and clicking OK. and then apply the surface construction function to these refitted splines. the closer the curve will come to that point. Thru Curves. Curve Degree Tolerance Segments Assign End Slopes The degree is generally one less than the number of points in a spline segment. You cannot assign a slope value to an interior point. the number of patches in the surface are reduced. then you should change the Tolerance value instead of using the Change Weights option. You can successively select points and assign weight values to each. You are prompted to select a point. When creating a fitted spline you can specify a tolerance for how closely the spline must come to the points. Weight values are used directly as entered into the system. and are not proportionally converted to anything else. Note You can use the By Template option any time you need to create a freeform surface using either Ruled Surfaces. After invoking the Create Spline by Fit dialog when creating or editing a spline and choosing this method. average and maximum error values display. and you don't want the resulting surface to have an enormous amount of patches. Note The default weights are such that sparsely located points are weighted more heavily than densely located points. The number of segments in the spline. If you are concerned about the deviation of the spline from those points. such as coordinates or vectors. You can flip a specified slope by 180 degrees because the direction of the end slopes are limited by the natural shape of the curve. when constructing surfaces from these curves. This prevents the curves from having sharp bends.

d. If the displayed error data is unacceptable. and circular arcs between nonparallel planes. Perpendicular to Planes With Perpendicular to Planes. The figure below shows how the radius of one circular segment is determined. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . many methods can be used to create the planes in a set. you may back up and recreate the spline. The difference becomes obvious if you specify a relatively loose tolerance followed by only a few iterations of the Fit process. you can create a spline which passes through and is perpendicular to each plane in a set. As this figure shows.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 294 system color over the data point that is farthest away from its intended position on the spline (maximum error). The control polygon is displayed in the system color. The figure below is a spline created with the Perpendicular to Planes option. The spline segments are linear between parallel planes. The maximum number of planes allowed in each set is 100. Note The error values that display are not the same as those you would get with functions such as the Deviation Gauge. the error reported by Fit will be greater than the deviation reported by the Deviation Gauge. The center of each circular segment is the intersection of its bounding planes. Generally.

If it is not parallel to the starting plane. Select the next plane. 3. Because planes are infinite. Note Reselecting the starting plane as the last plane in the set will not necessarily create a closed spline. Select the remaining planes. 2. Select the starting plane. Point is not on starting plane The following message appears if you select the same plane consecutively.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING To create a Perpendicular to Planes spline: 295 1. Define the start point of the spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can select the start point or use the Point Constructor. Choose OK to create the spline. Error Messages If the start point you selected is not on the starting plane. The figure below illustrates this principle. (A conehead vector shows the default direction. a dialog asks you to choose the curve's direction.) Plane selected is identical to previous 12. 5. the spline is created only to the nearest intersection with the selected plane.) 4. (Selecting the same plane more than once is allowed. You can assign curvature constraints at specified defining points or to end poles. though. Studio Spline Use the Studio Spline command to interactively create an associative or non-associative spline. the following message appears. as long as you do not select it consecutively.   You can create splines by dragging defining points or poles.

Create a Studio Spline This example shows how to create a Studio Spline through points by defining tangency curvature constraints to the grey rectangle construction lines. 1. Click Studio Spline 2. select Through Points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 296 Studio Splines Using Through Points and By Poles Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Curve→Studio Spline Insert→Curve→Studio Spline a. From the Type list.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 8. Select Mid Point for the second point. Select the End Point of the last line as the tangent for the studio spline. Choose G3 for the curvature constraint. 6. 297 In the graphics window. Choose G2 for the curvature constraint. Choose G3 for the curvature constraint. 4.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 3. select the End Point of the first line that the studio spline will be tangent with. 7. 5.

Insert pole handles drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . A new point handle is inserted on the spline at the cursor position. You can edit:    Associative studio splines Non-associative studio splines Non Uniform Rational B-splines Defining Point Handles Defining Pole Handles connected by a control polygon Insert point handles  To insert a new defining point handle on a spline. Modify a Studio Spline You can double-click a studio spline in the graphics window to edit its defining points or poles. 298 To change a constraint before the studio spline is created. Click OK. 10. click on a segment of the spline.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 9. b. clear the check boxes for Infer G1 and Infer G2. Associative studio splines are also listed as features in the Part Navigator.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

299

To insert a new pole handle on a spline, position the cursor over an existing pole and do one of the following: o Right-click and choose Insert Pole - Previous o Right-click and choose Insert Pole - Next

Move point or pole handles

Note The movement of point and poles works in conjunction with the settings in the Movement group of the Studio Spline dialog box.

View is the default movement direction. Tip When using View movement mode, press the Shift key while dragging points or poles to limit movement to the vertical or horizontal of the screen.

If necessary, specify a different movement direction in the dialog box before moving poles or points.

To move one or more points or poles, do one of the following:
 

Drag the point or pole handles to a new point or screen position. Click the point or pole handle and enter a new X, Y, or Z value in the on-screen coordinate input boxes. Note The handles remain selected until you deselect them by pressing Shift and clicking.

Click the middle mouse button or OK when editing is complete to modify the spline.

Delete point and pole handles

With the cursor over a point or pole handle, right-click and choose Delete Point or Delete Pole.
 

Note

You can make a non-associative spline associative using the Make Associative option, but you cannot make an associative spline non-associative by clearing the Associative option. You can switch between Through Points and By Poles spline types. o When you switch from Through Points to By Poles, the through points and any internal constraints are deleted. o Only the start and end constraints are retained.

c. Manipulate constraint handles to define curvature You can display constraint handles and use these handles to define the curvature of points and end poles. To display and edit the constraint handles: 1. Double-click a spline to open the Studio Spline dialog box. 2. Right-click on a point or end pole and choose Specify Constraint. The constraint handles for that defining point or end pole are displayed. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 3. Add the constraints.

300

Tangent Direction G1 handle  To change the tangent direction constraint, rotate this handle.  To assign tangency direction from another curve, select this handle and then click on the curve point whose tangency you want to adopt. Curvature G2 handle  To change the curvature constraint, drag this handle.  To assign a curvature constraint from another curve, select this handle and then click on the curve point whose curvature you want to adopt. Tangent G1 Magnitude handle  To change the tangent magnitude constraint, drag this handle. Note
 

To delete the curvature constraint, right-click on handle and choose Delete. To disable the display of a constraint handle, right-click on a point or end pole and clear the Specify Constraint check box.

d. Studio Spline dialog box Type Specifies the type of spline to be created. The spline is either associative or non-associative to the parent features, depending on whether you select or clear the Associative check box in the Settings group. Lets you create a spline by extending a curve through defining points.

Through Points

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Lets you create a spline by constructing and manipulating spline poles.

301

By Poles

Note While creating a spline, you can switch back and forth between the Through Points and By Poles options. When switching from Through Points to By Poles, the through points and any internal constraints are deleted. Only start and end constraints are kept. Point Location / Pole Location Defines spline point or pole locations on the specified Drawing Plane. When referencing existing geometry, you can define G1, G2 and G3 constraints for the first spline point immediately after you specify the point.

Specify Points / Specify Poles

Constraints None The point or pole has no constraint. If a point or pole has a constraint and None is used, any constraint on the point or pole will be deleted. G1 (Tangent) Continuity Type Applies a tangent constraint on a selected spline point. Specify a magnitude factor for this constraint in the G1 Magnitude box. G2 (Curvature) Applies a curvature constraint on a selected spline point. Specify a radius for this constraint in the G2 Radius box.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING G3 (Flow) Applies a flow constraint on a selected spline point. Symmetric Modeling Makes one end point symmetric to a specified direction.

302

With this type of constraint, the spline can be mirrored later on and it will be continuous to its copy

Changes the Continuity Type to G1 if the current value is None, G2 or G3. Specify Tangent

Reverse Tangent Direction

Available when Continuity Type is set to G1, G2 or G3.

Available when a point or a node has a G0 constraint or is attached to another object. Iso-parametric Inferred Type Limits constraints to the U and V directions of a surface. Sectional
 

For a Through Points spline, this option is available on all locations. For a By Poles spline, this option is available only on start and end poles. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

303 Available when constraining to surface geometry.

Allows constraints to be aligned with any direction. Normal Infers a constraint based on the natural normal of a curve. Only the G1 constraint is available.

Perpendicular to Curve or Edge Infers G1, G2, and G3 constraints from the parent of the points attachment object, such as a curve on surface or edge.

Available when a point or node has a G0 constraint or is attached to an edge or a surface spline created using the Curve on Surface command. Constrain to Attachment Derives the constraints from the parent of the attachment object of the point. Parent When this check box is not selected, the spline does not inherit constraints from the object to which it is attached. Controls the orientation of an inferred G1 constraint. Fix Tangent Orientation When a tangent constraint is assigned at a point, the best possible direction is chosen in order to minimize spline shape change. When this check box is selected, the movement of the constrained point relative to the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

304

neighboring points does not affect the orientation, and the direction remains static. When the check box is not selected, the movement of the constrained point relative to the neighboring points may change the orientation. Lists the defining points of the spline and their constraint conditions in a table format. If you pause your cursor over one of the constraint cells, the constraint condition is explained. Example List

The G0 constraint on point 2 states Point Parent: Spline in the balloon. Click on a row in the list to edit the respective constraint detail parameters. Parameterization Specifies the degree for the spline.

A low degree 2 point spline may result in multiple segments, depending on the constraints applied.
o

Degree

Example If you have a spline with a degree of 5 and curvature constraints at both ends and you lower the degree to 3, then two knots are added to maintain the curvature constraints.
 

The spline cannot have fewer poles than the degree. This option is not available when Single Segment is selected.

Matched Knot Position

Available when Type is set to Through Points. Places knots only where you locate defining points. Available when Type is set to By Poles.

Single Segment

Creates a spline preview when at least two poles have been specified.
 

The spline degree is one less than the total number of poles. The higher the number of poles, the greater the degree of the spline.

Closed

Lets you specify that the start and end of the spline are at the same point, forming a closed loop.

Drawing Plane Specifies a plane on which to create and constrain the spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Lets you constrain the drawing plane to the X-Y plane of the CSYS.

305

During spline specification, selected objects that are not on the X-Y plane of the CSYS will be projected onto it. Constrained to Plane When this check box is not selected, you can constrain the drawing plane to one of the other available planes. If you want to constrain the drawing plane to a plane you specify, then click General and use the available plane options. Movement Moves spline points and poles in a specified direction or along a specified plane. Moves points or poles in a specified X, Y or Z direction of the work coordinate system or along one of the principal planes of the WCS. WCS XC YC-ZC YC XC-ZC ZC XC-YC

Moves poles or points in relation to the view plane. View Tip Press and hold the Shift key while dragging points or poles to limit movement to the vertical or horizontal directions of the viewing screen. Vector – Lets you define a direction in which to move the selected poles or polylines. You can select a line, a datum axis, an OrientXpress vector, or use the Specify Vector options to define the direction. Vector
 

NX moves the points or poles in a direction parallel to the vector you specify. Snapping is active. If the object to snap to does not lie in the drag path of the pole, projected snapping is used.

Plane – Select a datum plane, datum CSYS or use Specify Plane to define a plane in which to move the selected poles or polylines. Plane
 

NX moves the points or poles in a direction parallel to the plane you specify. Snapping is active. If the object to snap to does not lie in the drag path of the pole, projected snapping is used.

Moves the points or poles along the curve normal direction. Normal
 

Snap Point options are available when you drag a pole/point. NX honors the translation direction you specify and uses a minimum snapping distance, if the target snap object does not lie in the translation path.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Available when Type is set to By Poles. Lets you drag a selected pole along one of the polyline segments of the pole.

306

Polygon

Polygon Movement – vector handle selected Extension Extends or shortens the spline. Extension does not change the defined end points of the spline. The extension can be changed during edit. Develops a symmetric extension on both the specified start and end of the selected spline.

Positive value

Symmetric Negative value

  

None – Does not create an extension. By Value – Lets you specify a value for the extension. By Point– Lets you define a location for the extent of an extension.

When this check box is not selected, you can specify unique Start and End extension values. Settings Proportional Lets you specify how a spline I updated when a parent of a constraint is modified. Update drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING

307

All the points or poles between the updated point and the next fixed point are moved proportionally. Example

End point of the vertical line is a defining point of the spline.

When the line is moved, the unconstrained points update proportionally in relation to the next constrained points.

When this check box is not selected, only the point of the updated constraint is moved. The surrounding defining points maintain their positions. Example

Associative

Makes the spline associative, and parametrically related to parent features. An associative spline creates a spline feature. Available when editing a non-associative spline. Associates the defining points of the non-associative spline to existing geometry.

Make Associative

If the non-associative spline has defining data, and its poles are in sync with that data, a new, associative Through Points spline is created. Otherwise, it becomes an associative By Poles spline. When this check box is not selected, the spline being edited remains non-associative. Available when the Make Associative check box is selected.

Input Curve Specifies what happens to the original spline when you edit a non-associative spline. Infer Preferences Inferred Type

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日

When this check box is not selected. this option is available on all locations. Lets you specify an incremental value by which to move a selected point or pole. Sectional Allows constraints aligned with any direction. Fix Tangent Orientation Controls the orientation of an inferred G1 constraint. the movement of the constrained point relative to the neighboring points may change the orientation. Step Value  Click the plus button the WCS orientation. the movement of the constrained point relative to the neighboring points does not affect the orientation.    308 For a Through Points spline.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Iso-parametric Limits constraints to the U and V directions of a surface. G2. Tip Hold the Ctrl key to momentarily activate Micro Positioning while dragging a point or pole. Allows constraints to be aligned with any direction. This option is useful for fine curve point editing. Lower values produce finer point movement. Rate   Specify a value between 0. this option is available only on start and end poles. For a By Poles spline. Micro Positioning Sets the relative amount by which a point or pole is moved when you drag its handle. When this check box is selected. When a tangent constraint is assigned at a point. or G3 constraints from the parent of the points attachment object such as an edge or a surface spline created using the Curve on Surface command. Available when constraining to surface geometry. and the direction remains static. Perpendicular to Curve or Edge Infers G1. Only the G1 constraint is available. Normal Infers a constraint based on the natural normal of a curve or surface. to move the step value in a positive direction based upon drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . the best possible direction is chosen in order to minimize spline shape change.01% and 100%.

curves. 13. and you can control the accuracy and shape of the fit by specifying:    Degrees and segments Degrees and tolerance A template curve In the Shape Studio application. accelerated access to companion tools like Deviation Gauge help you assess the accuracy and shape of the Fit Spline. or on faceted bodies. we'll accept the default Degree and Segments. Click Fit Spline on the Curve toolbar. 2. The data points can reside in a set of chained points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . This example shows a fit spline on a faceted body: Where do I find it? Application Modeling. Create a Fit Spline Shape Studio→Curve Drop-down→Fit Spline Insert→Curve→Fit Spline 1. or faces. Shape Studio Curve→Fit Spline Toolbar Menu a. Specify a fit Type that's appropriate for your part. For this example.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING   309 Click the negative button to move the step value in a negative direction. This option is most useful when you move the point or pole by a small distance. or to a known distance. You can set endpoint and inner continuity constraints. Fit Spline Use the Fit Spline command to create a spline by fitting it to specified data points.

b. previews the Fit Spline. 4. To set an endpoint constraint. we'll select Chain From All. If you use the default Infer method. Select the first and last target points. click MB3 on the graphics window handle and select Specify Constraint. Fit Spline handles are the same as Studio Spline handles: 8. (Optional) Use the Selection Step 1 drop-down to choose a target selection method. MB3 menu options are: o o o o Specify Constraint Delete Point Delete G0 Show All Points 7.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 310 3. Fit Spline Dialog Options Fit Spline Options drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Specify the number of Degrees and Segments for the new Fit Spline. Note that you must specify start and endpoint constraints before you can add inner constraints. For this example. NX adds intervening points to the set using a next-nearest point algorithm. NX infers the entity type from the first object you select. 5. and advances automatically to the Constraints step. 6. Click OK to create the Fit Spline.

Select Template Curve – Lets you select a template curve that defines the degrees and segments of the Fit Spline.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Type 311 Degree and Segments – Choose this option if you want to control the number of degrees and segments in the spline exactly. Keep Template Curve Selected – Select this option if you want to keep the template curve selected after pressing Apply. Face – Lets you limit your selection target to a face. Use this option when you want to create a set of curves with the same parameterization for input to a loft operation. NX will not violate those constraints in order to meet the tolerance target. Selection Steps Infer – NX infers the entity type automatically from the geometry you select. using as many non-uniform segments as necessary to reach the tolerance. Point Constructor – Lets you use the Point Constructor to create target points when those points do not already exist in your part. NX selects all the points in between. Degree and Segments – Specify the number of degrees and segments. Points – From File – Lets you read point coordinates from an external file. Degree and Tolerance – Specify the number of degrees and a tolerance. NX fits the spline to Fitting Parameters the target as closely as possible using the values you provide. Curve – Lets you limit your selection target to a curve. Chain from All – After you specify the start and end points. NX displays a warning if it cannot achieve the tolerance. NX fits a spline of the specified degree. NX activates this option automatically when you choose the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Points – Crayon Tool – Lets you use the crayon tool to draw a line around the target points for the new spline. Degree and Tolerance – Choose this option if you want to control the number of degrees in the spline exactly. Uniform Segments – Select this option if you want NX to distribute knots uniformly along the spline. Faceted Body – Lets you limit your selection target to a faceted body. If you specify start and/or end constraints. and achieve a specified tolerance as closely as possible. Template Curve – Choose this option if you want to fit a spline using the degrees and parameterization of an existing curve.

Specify character attributes (bold. Press Apply to save your changes and reset the Fit Spline dialog. 14.    Select any font in your Windows font library. Text traces the shape of selected True Type fonts and uses lines and splines to produce character outlines of a text string. The following graphic shows how text created on a plane can be extruded. Once you have specified endpoint constraints. Constraints – Lets you specify endpoint and inner constraints using graphics window handles. type a text string in the Text dialog box. Convert the string to a geometry component within your NX part model. Curvature 3. type. Note that you must specify start and endpoint constraints before you can add inner constraints. you can add inner G0 constraints.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 312 Template Curve type. Tangent Magnitude Edit Spline Fitting Errors – Lets you reselect a spline for additional editing. This method fits a spline as closely as possible to the target using the degree and parameterization of the template curve. Text Use the Text command to generate NX curves from the True Type fonts in your native Windows font library. Tangent Direction 2. NX displays the maximum and average deviation between the new fit spline and the target data points. Use this function whenever text is required as a design element in your part models. In preview mode. curves. italic. placing the resulting geometry on a plane. Modifying text/curve geometry drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . alphabet). Fit Spline handles are the same as Studio Spline handles: 1. or surfaces.

Use left. Constraining text geometry onto a surface Before you apply the outline. you can use the handles on the temporary text geometry to modify its shape and location. Define a horizontal direction for the geometry on a surface. and center alignment to define the pivot point of the geometry. Project the geometry normal to a surface. for example you can:     Select a curve or a chain of tangential smooth curves for the geometry to follow. you can:     Use interactive handles to define the placement plane. Stretch the geometry to change the apparent aspect ratio of the "fonts". Making text a string expression Text can be designated as a text string expression by selecting from a list of existing string expressions or by interactively defining a new string expression at time of text creation. Control an offset distance of the baseline from a curve. Project the geometry from a local plane onto a surface. Modifying the shape Before you apply the outline. Where do I find it? drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Define the location of characters along a curve. Once you place the text you can wrap or project it onto the surface using the Wrap/Unwrap Curve or Project Curve functions. you can align the geometry to follow a curve. you can modify its shape. Use the handles to further manipulate the geometry and position it as desired. Use Snap Point to snap the geometry's baseline point-to-point. for example. Place the geometry on a Datum Plane or Planar Face. you can select a surface and a curve on the surface to constrain the text to that surface. for example. Aligning geometry to conform to a curve Before you apply the outline. Perform shear operations on the geometry. You can:      Use non-planar faces to define a local plane for the geometry.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 313 Before you apply the geometry to complete the conversion. right. Defining the placement face Before you apply the outline. Flip the starting direction. Define a location for the geometry on a surface. you can:    Change the character size by stretching the geometry in any direction. you can define the plane to place it on.

This check box is selected by default. Select the required font style from the Font Style list. 4. Height. o Select the Use Kerning Spaces check box to increase or decrease the distance between characters. click and drag the handles to change the text parameters. After you select a location. 5. Specify the location on the plane where you want to place the text. or on the Curve toolbar click Text box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . (Optional) You can do the following to get the desired results: o Place the cursor on a handle. select Planar. 8. W-Scale. 2. Choose Insert→Curve→Text. the preview appears with handles. o Clear the Associative check box to create non-associative text curves. Create planar text 1. o Select the Anchor Location for the text frame from the list. In the first box under Text Properties. Select the required font from the Font list. click Text . 3. This check box is selected by default. o Type values for the Length.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING   314 Choose Insert→Curve→Text. to open the Text dialog An outline of the text follows the cursor until you click to specify a point. and Shearing parameters. 6. Select the required script from the Script list. This includes geometry transformations. type the text string you want to convert to a curve. o Clear the Join Curves check box to create curves which are not joined to form a single spline. 7. Partial feature editing is supported on non-Windows systems. o Select the Create Bounding Box Curves check box to add a bounding box around the text. o Double-click the conehead to switch the direction of the text. From the Type list. On the Curve toolbar. Note The Text command is available only on the Windows platform. a. but text string and font information cannot be edited.

2. Choose Insert→Curve→Text. In the first box under Text Properties. 5. From the Type list. use the Specify Vector options to specify the vector. 4. 3. Click Reverse Direction to reverse the direction of the specified vector. The following graphic shows the ZC-axis selected as the vector for the Vector type orientation method. type the text string you want to convert to a curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . select On Curve to create text along a curve or a connected string. For the Vector type orientation method. or on the Curve toolbar click Text to open the Text dialog box. Click OK or Apply to create planar text. Select Curve is active. b.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 315 9. Create text along a curve 1. Specify the vertical orientation method for the text. Select the curve on which to place the text.

(Optional) You can do the following to get the desired results: o Place the cursor on a handle. o Clear the Associative check box to create non-associative text curves. W-Scale. o Select the Use Kerning Spaces check box to increase or decrease the distance between characters. 10. Select the required script from the Script list. 9. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Click OK or Apply to create the text geometry.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 316 6. o Select the Anchor Location for the text frame from the list. click and drag the handles to change the text parameters. Select the required font from the Font list. o Type values for the Length. This check box is selected by default. o Double-click the conehead to switch the direction of the text. Select the required font style from the Font Style list. Height. 8. and Shearing parameters. o Clear the Join Curves check box to create curves which are not joined to form a single spline. This check box is selected by default. 7.

From the Type list. do one of the following: For the Curves on Faces type — Use Select Curve to select the curves on the face for the location of the text. Select the placement method for the location of the text. select the type as On Face. Select the text placement face. type the text string you want to convert to a curve. o For the Section Plane type — Use the Specify Plane options to specify the plane for the location of the text. In the first box under Text Properties. 4. Create text on face 1. Choose Insert→Curve→Text. Depending on the type of placement method. to open the Text dialog is active. 2. or on the Curve toolbar click Text box. Select Object 3. 5.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 317 c. o drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

o Clear the Join Curves check box to create text curves which are not joined to form a single spline. 9. This check box is selected by default. (Optional) You can do the following to get the desired results: o Select the Use Kerning Spaces check box to increase or decrease the kerning spaces between the characters. 10. 8. click and drag to change the text parameters. 7. to change the direction of the text. o Place the cursor on a handle or arrow.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 318 6. o Select the Project Curves check box to project the text curves on the parent faces in the normal direction. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Click OK or Apply to create text on the face. Select the required script from the Script list. Select the required font style from the Font Style list. This check box is selected by default. o Double-click the conehead. Select the required font from the Font list. o Clear the Associative check box to create non-associative text curves.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING d. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 2. select Planar from the list. 4. click Text . Specify the location for the text. enter your text. 1. In the Type group. 3. In the Text Properties group. Create text as an expression 319 Having textual information as associative string expressions provides a way to automate revisions and changes to text applied to a part. On the Curve toolbar.

click Select Expression 7. Choose another command or click Apply to perform the operation. On Curve — Lets you create text along a connected curve string. It will be saved with the model. d. Click the middle mouse button to exit the Expressions dialog box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . c. 8. b. In the Text dialog box. Text dialog box Type Lets you specify the text type. Select Curve Text Placement Face Appears only for the On Face type of text. If the curve is a straight line. Create the text expression. . Text Placement Curve Appears only for the On Curve type of text. Click the middle mouse button to exit the Relationships dialog box. e. click Create String Expression The text expression is listed in the Expressions dialog box. You can specify the required character direction. Each text character follows the curvature of a curved string. The Select Expression option becomes available. Select from the following options:   Type  Planar — Lets you create text on a plane.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 320 5. you must specify a character direction. a. Select the Reference Text check box. The text is now seen as reference text in expression form. (Optional) Edit the expression. 6. . Lets you select a curve for the text to follow. In the Relationships dialog box. On Face — Lets you create text on one or more connected faces.

Available only for the Vector type orientation method. Placement Method Curves on Faces — Text is placed as curves on the selected face. Lets you specify the placement method of the text. Orientation Method Natural — The text orientation is natural. Lets you specify the vertical orientation method of the text. Vector Constructor — Opens the Vector dialog box. Reverse Direction Reverses the direction of the selected vector. Available only for the Vector type orientation method. Specify Vector Inferred Vector — This is the default vector method. Select Face Vertical Orientation Appears only for the On Curve type of text. Location on Face Appears only for On Face type of text. Section Plane — Aligns the text on the face along an intersection curve by defining a section plane and generating an intersection curve. Available only for the Curve on Faces type of placement method. You can change the vector methods anytime and select new objects. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Select Curve Lets you select the curve for the Curves on Faces type placement method. Click to see available vector methods. Lets you specify the vector for the Vector type of vertical orientation method.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 321 Lets you select the connected faces to place the text. Vector — The text orientation is along a specified vector. and then select objects supported by that method.

Hebrew. This is available when the Reference Text check box is selected. Bold — Creates text of the Bold font attribute. Lets you select the Font Style. The top frame line approximates the text height. You can select from the following options:     Font Style Regular — Creates text of the Regular font attribute. Not all fonts have kerning data. Bold Italic — Creates text of the Bold Italic font attribute. but if you select a different font. Text Tip To enter a double quotation mark as text. Cyrillic). Italic — Creates text of the Italic font attribute. otherwise the geometry will consist of only the character outlines. When the check box is selected. Reference Text The Select Expression option also becomes available. Plane Constructor — Opens the Plane dialog box. the Relationships dialog box is displayed where you can then select an existing expression to associate with the text string or define a expression for a text string. any text generated is created as a text string expression. Text Frame Anchor Location Available only for the Planar text type. Script Lets you select an alphabet for the text string (For example Western. Lets you select a true type font available in the native Windows font library. Use Kerning Spaces Note Kerning reduces the gap between adjacent pairs of characters. and is possible only if the font in use has in built kerning data. The side frame lines represent the left-most and right-most boundaries of the outline curves. 322 Inferred — This is the default plane method. Lets you specify the plane for the Section Plane type of placement method. Select this check box to increase or decrease the kerning between characters. the preview reflects the font Font change.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Available only for the Section Plane type of placement method. You can change plane methods anytime and select new objects. Curves The frame is not a bounding box. Select Expression When Select Expression is clicked. The bottom frame Create Bounding Box line is the typographical baseline. Click to see available plane Specify Plane methods. Font samples are not shown. and then select objects supported by that method. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Select this check box to create a frame around the geometry when it is generated. Text Properties Lets you type a single line of text without line breaks. hold down the Shift key and press tilde (~) and double quote (―).

Select from the following options:          323 Top Left Top Center Top Right Middle Left Middle Center Middle Right Bottom Left Bottom Center Bottom Right Parameter (%) Specifies a value for the shearing parameter. Projects text curves on the parent faces on which text is placed. Text geometry is a combination of lines and cubic Bezier splines connected end to end. Sets the ratio of the user-specified width to the natural font width for a given font height to the value you specify. Click to see available point methods. Point Constructor — Opens the Point dialog box.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Specifies the anchor location of the text. Specifies a point on the selected plane to position the text geometry. Sets the value for the height of the text outline box to the value you specify. Available only for On Face text type. Project Curves Preview Use this option to see how the feature will look when you create it. Joins all the curves forming one loop into a single spline. Available only for the Planar text type. Show Result performs the actual computation and uses the currently assigned part shading colors for the display. Sets the value for the width of the text outline box to the value you specify. You can change plane methods anytime and select new objects. Show Result Exits the result display and takes you to the dialog box where you can make changes. The projection is done in the face normal direction. and then select objects supported by that method. Dimensions Length Width Height W-Scale Settings Associative Join Curves Creates an associative text feature. This check box is selected by default. This reduces the output number of curves per text feature. Sets the value for the length of the text outline box to the value you specify. Specify Point Origin — This is the default point method. Undo Result Using handles to modify the text outline drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

Use the width scale to change the width of the text in relation to its natural font width for a given WScale font height. Shear The shearing parameter is the angle of the parallelogram-shaped text outline box as measured against the vertical reference. Curve from Curves drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Handles to change the Height and the W-Scale factor of the text. L. Shear handles to change the shearing parameter. 3. Dynamic handles for creating text on plane The dynamic handles available while creating text on faces or curves is shown in the following figure. one or more of the following fields are displayed in the on-screen input box: Option Description Length Length or horizontal size of the text outline box. Translation and rotation handles to redefine the location and rotation of the text on the placement plane. W-Scale is the ratio of user specified width to the natural font width for a given font height. 1. 2. Dynamic handles for creating text on curves or faces Depending on the handle you select and right click. 4. 3. 2. Height Height or vertical size of the text outline box. The location of the dynamic handles for creating text curves on planar surfaces is shown in the following figure: 1. 4. Handles for changing the shearing parameter. Handle to change the baseline offset value. Anchor point (to move text without resizing). Handles to change the Length and the W-Scale factor of the text. Changing the angle to a value other than 0 degrees slants the text outline box similar to an italic effect. Stretch handles to change the size of the text curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 324 You can modify the text to get the desired output using the dynamic handles before you click OK or Apply to create the text curve.

This plane is used as the offset plane. Choose Information→Feature to open the Feature Browser dialog box. conics. You can choose whether to associate the offset curves to their input data. arcs. Offset curves are constructed through points calculated normal to the selected base curves. Selection Intent options are available on the Selection Bar. except for conics and curves created using the Rough Offset option or the 3D Axial method. Offset Curve Use the Offset Curve command to offset lines. If the input string is linear. such as lists of parents and lists of expressions used in the creation parameters. to a parallel plane using the draft angle and height options. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Multiple curves can only be offset if they are in a contiguous string.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 325 View a topic Offset Curve Circular Blend Curve Offset Curve in Face Bridge Curve Simplify Curve Join Curves Project Curve Combined Projection Mirror Curve Wrap/Unwrap Curve 1. or along a vector you specify when using the 3D Axial method. The following graphic shows the different types of offset curves you can create. splines. to select the curves. edges and sketches. which are offset as splines. you must define a plane by defining a point which is not colinear with the input string. The object types of the resulting curves are the same as their input curves. where you can view information on offset curves. Curves can be offset within the plane defined by the selected geometry.

In the graphics window. Where do I find it?   Choose Insert→Curve from Curves→Offset. a. Draft and Law Control type of offset curves. — Draft type offset curve. Choose Insert→Curve from Curves→Offset. or on the Curve toolbar. Create an Offset Curve feature 1.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 326 — Distance type offset curve. click Offset Curve . the curves to offset must lie in the same plane. select the curve you want to offset. — 3D Axial type offset curve. click Offset Curve to open the Offset Curve dialog box. 2. is active. select the type of offset curve you want to create. From theType list. — Law Control type offset curve. On the Curve toolbar. Select Curve 3. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Note For the Distance.

Offset Curve options Type drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 7. (Optional) Use the Settings options to get the desired results: o Clear the Associative check box to create non-associative offset curves by specifying the options for the non-associative settings. o For the Distance. 10. if the selected curve is linear. The Associative check box is selected by default. Curve selected to create a Distance type offset curve feature 6. use Specify Point options to define a point on the offset plane. select the trim type from the Trim list. For the Distance. o Enter a new value for the Tolerance. Draft or Law Control type of offset curve. o For the 3D Axial type — Type a value in the Distance box and specify the offset direction. select the required option to specify the disposition of the original input curves. extra offset curves created.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 327 5. o For the Distance or Draft type offset curve. Distance type offset curve feature (offset distance = 15mm) b. or offset curves not trimmed properly. Draft and Law Control type of offset curves. select a type. o From the Input Curves list. Type values in the Value and Number of Copies boxes. o For the Draft type — Type values in the Height. Depending on the type of offset curve. o For the Distance or Draft type offset curve. Click OK. select the Rough Offset check box to deal with self intersecting offset curves. o For the Law Control type — From the Law Type list. select the curve fit method from the Curve Fit list. 9. and Number of Copies boxes. specify the Offset options: o For the Distance type — Type values in the Distance and Number of Copies boxes. Angle. 8. or Apply to create the offset curve feature.

Appears only for the Draft type of offset curve. Type    For a simple example of a draft type offset curve. Draft — Creates offsets curves in a plane parallel to the plane of the input curves. Height Lets you specify the draft height (the distance from the plane of the input curves to the plane of the resulting offset curves). Point Constructor — Opens the Point dialog box.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Specifies how the curves are to be offset. at a distance defined by a law. The ZC-axis is the initial default. Lets you specify a point on the offset plane. in the plane of the input curves. You must specify the distance and the direction. Negative distance values create an offset curve in the opposite direction. Specify Point Inferred Point — This is the default point method. and Law Control type of offset curves. Distance Lets you specify the offset distance from the selected curves in the direction indicated by the conehead vector. causing it to vary. Click to select from the list of available point methods and then select the objects to support that method. at a specified angle. specified by the law types. A plane symbol marks the plane in which the offset curves lie. such as the loop direction in curve sections and the location of the pick point when selecting curves. Select Curve Point on Offset Plane Appears only for the Distance. The result is that selecting at different locations affects placement of the offset plane. when the input curve does not define the plane. Offset Appears only for the Distance and 3D Axial type of offset curve. The resulting offset curve is always a spline. Note Placement of the offset plane with the Draft type is in the direction of the plane normal. 3D Axial — Creates offset curves of coplanar or non-coplanar 3D curves. The plane normal is determined by various factors. Law Control — Creates offset curves in the plane of the input curves. Select from the following options:   328 Distance — Creates offset curves at a constant distance. see Draft type offset curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Draft. Curve Lets you select the curve you want to offset.

where the input curves lie. Lets you specify the location along the spine. Appears only for the Constant law type of offset curve. Appears only for the By Equation law type of offset curve. By Law Curve — Specify the required parameters for the curve using the Select Law Curve and Select Base Line options. Also specify the Function which will define the By Equation law type offset curve. Cubic — Specify the Start Value and End Value to create a Cubic law type offset curve. Appears only for the Linear and Cubic law type of offset curve. Appears only for the Linear and Cubic law type of offset curve. Value Lets you specify the value for the offset distance. Law Appears only for the Law Control type of offset curve. Click to select from the list of available point methods and then select the objects to support that method. Specifies the law type to create the offset curve. Specify New Location Point Constructor — Opens the Point dialog box. Parameter Lets you specify the parameters for the equation.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Appears only for the Draft type of offset curve. Inferred Point — This is the default point method. Select from the following options:    Law Type     Constant — Specify the Value for the offset distance to create a Constant law type offset curve. By Equation — Specify a value for the Parameter. End Value Sets the end value to the value you specify. Angle 329 Lets you specify the angle from the offset vector to a line normal to the reference plane. Cubic along Spine — Specify the required parameters for the Specify New Location and Values Along Spine options. Function Appears only for the By Equation law type of offset curve. Linear — Specify the Start Value and End Value to create a Linear law type offset curve. Appears only for the Linear along Spine and Cubic along Spine law type of offset curve. Start Value Sets the start value to the value you specify. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Linear along Spine — Specify the required parameters for the Specify New Location and Values Along Spine options.

Values along Spine Appears only for the Linear along Spine and Cubic along Spine law type. Through Point — Uses a different point along the spine to modify the previously specified point location. % Arc Length — Uses a percentage arc length value along the spine to modify the previously specified point location. Select from the following options:  Location   Arc Length — Uses an arc length value along the spine to modify the previously specified location. Each set offsets by the distance that you specified (with the Offset options) from the previous set. 330 Appears only for the By Law Curve law type of offset curve. % Arc Length Lets you specify a percentage arc length value along the spine to modify the previously specified point location. Appears only for the By Law Curve law type of offset curve. Draft. Reverse Direction Reverses the direction of the selected vector. Specifies a method to modify the specified location along the spine. Reverse Direction Number of Copies Reverses the inferred direction of the specified vector. Constructs multiple sets of offset curves. Select Base Line Lets you select the base line for the law curve. and Law Control types of offset curves. Appears only for the By Law Curve law type of offset curve. Appears only for the Arc Length location option. Appears only for the Distance. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The input curves are used as the spine curve. Arc Length Lets you specify an arc length value along the spine to modify the previously specified location. Appears only for the % Arc Length location option.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Lets you specify the function. Distance Sets the offset distance value at the specified location along the spine to the value you specify. Select Law Curve Lets you select the law curve.

Inferred Point — This is the default point method. When the original curves are modified. The length of the offset tangent extension lines is controlled by the Extend Factor (only available for non-associative offset curves). The curve type may change when you use Replace. which are always kept. The offset curves are neither trimmed nor filleted. Specifies the methods for trimming or extending the offset curves to their intersection points. The radius of the arc is equal to the offset distance. You can use the Hide option with sketch curves when the Associative check box is not selected. Extend Tangents — Extends the offset curves to their intersection points. 331 Lets you specify a different point along the spine to modify the previously specified point location. when a conic is input. the offset curves also update as necessary. the offset curve is a spline. Specify Point Point Constructor — Opens the Point dialog box. Replace — Moves the input curve to the offset curve position. Appears only for the Distance and Draft type of offset curves if the Rough Offset check box is selected. which is a multiple of the offset distance. Input Curves options only apply to curves and not to edges or sketch curves. Select from the following options: Trim    None — Available only if the Rough Offset check box is not selected. It is used for all curves except lines. which are simply extended to the intersection points. Also. Hide — Hides the input curves. the output is always a spline when Law Control is used.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Appears only for the Through Point location option. Keep — Keeps the input curves. List Settings Associative Lets you create offset curves which are associated to the input curves and defining data. Click to select from the list of available point methods and then select the objects to support that method. If you create repeated offsets (by drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The following options are available if the Associative check box is not selected: Input Curves   Delete — Deletes the input curves. Select from the following options:   Displays a list of the points along the spline and the offset values at these points in the List box. For example. Fillet — Constructs an arc tangent to the end point of each offset curve. Specifies what happens to the original input curves when the offset curves are created.

Sets the maximum number of segments to the value you specify. the curvature characteristics of the resulting offset curves are closer to the input curve characteristics. the input surface) and apply it to the output curve. the maximum degree. a small Tolerance may also greatly increase the number of poles and segments of the resulting curve. Appears only for the Advanced type of curve fitting method. You can use the Fillet option to round off these sharp corners. This provides explicit control on the parameterization of output curves Degree and Tolerance – Use this option to specify the maximum degree and the tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. in the case of Intersection Curve. Appears only for the Distance and Draft type of offset curves. Keep Parameterization – Use this option to inherit the degree. Rough Offset Tip If you select the Rough Offset check box only the Extend Tangents and Fillet type Trim options are available. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . If a single curve has sharp corners. Lets you select the curve fit from the Method list. or when curves may not be trimmed properly. then an Alert message is displayed to inform you that the specified tolerance is not met. The offset curves are splines. and Law Control type of offset curves. Group Lets you specify if you want to group the offset curves. pole structure and the knot structure from the input curve (or. Tolerance Non-associative Settings Appears only if the Associative check box is not selected. Maximum Degree Maximum Segments Appears only for the Advanced type of curve fitting method. Appears only for Distance. This value determines the accuracy of the offset curve if the input curve is a spline or conic. segments.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 332 clicking Apply without changing any inputs). However. Auto Fit – Use this option to specify the minimum degree. Draft. Sets the maximum number of degrees to the value you specify. Provides more robust handling of offset curve applications. the maximum number of segments and tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. the radius of the arc increases each time by the offset distance. If the output curves do not meet the specified tolerance. Sets the approximate tolerance to the value you specify. The smaller the tolerance value. the Rough Offset option may extend tangents and produce sharp corners in the offset curve.   Advanced Curve Fit   Degree and Segments – Use this option to specify the degree and segment of output curves. Use this option when you have self-intersecting input curves when extra offset curves may be produced.

Enter a value greater than or equal to 1 Number of Copies: The value entered is outside the allowed range Enter a value greater than or equal to 1 Cause The input curves do not lie in the same plane. You enter zero (0). You enter a negative value for Extend Factor. Offset Curve error messages The following Offset Curve error messages apply to both the creation and edit modes: Error Message The selected curves do not all lie in one plane. When you click OK or Apply to create the feature. The input curves contain multiple loops. the software reuses the Show Result computation. Height. Preview Computes the feature and shows the result. Exits the result display and returns you to the dialog box where you can make your changes. making the creation process Show Result faster. for the Distance. or a negative value for Tolerance. Undo Result c. Controls the length of the offset tangent extension lines. You enter an invalid expression for Distance. or Angle. Enter a value greater than or equal to 1e-005 Extend Factor: The value entered is outside the allowed range. You enter zero (0). Draft and Law Control type of offset curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Objects 333 Extend Factor Appears only for Extend Tangents trim type for the Distance and Draft type of offset curves. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Modify the selection or change the offset type to 3D Axial The section contains multiple loops The specified variable expression does not exist Tolerance: The value entered is outside the allowed range. Specify a multiple of the offset distance. or a negative value for Number of Copies.

number of copies — Original curves to offset. — Copy # 1. f. — Offset curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING d. Offset Curve . — Copy # 2. Offset curve trim types drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . — Draft angle = 30 degrees.2500. e. Draft type offset curve 334 — Original curves to offset. — Draft height = 0.

— Extension factor = 0.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING — Extended tangents type (curve tangents are extended). — None (no extended tangents or fillets).2mm maximum).Extended tangents trim type 335 — Original curves to offset. — Fillet type (a fillet is formed between the two offset curves). — Resulting follow fillet trim type offset curves.5. Offset curve — follow fillet trim type — Original curves to offset. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . — Offset distance = 0. h.4mm. — Added lines between endpoints (curves are extended 0. Offset Curve. g. — Added intersecting curves tangent lines.

blended curve between two 3D curves or edge chains. The blend curve is tangent to the two input curves and looks like a circular fillet if projected onto a plane normal to the selected vector direction. 2. 4. In the Cylinder group. choose Show Cylinder. Select the second edge. 3. The software previews the blend curve and the reference cylinder. Choose Insert→Curve from Curves→Circular Blend Curve. Circular Blend Curve Use the Circular Blend Curve command to create a smooth. This option displays the reference cylinder that the software uses to create the blend curve. Select the first edge and click the middle mouse button. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Curve→Curve from Curves Drop-down→Circular Blend Curve Insert→ Curve from Curves→ Circular Blend Curve a. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and the output blend curve. Create a Circular Blend Curve feature This example shows how to create a circular blend curve between the edges of two sheet bodies.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 336 2. The following graphic shows the curve and optional cylinder during preview. 1.

6. The direction of the cylinder axis is parallel to the cross product of the tangents at the point of contact. Click OK. make sure that Direction Option is set to Best Fit. Open and closed loops are valid. Circular Blend Curve options Curve 1 and Curve 2 Select Curve Lets you select the first and second chain of curves or feature edges. The circular blend curve appears like an arc when viewed along the direction of the cylinder axis. Best Fit Finds the plane that most closely contains the input curves. The curves in the chain must be tangent continuous. Direction Option Variable Uses the tangents of the input curves at the points of contact with the blend fillet to define the view vector. Cylinder Lets you specify the direction of the cylinder axis. In the Cylinder group. The inferred cylinder axis is normal to the Best Fit plane. b. and that the Radius Option is set to Value.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 337 5. The following graphic shows the model with two Circular Blend curves. Vector drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 7. Set the Radius to 100.

Lets you specify the location of the point of contact on Curve 1 or Curve 2. Note This direction of the cylinder axis is non-associative. Radius Sets the cylinder radius to the value you type in the box. the Direction Option changes to the Vector type. Show Cylinder Shape Control Curve 1. Current View Specifies the cylinder axis which is normal to the current view. Available only for the Value cylinder radius option. Lets you specify the value for the cylinder radius. You can change this cylinder axis using the Vector Constructor or other standard vector methods. Location % Arc Length Lets you specify a percentage of the arc length as the point of contact. Available only for Point on Curve 1 and Point on Curve 2 radius options. Controls the curvature of the circular blend curve and its deviation from Curve 1 and drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Lets you show or hide the cylinder that is used to create the circular blend curve. and searches for the point on Curve 1.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 338 Lets you specify a vector as the cylinder axis using the Vector Constructor or other standard vector methods. . Radius Option Point on Curve 2 Lets you select a point on Curve 2 as the anchor point. Through Point Lets you select a point as the point of contact. Value Lets you type a value for the cylinder radius. After the normal to the current view is selected. Arc Length Lets you specify a distance along the arc length as the point of contact. Point on Curve 1 Lets you select a point on Curve 1 as the anchor point. and searches for the point on Curve 2.

339 Specifies the values for the maximum number of degrees and the maximum number of segments. 2. Resulting offset curves on the surface. Lets you specify the curve fitting method. The curves are created on the face. Cubic Uses degree 3 splines. The offset curves can be associative or non-associative. Offset Curve in Face Use this command to create offset curves on one or more faces from connected edges or curves on the surfaces.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Curve 2 Settings Associative Complement Arc Creates a circular blend curve that is the complement of the existing arc. Curve 2. The lower the number. and are measured along face sections normal to the original curves. 1. and lie at a specified distance from an existing curve or edge section. Selected curve on surface to offset. There are also options to let you trim against the selected face boundaries. 3. Curve on surface used to create offset curves  Different spanning methods let you fill the gaps between the curves. This is the default Curve Fit method. Curve Fit Quintic Uses degree 5 splines. Advanced Creates an associative circular blend curve. the quicker the deviation. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

of off their faces if there is enough surface. 1 Curve toolbar→Offset Curve in Face . drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The offset curves can be created outside. although you can specify your own tolerance. To end selection of curves. Create a constant offset curve trimmed to face edges In this example. Use the same options to edit an Offset in Face feature that you used to create it. an elliptical curve is offset a constant distance within a face and trimmed to the face edges. Select the curves to offset. The Modeling Distance Tolerance parameter determines how accurately the offset curve approximates the true theoretical offset curve. Where Do I Find It? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling and Shape Studio Curve → Offset Curve in Face Insert → Curve from Curves → Offset in Face a. 2 Note Default Curve Rule is Tangent Curves. depending on the input curves and the faces from which they are offset.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING     340 The resulting offset curves are either cubic splines or analytic curves.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Set Section1:Offset1 to 45 mm. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 3 To advance. 4 Note Default Face Rule is Tangent Faces. 5 Trim and Extend Offset Curves group → select Trim to Face Edges check box. 341 Select the faces.

Creating law-based variable offset curves in a face In this example. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . a cutout is developed on a doubly-curved cover part using a variable offset curve. Offset curves are now available for other operations. For this example. Set Type to Variable. sheet is trimmed using Trimmed Sheet b. Curve toolbar→Offset Curve in 1 Face .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 342 6 Choose another command or click Apply to perform the operation.

As each location is specified. Note Default Face Rule is Tangent Faces. Select the curves to offset. an offset is entered. 4 Set Law Type to Linear along Spine. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 2 To advance. In this example. 3 Note Default Curve Rule is Tangent Curves. 5 Use Specify New Location to establish control locations on the spine.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 343 Select a face or plane. the corner radii.

Offset Curve in Face dialog box Type Constant Generates a curve with a constant offset from the original in-face curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 344 6 Choose another command or click Apply to perform the operation. Offset curves are now available for other operations. Lets you specify different distances from point locations on the original curve to create a variable curve in face. c. Variable drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . For this example. sheet is trimmed using Trimmed Sheet.

4 As you select curves and edges and add them to Section:Offset sets. The box displays the offset value for the selected item in the list box. Reverse Direction Only the offset direction for that particular offset curve or edge is reversed. The label of the box changes to match the specific Section:Offset you are changing (for example. After you select a curve. right-click either Section:Offset items in the list box or offset handles in the graphics window and choose Reverse All Directions. Yields variable offset curve in surface (1). Available when Type is set to Constant. When you select an offset curve or edge with this option.5 1–0. Curve Lets you select a curve or edge to offset on the specified face. D1 – D4 are distance values from the respective points. only the offset direction for that particular offset curve or edge is reversed. which updates the offset curve (both in the list box and in the graphics window). Add New Set List Right-click Section:Offset items in the list box to see the following commands: List box  Adds a new Section:Offset set. Reverses the direction of the offset curve of the selected Section:Offset.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING    345 Points P1 – P4 lie on the original curve on surface.2 p3=-0.   Section1:Offset1 You can enter a different value in this box. entries for each are updated in the list box. You can give a unique offset value to each curve in the Section:Offset set (that is.5 p3=-0. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . To reverse all offsets for all curves in a section.4 Sets an offset value to the highlighted Section:Offset entry in the list box or handle in the graphics window. each Section:Offset item in the list box). the current Section:Offset item is updated in the list box with an offset value in the following format: Select Curve Parameter Section1:Offset1 Value 25.2 -0. Section1:Offset3). Reverse Direction – Reverses the direction of the selected Section:Offset. Following is a typical list of section:offsets: Parameter Section1:Offset1 Section1:Offset2 Section1:Offset3 Section2:Offset1 Value 1 1.4 Expression p3=1 p3=1.4 Expression p3=25.

Law Type List the law types that are available. Pt 2. Available when Law Type is set to Constant. Pt x – Lets you define an offset value for each location specified.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING    346 Remove – Removes the highlighted or selected Section:Offset or section. % Arc Length box sets the distance value. After you specify a location. Available when Law Type is set to Linear or Cubic. and so on. Reverse All Directions – Reverses the direction of the Section:Offsets of a selected section. The offset values do not change when you reverse the direction.  Through Point – Lets you specify an offset location point. Point offset values are listed as Pt 1. see Law Types. the Values along Spine positioning parameters become available. Available when Law Type is set to Linear along Spine or Cubic along Spine. When you select this option. Offset Available when Type is set to Variable. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Available when Law Type is set to Linear along Spine or Cubic along Spine. all the offset curves and edges for the section reverse their directions. % Arc Length – Determines the point location as a percent of total edge arc length. Add Offset to Section – Adds additional offset curves to a Section:Offset item in the list box. Location – Determines how the location will be defined. Note You can also access the preceding commands when you right-click the offset handles and section anchors in the graphics window.  Values along Spine  Arc Length – Uses an arc length value to determine the position of the location along the spine. Value Offsets an in-face curve using the designated value. For details. putting them on the opposite side of the section. Start/End Designates the offset value of the start point and the end point of a variable offset.   Specify New Location Lets you specify locations on the spine from which offset values are measured. in the List. Section:Offset or section handle in the graphics window. The Position on Spine box sets the arc length value.

Available when Law Type is set to By Equation. Select Base Line   Lets you select a line to serve as the local reference X-axis for the law curve evaluation.  Normal to Vector – Lets you designate a vector that determines the perpendicular direction of the offset. If you do not select a base line. Select Law Curve Available when Law Type is set to By Law Curve. All variables must be previously defined using the Expression dialog box. Available when Law Type is set to By Law Curve. Select Face or Plane Face Rule selection options are available.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 347 The parameters you set for Values along Spine are listed in the List box where they can be edited. Input curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Direction and Method  Normal to Curve – Creates the offset along the direction which is perpendicular to tangential vector of input curve. Offset direction based on perpendicular to tangential vectors of input curve. Parameter / Function   The parameter variable must be "t". 3. absolute X is used as the default base line. Lets you select a string of smoothly joined curves to define a law function. Offset Direction 1. Face or Plane Lets you select faces and planes on which to create the offset curves. Resulting offset curve. 2.

3. Projected Distance – Lets you designate an offset distance on a virtual plane using a specified normal vector.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 348 1. 5. Offset distance. and projects them back onto the face. Arc Length – Creates offset curves following the arc of the string curve. 4. Input curve.  Fillet Sharp Corner Fillet Smooths the offset curve sharp corners when needed. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Input curve is projected onto virtual plane that is normal to input vector. 2-D offset curve is projected back up to surface.  Defines the way the offset distances are measured. Input vector. Specified vector. Tangential – Creates offset curves at a distance along the tangent to the face where the curves initially are. 2. 3. Input curve. using line segments between points on the string curve. 4. Offset Method 1. Geodesic – Creates offset curves along the minimum distance on the face(s). The method you select applies to all the strings for the feature. Resulting offset curve.      Chordal – Creates offset curves based on the chordal distance. 2. Normal direction of offset.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and are trimmed. o o In the case of multiple fillets. Best Fit – Determines the axis direction of the virtual fillet cylinder based on the surface normal at the final touch points between the cylinder and the curves. Vector – Lets you define an input vector as the axis direction of the virtual fillet cylinder.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 349    None – No fillet is added. The tangents of two curves are extended to form a corner.  Projection Vector – Uses the projection direction as the axis direction of the virtual fillet cylinder. Trim and Extend Offset Curves Trim to Each Other within Section Extend to Each Other within Section Trim to Face Edges Trims corners between two curves within the same section . the same radius is applied to all fillets The direction of the center axis of the virtual cylinder is normal to the face at the corners. Trims curves to the face edges. The tangents of two curves are extended to form a corner. Extends corners between two curves within the same section.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 350 1. Offset curves in face not trimmed to face edges. 2. Trims intersection areas of the offset curve. Extends the offset curves to the face boundaries. Self-intersections within offset curve removed. Offset curves in face extended to face edges. Offset curves in face not extended to face edges. Remove SelfIntersections within Offset Curve 1. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Extend to Face Edges 1. Offset curves in face trimmed to face edges 2.

o Maximum Segments – Sets the maximum number of segments for this feature. Quintic – Uses degree 5 splines. segments are added until the number defined for Maximum Segments is reached. o Curves are rebuilt without segments until the number of degrees specified in the Maximum Degree parameter is reached. Self-intersections within offset curve not removed. Advanced – Lets you specify the values for the maximum number of degrees and the maximum number of segments. Cubic – Joins the output curves to form a degree 3 polynomial spline curve. Gaps between curves are filled based on a specified tolerance. o If the Tolerance value cannot be met with the Maximum Degree parameter. 351 The offset body faces are determined automatically by the curves you select to offset. Use Cubic and Quintic for curves that must be in tolerance. General – Joins the output curves to form general spline curves drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . until you modify it. Tip Use Advanced to create curves that are more suitable to styling related tasks.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 2. This method is valid throughout the NX session. o If the combined value of Maximum Degree and Maximum Segments does not still meet the tolerance value. Join Curves    No – Makes the curves created across multiple faces or planes appear as separate curves on each face or plane.    Curve Fit Cubic – Uses degree 3 splines. Lets you assign the kind of curve to create when you join curves of multiple faces. Note The Curve Fit Method option in Modeling Preferences is used as the default. o Maximum Degree – Sets the maximum number of degrees for this feature. For more information. Settings Associative Infer Body Faces from Curve Parametrically relates the new offset curves to their parent features. Lets you specify the curve fit method for the curve to be offset. see Curve Fit Method in Modeling Preferences. the curves are created and a message that they do not meet the specified tolerance value is displayed.

4. choose . surfaces. Bridge Curve Use the Bridge Curve command to create. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Where Do I Find It? Application Menu Modeling Insert→ Curve from Curves→ Bridge a. Create and customize basic bridge curves This example shows how to create and customize bridge curves between the sheet bodies below. or surface edges. To define start and end points for the straight curve at the bottom of the part. You can also use this command to create symmetric bridge curves across a datum plane. This following graphic shows five bridge curves between a surface edge and points on a curve. 1. points. 2. From the Curves toolbar.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  352 Quintic – Joins the output curves to form a degree 5 polynomial spline curve. The final part includes four bridge curves and a Through Curve Mesh surface based on the curves. and constrain bridge curves between curves. Tolerance Sets the distance tolerance value to the value you specify. shape. The bridge curves are perpendicular to the surface edge at the intersection point. select the curve ends at and .

including a Through Curve Mesh surface based on the bridge curves. 5. To define start and end points for the second curve. To change the tangent magnitude from the start point. click Apply. and press 6.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 353 3. The following graphic shows the final part. To create the final two bridge curves. 7. type 2. 4. To complete the curve. . click Apply. click the handle at ENTER. To complete the first bridge curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . select the start and end points and click Apply. select the curve ends at and .

constrained bridge curves across a center plane. Ensure that the End Object Option is set to Object and select the datum plane. 3. Create symmetric. From the Curves toolbar. and. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . ensure that the End Point option is turned on. Select the end point of the first curve as the Start Object. 1. 2. under Bridge Curve Attributes. 4. On the Selection bar. This example shows how to create symmetric bridge curves extending from the four horizontal curves below to the datum plane. constrained bridge curves You can use the Bridge Curve command to create symmetric. choose .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 354 b. The software sets Shape Control to Depth and Skew disables the G0 and G1 constraint types .

1. and the datum plane. 7. To create the first curve. To select the Start Object. click Apply. Curves→Bridge Curve 2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 355 5. Create and constrain a bridge curve along a vector direction This example shows how to create a bridge curve starting at the curve on the left and along the vector direction of a circular sheet body on the right. and click Apply. 6. select each remaining curve end. c. To create the next 3 curves. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . click the curve end. Right-click the constraint handle at the start of the curve and select Infer G3.

4. Click the circle. On the start curve. d. choose Vector from the Option menu. right-click the constraint handle and choose Infer G3. 5. 7. Bridge Curve dialog box Start Object drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Click OK. 6. The software calculates a vector that is normal to the plane of the circle.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 3. 356 In the End Object group.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Select Object Selects an object that defines the start of the curve. Position. and Start/End Direction options independently for the start and end points of a bridge curve. Position – Not available as position settings do not apply. Use the vector option when you want to construct a symmetric bridge curve. Reverse Direction – Reverses the curve direction at the start and end points. The software sets Continuity to G2 and Shape Control to Depth and Skew. location. If you specify a G0 constraint. and selects a datum plane or datum axis for a symmetric bridge curve. Direction – Lets you specify the bridge curve direction at the start or end points using Isoparametric and Sectional options. Surface – Available when you choose a surface to define the bridge curve start or end:   Position – Lets you specify the U and V percentages along the surface. projected curves. o Perpendicular imposes the bi-normal direction at the selection point to the bridge curve end. Lets you define constraints. this option is unavailable. and offset curves Edges. This option is available only for the end object. If you specify a G0 constraint. Bridge Curve Attributes Lets you specify the point you want to edit. and orientation of bridge curve start and end points. Curve or surface edge – Available when you choose a curve or surface edge to define the bridge curve start or end:    Position – Lets you specify the U percentage along the curve or edge. You can set Continuity. Select Object Lets you select an object or a vector that defines the end of the curve. Position. You can use the Select Face option to select one or more reference faces Reverse Direction – Reverses the curve direction at the start and end points. Only G0 (Position) and G1 (Tangent) continuity are available. Continuity. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Direction – Lets you define the curve direction at the point by using the Vector Constructor. including the faces of sheet bodies and solid bodies End Object Option Lets you define the end of the curve by selecting an object or a vector. including surface edges Surfaces. and Direction Point – Available when you select a point to define the bridge curve start or end:     Continuity – Lets you set the continuity. Direction – o Tangent defines the tangent vector direction at the pick point to the bridge curve end. this option is unavailable. You can select:     357 Points Curves and curve features such as curves on surface.

You can also set the Start/End Location using the Specify Location option.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  358 Reverse Direction – Reverses the curve direction at the start and end points. Direction Reverse Direction Constraint Faces Lets you select constraint faces for the bridge curve. G0 (Position) continuity must be within the Modeling Distance tolerance. If you specify a G0 constraint. the curve does not go below the minimum or above the peak values. Reverses the direction of the tangent vector at the Start or End object. G1 (Tangent) continuity must be within the Angle tolerance. this option is unavailable. which opens the Point Constructor. Type Specifies Minimum or Peak constraint values for complex transitions such as washouts. This option is not available for the Reference Shape Curve selection step or the Conic Shape Control method. For both options. They do not support the Conic shape type. The constraint faces must be capable of being sewed. Lets you specify the U and V point position as a percentage of the target geometry. Constraint Faces are not available if you set a Radius Constraint. Specifies Minimum or Peak radius value. Sets the direction of the bridge curve. the software sets Shape Control to the Depth and Skew type. Use this option when your design Select Faces requires a curve that is coincident with a set of faces. Radius Constraint Input curves must be coplanar. Select Face – Lets you select a target face. As you edit the curve shape. Continuity options are available depending on the input geometry and current bridge curve settings. The options vary depending on the target geometry: Vector Constructor – Lets you specify the bridge curve direction at the point using the Vector Constructor when you select a point Tangent and Perpendicular – Lets you specify whether the bridge curve is tangent or perpendicular at the point. or when you create a curve network that defines a tangent edge for blending.      Constraint faces support only G0 (Position) and G1 (Tangent) continuity. Value Shape Control Lets you reshape the bridge curve interactively. Type Tangent Magnitude – Represents the percentage of tangency in Start and End values. This option is available only when you select Perpendicular. Only the Skew shaping tool is available with Radius Constraint. Constraint Type U/V Percentage Sets continuity at the curve point. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 359 These are initially set to 1. The value represents the percentage of the effect of the curvature. Reference Shape Curve – Lets you select an existing spline to control the general shape of the bridge curve. Top Skew = 80 Middle Skew = 50 Bottom Skew = 0 Conic – The input curves must be coplanar. Note that Conic supports only G0 (Position) and G1 (Tangent) continuity. Note that Reference Shape Curve supports only G0 and G1 drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . if you chose the Reverse Direction option) where the value represents the percentage of the distance along the bridge from start to end. Depth and Skew – Depth – Controls how the curvature of the curves affects the bridge.01 to . Changes the bridge curve shape by altering the fullness of a conic curve based on the Rho value you specify. A small Rho value produces a flat conic. Top Depth = 100 Middle Depth = 50 Bottom Depth = 0 Skew – Controls the location of the maximum curvature (or reversal of curvature. To get a reverse tangency bridge curve. Valid values are from . click the Reverse Direction button. while a large rho value produces a pointed conic.99.

and they better replicate the curvature properties of the true curve. Lower values produce finer point movement. The curves are created over the selected curves. You can specify a maximum number of degrees and a maximum number of segments. Prior to simplifying the selected curves. Specifies the tolerance.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING continuity. For very fine curve point editing. up to the maximum degrees. Available only when you select constraining faces: Cubic – Creates a degree 3 curve on surface. Advanced – Enables the Maximum Degree and Maximum Segments options in the dialog box. 5. the software adds segments up to the maximum number you specify. The curvature distributions are smoother. Curves created with this method have a smaller number of segments than those created with the Cubic fit method. By default this value equals the Distance tolerance in Modeling Preferences. You may choose one of the following options for the original curve(s): Maintain The original curves are maintained after the lines and arcs are created. If the curve is still out of tolerance at the maximum segments. Simplify Curve Creates a string of best fit lines and arcs from a string of curves (you may select a maximum of 512 curves). reduces the relative amount by which a handle drag Rate moves the corresponding point. The software builds the curve without adding segments. If the curve is out of tolerance at the maximum degree. 360 Settings Associative Curve Fit Method Lets you specify whether the output bridge curve is associative. You can also use the Control key to activate Enable micropositioning without selecting this check box. Quintic – Creates a degree 5 curve on surface. An associative bridge curve updates automatically when you change the source objects. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and are easier to edit. Distance Tolerance Microposition Activates or deactivates micropositioning. Use this option if you need to transfer your spline data to another system that supports only degree 3 splines. You can specify a value between 0 and 100. you may specify a status for the original curve(s) after the conversion. the software creates the curve and displays an error message.

see the Drafting Help. Join Curve feature Create a feature when you want to maintain associativity between the original curves and the output spline. 6. Once deleted. and section edges. you can use the Join Curves command to join curves that were previously created from simplified member view edges. For more information. or a general spline that exactly represents the original chain. Drawing View Edges In the Drafting application. Note Use the Edit→ Show and Hide→ Show command to return hidden original curves to the screen. see Drafting Help. the original curve is recovered but is no longer simplified. you can no longer recover the selected curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Delete 361 Hide Removes the selected curves after simplification. Edges that can be simplified include member view edges. The output spline can be a degree 3 or degree 5 spline that approximates the original chain. Join Curves Use this command to join a chain of curves and/or edges into either a Join Curve feature or an unassociative B-spline. B-spline Create an unassociative B-spline when you want to edit the output spline directly.01") is used. you can use the Simplify Curve functionality to simplify drawing view edges so that they can be selected later for annotation purposes. silhouettes. after the simplified curve is created. the spline is approximated using a large arc whose radius could be outside the maximum part size limit of 1000 x 1000 x 1000 meters. If the spline is long and nearly straight and the default distance tolerance (0. The following graphic shows a chain of basic arcs and lines joined to create a Join Curve feature. Where do I find it? drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can avoid this problem by increasing the distance tolerance. You can control the shape of the feature only by editing the original curves. but not deleted. For more information. In Drafting. it is approximated into arcs and lines using the Distance Tolerance. When a spline is simplified. (If you choose Undo.) The selected original curves are removed from the screen.

the last curve in the original chain is extended. In the following graphic. b. Click OK. Join curves unassociatively This example shows how to join multiple splines into a single B-spline that is unassociative to the input curves. and the Join Curve feature is updated. Select the curves you want to join. From the Output Curve list. 2. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . the extruded sheet body is based on the input splines. If you edit the input curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Curve→Join Curves Insert→ Curve from Curves→ Join. 362 a. 3. The software creates a Join Curve feature and hides the input curves. In the Settings group. 6. In the example. Join curves associatively This example shows how to join a chain of lines and arcs into a single B-spline that is associative to the input curves. select Hide. 1. From the Input Curves list. Click Insert→Curve from Curves→Join. the software automatically updates the Join Curve feature. 4. 5. select Cubic. ensure that the Associative option is checked.

Click Insert→Curve from Curves→Join. Select Curve   If there are gaps greater than the Angle tolerance between any curves. Join Curves dialog box Curves Lets you select a chain of curves. select Replace. clear the Associative check box. From the Output Curve list. The software o o o Creates a single B-spline that approximates the input curves. 2. edges. From the Input Curves list. and Sketch curves. Select the curves you want to join. In the Settings group. Click OK. 4. Creates a single face for the sheet body. 3. the software cannot join the curves. If there are gaps greater than the Distance tolerance between any curves. 5. Makes the sheet body associative to the new B-spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . select Cubic. 6. the software creates a corner at the gap and marks the corner with an asterisk. The software will replace the input curves with a single B-spline.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 363 1. Settings Associative Makes the output spline associative to the input curves. c.

The General option can create a higher degree curve than the Cubic or Quintic type. You cannot replace the input curves if the output spline is associative. If tolerances cannot be met with the Maximum Degree parameter. and associative curves are ignored. Quintic Approximates the input curves with a degree 5 polynomial spline. the software deletes only the nonassociative curve. if you use the Delete option when the input curve chain consists of an edge. This option does not hide edges. Hide Hides the input curves. sketch curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Lets you specify the disposition of the input curves. You can use Replace to preserve associativity between the new spline and any features you built from the input curves. Lets you specify the spline type. Advanced Rebuilds the curves using only one segment until the number of degrees specified by the Maximum Degree parameter is reached. The new curve is created over the input curves. Keep 364 Retains the input curves. and a non-associative curve. Delete Deletes the input curves. For example. Cubic Output Curve Type Approximates the input curves with a degree 3 polynomial spline. segments are added until the number drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Input Curves . You can use Undo to recover them. you may prefer to use Cubic or Quintic. Use this option to minimize the number of knots. You cannot delete the input curves if the output spline is associative. edges. but the new spline is discarded. a sketch curve. In applications where an approximate representation is acceptable. Note The Delete and Replace options are available only for non-associative input curves. General Creates a spline that is an exact representation of the input curves. Replace Replaces the first input curve with the output spline and deletes all other input curves.

The software uses this value instead of the default value in Modeling Preferences. or along the face normals. Project Curve Use this command to project curves. The software trims projected curves at holes or edges of the faces. Maximum Segments Available only for the Advanced type of output curve. edges. 7. If the maximum degree and maximum segments combined still do not allow the tolerance to be met.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 365 defined for Maximum Segments is reached. or at an angle to. You can direct your projection toward. the curves are created and a message is displayed you that the curves do not meet the specified tolerance. The software uses this value instead of the default value in Modeling Preferences. faceted bodies. and datum planes. and points onto faces. Lets you specify the maximum number of segments. a specified vector. a point. This example shows sketch curves projected along the –Z axis onto a sheet body. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Curve→Project Curve Insert→ Curve from Curves→ Project drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Maximum Degree Available only for the Advanced type of output curve. Lets you specify the maximum number of degrees.

from the Direction list. 7. or choose Insert→Curve from Curves→Project. Select the sketch curves and click the middle mouse button. 4. 366 1. choose Along Vector. In the Settings group. On the Curve toolbar click Project Curve . ensure that the Associative option is checked. 5. Project a chain of curves to a surface This example shows how to project a chain of tangent curves along a vector onto a surface. Click OK. choose –Z. 3.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING a. From the Vector list. 2. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 6. In the Project Direction group. Select the target surface.

points. Projection Direction Direction Lets you specify the projection direction. Projecting objects onto a plane using either the Along Face Normal or Along Vector method is exact. any changes you make to the original sketch update the feature. Along Face Normal drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Project Curve dialog box Curves or Points to Project Select Curve or Point Lets you select the curves. the sketch is closer to the front end of the sheet body. All other projections are approximations that use the Modeling tolerance value. You can also create a plane using the Full Plane Tool. or sketches that you want to project the objects. Projects the objects normal to the target. edges. You can also create points using the Point Constructor. Objects to Project To Select Object Lets you select the faces. and datum planes on which to project. In this example. b. faceted bodies.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 367 Because the Project Curve feature is associative to the input curves. Specify Plane Lets you define a target plane using the Inferred plane method. so the projected curves move along with the sketch.

you get the intersection point of the line between the selected point and the projection point. For a projected point. Toward Line Curves to project Curves projected toward this line Projected curves Along Vector Lets you specify a direction vector using either the Vector list or the Vector Constructor. along vectors perpendicular to the line. Toward Point Curves to project Curves projected toward this point Projected curves Projects the objects towards a straight line.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Curves to project Normals to the face Projected curves 368 Projects the objects toward a specified point. For a projected point. you get the intersection curve of the surface created by all the normals to the specified line that pass through the selected curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . you get the intersection point of the line from the selected point perpendicular to the specified line. For a projected curve.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . None Projects the curves in the vector direction.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Projection Option Lets you specify additional characteristics of the projection. which you must select before choosing the Equal Arc Length direction method. Project Both Sides 369 Projects the curves in both the vector direction and the reverse direction. lets you specify the XY origin and X direction of the Source Plane using the standard point and direction tools. Projects curves from an XC-YC coordinate system to the u-v isocurve coordinate system on the face being projected to. and control how the software prioritizes X and Y values for the arc length calculation. The projection uses only a single face. Equal Arc Length The Equal Arc Length option is not available for sheet bodies or planes. V-isocurve Point on face U-isocurve Reference point Source Plane Definition For the Equal Arc Length option. preserving curve arc lengths in the XC (or uisocurve) direction and the YC (or v-isocurve) directions as specified.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Keep Length Lets you specify the attributes of the input curves you want to retain. Both X and Y 370 'u' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of XC along the u-isocurve. Angle to Vector and Equal Arc Length options. X Only 'u' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of XC along the u-isocurve. The projection is angled out or in with respect to the approximate centroid of the curves depending on the choice of the angle value (angled in for negative value). Warning Projecting onto a face or portion of a face that is not smooth or is almost normal (orthogonal) to the projection vector may not work well. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . then an arc length distance of YC is measured along the v-isocurve to determine 'v'. the projection vector. Note The reference point. The curves selected should be on (or parallel to) this plane for the arc length distances to be preserved by the projection. If you change the vector direction. and the CX vector define the CX-CY plane (the CY vector is orthogonal to the projection vector and to the CX vector). the vector remains associative. then an arc length distance of XC is measured along the u-isocurve to determine 'u'. First X. the projection direction is updated automatically. then Y First 'u' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of XC along the uisocurve. and 'v' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of YC along the visocurve. Note When you select the Along Vector. and 'u' is determined by measuring a distance of XC along the surface tangent vector in the u-isocurve direction. then X First 'v' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of YC along the visocurve. First Y. and 'v' is determined by measuring a distance of YC along the surface tangent vector in the v-isocurve direction. Y Only 'v' is determined by measuring an arc length distance of YC along the v-isocurve. Angle to Vector Projects the curves at a specified angle to a specified vector.

if there are more available surfaces on which the curve can be projected.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 371 Curves to project Projection direction vector Positive angle (out) Resulting project curves Angle to Vector Lets you specify a value for the angle to the selected vector used for projecting curves. Available when Direction is set to Along Vector. Projects a curve on the surface that is nearest to the input curve along the projection vector. Note The Angle to Vector option is not available for projecting points. There is no unique solution for this case. Project to Nearest Point along Vector Curve selected to project. and the Projection Option is set to either None or Project Both Sides. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

Surface on which to project the curve. the gaps in the two smaller holes are bridged and the project curve has several consecutive segments. Two of the holes in the surface have a diameter less than the defined Maximum Bridged Gap Size and more than the default Modeling Tolerance. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . When the Create Curves to Bridge Gaps check box is selected. Create Curves to Bridge Gaps Curve selected to project. and joins the segments as a single curve. the gaps are not bridged and the project curve has several separate segments. When the Create Curves to Bridge Gaps check box is not selected. 372 Project curve created when the Project to Nearest Point along Vector check box is selected.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Surface on which to project the curve. Gaps Bridges small gaps between any two segments in projection curves. Project curve created when Project to Nearest Point along Vector check box is not selected. Gaps are bridged only when both the following conditions are met:   The gap distance is less than what is defined in Maximum Bridged Gap Size. The gap distance is larger than the specified modeling tolerance.

Degree and Segments Advanced Curve Fit Use this option to specify the degree and segment of output curves. 373 Specifies the maximum size allowed between gaps. Gaps that are smaller than this value are bridged when the Create Curves to Bridge Gaps check box is selected. Lets you specify the curve fit method for the curve to be projected. Degree and Tolerance Use this option to specify the maximum degree and the tolerance to control the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Associative . This option is selected by default. Hide Input Curves Hides the input curves. This provides explicit control on the parameterization of output curves. Keep Keeps the input curves intact. Delete Deletes the input curves. Replace Replaces the original input curves with the new projection curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Maximum Bridged Gap Size Available when the Create Curves to Bridge Gaps check box is selected. Lists the following information:      Gap List Number of gaps Number of bridged gaps Number of non-bridged gaps Length of the non-bridged gaps The start and end point coordinate information for each gap When you select a gap in the list. This option is not available when the Associative check box is selected. Lets you specify the disposition of the input curves. You cannot break the associativity later. Settings Lets you specify if curves or points you create are associative to the original objects. This option is not available when the Associative check box is selected. the corresponding gap segments are highlighted in the graphics window.

Keep Parameterization 374 Use this option to inherit the degree. maintaining the arc lengths of the curves as closely as possible. Note The projected arclength will be truly equal (within modeling tolerance) only for special cases of the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING parameterization of the output curve. pole structure and the knot structure from the input curve (or. c. General Joins the output curves to form general spline curves. then an Alert message is displayed to inform you that the specified tolerance is not met. Lets you specify if you want to join the projected curves. in the case of Intersection Curve. the input surface) and apply it to the output curve. Equal Arc Length The Equal Arc Length projection option is used to project curves from an XC-YC plane to a single face. Quintic Joins the output curves to form a degree 5 polynomial spline curve. No Makes the curves created across multiple faces or planes appear as separate curves on each face or plane. It is the converse of world map making. the maximum degree. Auto Fit Use this option to specify the minimum degree. There are several ‗Preserve Length‘ options for mapping and they are discussed below. If the output curves do not meet the specified tolerance. to parametric ‗u-v‘ coordinates on the 3D face being projected to. segments. Align Curve Shape Applies the pole distribution of the input curve to the projected curve regardless of the curve fitting method used. onto a 3D surface. Cubic Join Curves Joins the output curves to form a degree 3 polynomial spline curve. the maximum number of segments and tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. This method can be used to transfer a tread pattern that is created on a plane. where lines on the 3D earth‘s surface are mapped to a planar representation. Arc lengths are preserved by ‗mapping‘ the XC-YC coordinates of points on the curves in the 2D representation.

5.ZC) coordinate system is then used to define the parametric u-v coordinates on the face being projected to. through the reference point and along the XC-vector or the YC-vector. It is perpendicular to the XC vector and the ZC vector. The surface isolines that pass through the projected point become the u-v axes of the parametric coordinate system. Select an XC vector that corresponds to the ‗u‘ parametric direction that is displayed on the face being projected to. then X . choose the Equal Arc Length projection option (if it has not already been selected). The ‗u‘ parametric direction appears on the face being projected to. becomes the origin of the u-v coordinate system. they are ignored for the equal arclength projection.YC. through the reference point and along the XC-vector. The projection of a line in the XC-YC plane. The projection of the line in the XC-YC plane. The projection can be made to only a single face. The reference point should be on or near the XC-YC plane of the curves. You can choose from one of the following options:    Both X and Y . If you select additional faces (and/or planes). will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. Select the ‗reference point‘. then an arclength distance of YC is measured along the v-isocurve to determine 'v'. 3. It will appear as an arrow through the reference point. through the reference point and along the YC-vector. First Y. The projected reference point (XC.First 'u' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of XC along the uisocurve. First X. 6. The YC vector is displayed. It becomes the origin of the XC-YC plane that you are defining. then Y . drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Keep this in mind when selecting the projection direction and the reference point. The projection of any line in the XC-YC plane parallel to the YC-vector will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. and in accordance with the right hand rule.YC) points depend on the Keep Length option. The ‗v‘ parametric direction appears on the face being projected to. will have an arclength equal to the length of the line.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 375 curve being projected. The new 'u' and 'v' coordinates of the projected (XC. the projection vector. that is. and the X vector define the XC-YC plane (the Y vector is orthogonal to the projection vector and to the XC vector). Define the XC-YC coordinate plane by making three selections. The curves selected should be on (or parallel to) this plane for the arclength distances to be preserved by the projection.YC. This YC vector corresponds to the ‗v‘ parametric direction on the face. 2.'u' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of XC along the u-isocurve. Note The reference point.ZC) coordinate system origin. The (XC. for lines through the reference point and parallel to the XC and YC axes of the plane. and the face or faces to project to. The projection direction becomes the normal (or ZC direction) for the XC-YC plane that you are defining. and 'v' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of YC along the v-isocurve. The projection of a line in the XC-YC plane.First 'v' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of YC along the visocurve. Select the projection direction. The 'face' you select must be a face. 4. The XC vector is adjusted if necessary so that it is perpendicular to the ZC vector. After selecting a curve to project. The XC-YC plane that is the basis for the projection is now completely defined. and not a plane or datum plane. Note: The project operation will fail if the projection of the reference point does not fall on the face to project to. then an arclength distance of XC is measured along the u-isocurve to determine 'u'. Defining the XC-YC plane 1.

The projection of any line in the XC-YC plane parallel to the XC-vector will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. The projection of the line in the XC-YC plane. will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. through the reference point and along the XC-vector. which is normal to the two projection vectors. which can be "matched" together internally by NX with the same number of poles. degrees and knots. distance along the surface tangent vector in the u-isocurve direction is preserved. will have an arc length equal to the length of the line. you can also create an exact curve without approximation if:   There is only one curve in each of the two original strings. However. this command creates an approximated B-curve. In most cases. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . delete or replace the input curves. The projection of the line in the XC-YC plane. and strings. Create a combined curve This example shows a metric part that contains an arc in one plane and a string of curves in another plane. Where do I find it? Application Modeling Toolbar Menu Curve→Curve from Curves Drop-down→Combined Projection Insert→Curve from Curves→Combined Projection a. These curves need to be projected and combined.'v' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of YC along the v-isocurve.  Y Only . Specify whether the new curve is associated with the input curves. sketches. X Only . edges. The deviation between each correspondent control pole of the two resulting matched curves is less than the current modeling tolerance along the "non-projection" direction. through the reference point and along the YC-vector. the distance along the surface tangent vector in the v-isocurve direction is preserved. For a line in the XC-YC plane parallel to the YC-vector. Specify whether you want to keep. and 'v' is determined by measuring a distance of YC along the surface tangent vector in the v-isocurve direction. Combined Projection Use the Combined Projection command to combine the projections of two existing curves to create a new curve. faces.'u' is determined by measuring an arclength distance of XC along the u-isocurve. and 'u' is determined by measuring a distance of XC along the surface tangent vector in the u-isocurve direction.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 376  will have an arclength equal to the length of the line. 8. For a line parallel to the XC-vector. You can:    Select curves. hide. Note The two curve projections must intersect.

3. 2. click Curve and select the sketch (line and arc) on the upper plane. under Curve 1. click Curve and select the arc on the lower plane. The sketch is selected and the default direction is set. Under Curve 2. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 4. Under Projection Direction 1. Choose Insert→Curve from Curves→Combined Projection. specify the required direction. In the Combined Projection dialog box. The default direction is set.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 377 1.

Along Vector: Specifies the required direction using either the Vector dialog box. then select objects supported by that vector. Select the required vector type. Specify Lets you specify the origin curve from the loop of curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING You can also change the direction for the second curve similarly. the default direction displayed is normal to the plane of the curves. Appears when you set Direction to Along Vector. Specify Vector  Reverse Direction Settings Associative Reverses the displayed direction Creates combined projection curves which are associated to the input curves and defining data. Inferred Vector: This is the default vector type. or the available vector constructor options. 378 In this example. Combined Projection options Curve 1 and Curve 2 Lets you select the first and second chain of curves to project. When the original curves are modified. Click OK or Apply to create the combined curve projection feature. which is the direction in which you want to project both curve strings. Origin Curve Projection Direction 1 and Projection Direction 2 Lets you specify the direction for the first and second chain of selected curves respectively. Click to see the Vector list. b. Select Curve Reverse Direction Reverses the displayed direction Available if you select a loop of curves for Curve 1 or Curve 2. 5. respectively. using one of the following options: Direction   Normal to Curve Plane: Sets the direction normal to the plane of the curves. Lets you specify a vector for the projection using one of the following options:  Vector Constructor: Opens the Vector dialog box. You can change the vector anytime and select new objects. the combined projection curves also update drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

Specifies the fitting method while creating or editing a combined projection curve feature. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . edges. Replace: Moves the input curve to the combined projection curve position. Mirror Curve Use the Mirror Curve command to create Mirror Curve features across a datum plane or planar surface. You can:     Copy curves. Available methods are:    Curve Fit Cubic — Uses degree 3 splines. Advanced — Rebuilds the curves using only one segment until the number of degrees specified by the maximum degree parameter is reached.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING as necessary. you can enter new values for the maximum number of degrees and the maximum number of segments. Create associative Mirror Curve features. If you select Advanced. Maximum Segments Specifies the default maximum number of segments to use with the curve fitting method for developed curves. Hide: Hides the input curves. Available options are:   Keep: Keeps the input curves. Quintic — Uses degree 5 splines. In the following animation. Create non-associative curves and splines. curve features or sketches. Maximum Degree Specifies the default maximum number of degrees to use with the curve fitting method for developed curves. Input Curves Additional options when the Associative check box is not selected are:   Delete: Deletes the input curves. Move non-associative curves across the plane without have to copy and paste them. 9. Appears when you set the Curve Fit method to Advanced. Appears only for the Advanced type of curve fitting method. curves and edges are mirrored about a datum plane. 379 Specifies what happens to the original input curves when the curves are created.

Mirror curves and edges The following example shows both curves and edges as input.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 380 Where do I find it? Application Modeling Toolbar Menu Curves→Mirror Curve Insert→Curve From Curves→Mirror a. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . In the Mirror Curve dialog box. 2. on the and select the curves 3. Choose Insert→ Curve From Curves→Mirror Curve or click Mirror Curve Curve toolbar. Under Mirror Plane. click Select Curve and/or edges you want to mirror. 1. under Curve. do one of the following: o Select Existing Plane from the Plane list. 4 curves and 4 edges selected 4. click Plane or Face and select the required plane or face from the graphics window.

Depending on your choice for associativity. Click OK or Apply to mirror the selected curves. hide. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and use either the Plane dialog box. Mirror Curve options Curve Lets you select curves. Datum pane highlighted for selection 5. A mirror curve feature is created across the datum plane. 6. or the available plane constructor options to create a plane. edges or curve features of sketches to mirror. (Optional) Clear the Associative check box if you do not want associative mirror curve features. select the appropriate option form the Input Curves list to specify whether you want to keep. delete or replace the selected curves. o b.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING o 381 Select New Plane from the Plane list.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Select Curve Mirror Plane 382 Lets you select the planar face or datum plane across which you want to mirror the selected curves or edges. Appears when Plane is set to Existing Plane. Settings Associative Creates mirror curves which are associated to the input curves and defining data. Appears when Plane is set to New Plane. Available options are:   Input Curves Keep: Keeps the input curves. When the original curves are modified. such as the wrapped face or faces. then select objects supported by that plane. Lets you specify a plane to mirror the selected curves. Select the required plane type. Note You cannot delete defining geometry. 10. the Wrap plane. Additional options available when the Associative check box is not selected are:   Delete: Deletes the input curves. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Wrap/Unwrap Curve Use the Wrap/Unwrap Curve command to wrap curves from a plane onto a conical or cylindrical face or unwrap curves from a conical or cylindrical face onto a plane. the mirror curves also update as necessary. Specifies what happens to the original input curves when the offset curves are created. Select Plane Lets you select a face or an existing datum plane about which to mirror the selected curves. Replace: Moves the input curve to the position of the Mirror Curve. Available options are: Plane   Existing Plane: Selects a face or datum plane to mirror the selected curves about. New Plane: Creates a datum plane. Specify Plane  Inferred : This is the default plane type. Click to see the Plane list. or the input curves until you remove all dependence on that geometry. Available options are:  Full Plane Tool : Opens the Plane dialog box. Hide: Hides the input curves. You can change the plane and select new objects as needed.

Choose Insert→Curve from Curves→Wrap/Unwrap Curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING The following animation illustrates how to wrap a curve on a conical face. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Use the same workflow to unwrap a curve. click Select Curve and select the curve to wrap. 383 Where do I find it? Application Modeling Toolbar Menu Curve→Curve from Curves Drop-down→Wrap/Unwrap Curve Insert→Curve from Curves→Wrap/Unwrap Curve a. In the Type group. choose Wrap. 1. 3. 4. In the Curve group. 2. click Select Face and select the conical face. Under Face. Wrap a curve on a conical face This example shows how to wrap a curve on a conical face.

7. Click Apply or OK. you can create one with the following steps. It is a straight line that is coplanar with the axis of the cone or cylinder. click Select Object and select the plane. Under Plane. The Wrap Curve feature is created. change the Cut Line Angle value as required. If the conical face you selected does not already have an appropriate tangent plane. 6. o Create another datum plane that is tangent to the face and normal to the datum plane created in the previous step. Note A tangent line is an imaginary line that lies on both the wrap face and the wrap plane where they meet. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . o Create a datum plane that goes through both the axis of the cone/cylinder and the tangent line. (Optional) Under Settings.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 384 5. A major advantage to creating a tangent plane with this method is that the datum plane updates to remain tangent to the face whenever the model is updated.

but the selected faces must be on the same cone or cylinder. You can drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Select Curve Face Lets you select a conical or cylindrical face for wrapping or unwrapping curves on which curves will be wrapped.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 385 b. Specify Plane  Inferred : This is the default plane type. Full Plane Tool : Opens the Plane dialog box. this is the face from which selected curves are unwrapped onto a tangent plane. or from which curves will be unwrapped. Select Face For the Unwrap option. For the Wrap option. Select Object Lets you select a plane as the Wrap or Unwrap plane. Available options are:  Wraps a curve from a plane onto a conical or cylindrical face. Plane Lets you select a datum plane or planar face tangent to the conical or cylindrical face. Select the required plane type. this is the face to which selected curves on a tangent plane are wrapped. you can select multiple faces if the face is split. Click to see the Plane list. Unwraps a curve from a conical or cylindrical face onto a plane. then select objects supported by that plane. Note When you wrap a curve. depending on the Type option selected. Wrap/Unwrap Curve options Type Wrap Unwrap Curve Lets you select a curve or curves to wrap or unwrap.

it cuts at the cut line. For the Unwrap option. Wrap/Unwrap Curve terminology Unwrapped cut line Unwrapped cone top Unwrapped cone bottom Cut line. which is the rotation (between 0 and 360 degrees) of the tangent line about the axis of the cone or cylinder. Tangent line. selected curves on this plane are wrapped onto a tangent conical or cylindrical face. You can enter either a number or an expression. Specifies the angle tolerance which ensures that the generated curve is tangent continuous within this tolerance. selected curves on a tangent conical or cylindrical face are wrapped onto this plane. the wrap/unwrap curves update accordingly. It is a straight line that is coplanar with the axis of the cone or cylinder. This is the only time the cut line actually "cuts" anything. it will be unwrapped to the same side of the tangent line. For all other curves. This check box is selected by default. If you modify the input curves. 386 For the Wrap option. if the majority of a curve is to one side of the cut line. that is the maximum distance between a calculated point and the generated curve. Associative c. Cut Line Angle Distance Tolerance Angle Tolerance Specifies the cut line angle. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Settings Creates an associative Wrap or Unwrap Curve feature. Specifies the maximum distance between the input geometry and the resulting body.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING change the plane anytime and select new objects. This line affects where curves are placed after being wrapped or unwrapped. This is an imaginary line that lies on both the wrap face and the wrap plane where they meet. If a closed curve on the face of a cone or cylinder that completely surrounds the axis is unwrapped. This is an imaginary line that is some rotation of the tangent line around the axis of the cone or cylinder.

For the Wrap option. Intersection Curve Use the Intersection Curve command to create intersection curves between two sets of objects. Wrap plane. For the Unwrap option. They can be edited by adding or removing objects to or from the sets of intersection objects. a spline is created. — Intersection Curve feature. For the Wrap option. Intersection Curves are associative and update according to the changes in their defining objects. selected curves on this plane are wrapped onto a tangent conical or cylindrical face. You can select multiple objects in the input sets to perform an intersection operation.     Intersection Curves are generated between two sets of faces or planes. selected curves on this face are wrapped onto a tangent plane. For the Unwrap option. The following graphic shows an example of intersection curves that are created where a sheet body intersects a solid body. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Modeling or Drafting Curve→Intersection Curve drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . M. otherwise. analytic curves (lines. arcs. Curve from Bodies View a topic Intersection Curve Isoparametric Curve Section Curve Extract Curve Extract Virtual Curve 1. — Second set of faces or planes (sheet body). selected curves on a tangent conical or cylindrical face are wrapped onto this plane. and ellipses) are created. When possible. this is the conical or cylindrical face to which selected curves on a tangent plane are wrapped. — First set of faces or planes (body faces selected).[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 387 Wrap face.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Menu (Modeling) Insert→Curve from Bodies→Intersect 388 a. Specify the first set of objects to intersect by doing one of the following: o Use Select Face intersect. o 4. to select faces and/or datum planes as the first set of objects to Use the Specify Plane options to define a datum plane to be included in the first set of objects. (Optional) Select the Keep Selected check box to reuse the objects selected as the first set. (Optional) Select the Keep Selected check box to reuse the objects selected as the second set. 3. For this example. Create an Intersection Curve feature 1. Note You can select only one set at a time. Specify the second set of objects to intersect in one of these ways: o o Use Select Face to select faces or datum planes as the second set of objects. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 5. On the Curve toolbar. For this example. the Face Rule option Single Face is used for selecting the surface for Set 2. the Face Rule option Solid Body is used for selecting the entire solid body for Set 1. Use the Specify Plane options to specify a datum plane to be included in the second set of objects. click Intersection Curve or choose Insert→Curve from Bodies→ Intersect. 2. When you click Apply the objects selected as the first set remain selected so that another Intersection Curve feature can be created using the same set.

Keep Selected When selected. (Optional) In the Settings group. after you create this intersection curve.   Full Plane Tool — Displays the Plane dialog box. 7. clear the Associative check box if you do not want the intersection curve to be associative. b. 8. This check box is selected by default. Specify Plane Set 1 and Set 2 Lets you define a datum plane to be included in the set of objects to intersect. (Optional) Select the required curve fitting method from the Curve Fit list. Intersection Curve dialog box Selection-specific options Select Face Lets you select one or more faces and or datum planes to intersect. lets you reuse the objects you selected as the set for a subsequent Intersection Curve feature. Click OK or Apply to create the Intersection Curve feature.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 389 6. Inferred — Lets you select a plane from the option list. Common Options drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

  390 Settings  Degree and Segments – Use this option to specify the degree and segment of output curves. For complex faces. Advanced Curve Fit Lets you select the curve fit from the Method list. Maximum Segments Sets the maximum number of segments for the fit calculation. if you create an isoparametric curve that runs along the parameter of revolution of a revolved body. then an Alert message is displayed to inform you that the specified tolerance is not met. the maximum number of segments and tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. the maximum degree. Tolerance Sets the tolerance value.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Associative Makes the intersection curve associative. Auto Fit – Use this option to specify the minimum degree. the resulting curve is a spline. Isoparametric curves represent the underlying geometry of the selected surface. Isoparametric Curve Use the Isoparametric Curve command to generate curves on a face along given U/V lines of direction. The modeling tolerance value is used to calculate isoparametric curves on foreign faces and on offsets obtained from non-analytic faces. For example.   Maximum Degree Sets the maximum degree for the fit calculation. If the output curves do not meet the specified tolerance. This provides explicit control on the parameterization of output curves Degree and Tolerance – Use this option to specify the maximum degree and the tolerance to control the parameterization of the output curve. 2. you The default value is the Distance Tolerance value that is set in the Modeling Preferences dialog box. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . the resulting curve is an arc.

click Isoparametric Curve . 2. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Create uniform isoparametric curves This example shows how to create uniform isoparametric curves. On the Curve toolbar. Click the surface on which to create the isoparametric curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling. 1. Shape Studio Curve→ Isoparametric Curve Insert→ Curve from Bodies→ Isoparametric Curve 391 a.

Optional: Click the Spacing check box and drag the slider to adjust the distance between the isoparametric curves. 4. 392   In the Iso Curve group. select U and V to create both U and V isoparametric curves. from the Location list. From the Direction list. select Uniform.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 3. 5. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Type 7 in the Number box to create seven isoparametric curves.

b. Create a mix of isoparametric curves This example shows how to create isoparametric curves that are uniform and between two points. 1. click Isoparametric Curve . drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 6. Click the surface on which to create the isoparametric curves. On the Curve toolbar. 393 Click Apply. 2.

From the Location list. 4. the V direction. 2. Type 5 in the Number box. 1. or both directions along which to create drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Once selected. select Uniform. select V. 6. 2. Select the same face again. From the Direction list. Click Apply. U and V direction arrows display on the face to show its direction. from the Direction list. Select a point on two of the V direction isoparametric curves. From the Location list. . On the Snap Point toolbar select Point on Curve. 3. Click Apply.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 3. Isoparametric Curve options Face Lets you select the face on which to create isoparametric curves Select Face Iso Curve Direction Lets you select the U direction. 5. 4. 394 1. select Between Points. select U. In the Iso Curve group. 5. 4. Type 7 in the Number box to create seven uniform isoparametric curves. 3. c.

395 Lets you specify a location method to place isoparametric curves on the selected face. Location Through Points Places an isoparametric curve through each specified point on the selected face. Choose from the following: Uniform Places isoparametric curves at an equal distance from one another on the selected face. between two drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . V Specifies the V direction for isoparametric curves. U and V Specifies both the U and V direction for isoparametric curves. Choose one of the following: U Specifies the U direction for isoparametric curves.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING isoparametric curves. Between Points Places isoparametric curves at an equal distance from one another.

3. Lets you specify points on the selected face to use to create isoparametric curves. Number Specifies the total number of isoparametric curves to create. right-click and choose Delete. Isoparametric Curve notes   When the selected face is planar the extracted isoparametric curves do not follow the direction of the face and edges as with a non-planar face. To delete a point. d.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING specified points. but are always either vertical or horizontal. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Section Curve Use the Section Curve command to create intersection geometry between specified planes and bodies. or curves. left-click and drag. 396 Available when Location is set to Through Points and Between Points. Available when Location is set to Uniform and Between Points. You can move or delete points you specify: Specify Point   To move a point. Specifying a point outside the face bounds using the Through Points option may generate unexpected results and is not recommended. Spacing Specifies a constant distance between each isoparametric curve. faces. Available when Location is set to Uniform and Between Points.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 397 Selected object to section Defined planes to cut sections Resulting section curves   Analytic section curves (lines. In the Object to Section group. For this example. the outside faces of the bottle are selected as objects for the section curve. arcs or conics) are created if the face is planar. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling. or a bounded plane. From the Type option list. 3. Create a section curve using selected planes 1. with Select Object active. click Section Curve or choose Insert→Curve from Bodies→Section. On the Curve toolbar. select Selected Planes. select one or more objects on which you want to create section curves. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Drafting Curve→Section Curve (Modeling) Insert→Curve from Bodies→Section a. analytic. 2. Section curves are trimmed at edges and holes.

None were made in this example. or Specify Plane For the following example. Click OK or Apply to create the section curve feature. 6. the datum plane is selected. In the Settings group.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 398 4. to select an existing plane. In the Section Plane group. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . use Select Plane to define a new plane.. 5. make changes if needed.

the XC-ZC plane is selected.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 399 b. In the Base Plane group. click Section Curve or choose Insert→Curve from Bodies→Section. the outside faces of the bottle are selected as objects for the section curves. select Parallel Planes. In the Plane Location group. 2. 3. In the Object to Section group. From the Type option list. select one or more objects on which you want to create section curves. The sectioning planes will be positioned between the start and end locations. click Specify Plane the sectioning planes to be parallel to For this example. with Select Object active. For this example. 4. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Create section curves using a set of parallel planes 1. On the Curve toolbar. and select (or specify) the plane you want 5. enter values for the Start and End locations of the planes.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING For this example. 8. make changes if needed. select Radial Planes. 400 7. You now can change any of the parameters. 9. From the Type option list. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . select one or more objects on which you want to create section curves.0 and in End the value entered is 8. For this example. 3. In Step distance enter a value for the distance between successive planes. For this example. Click OK or Apply to create the section curve feature. the outside faces of the bottle are selected as objects for the section curves. c. The preview shows a series of plane symbols. 2. with Select Object active. None were made for this example. In the Settings group. In the Object to Section group. Create a set of section curves using radial planes 1.0 6.0. in Start the value entered –8. On the Curve toolbar. the value entered in Step is 8. click Section Curve or choose Insert→Curve from Bodies→Section.

0 8. You can now change any of the parameters if needed.0 7. select an existing point. or define a new point. For this example. that will lie on the base (initial) plane in the series. These values represent the angles between which the sectioning planes are placed. with Specify Vector active. In the Point on Reference Plane group. 5.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 401 4. 6. o o o drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . For this example. For this example none were changed. All the radial planes will pivot around this vector. select or specify a vector. For this example the following values are entered: Start: 0. In the Plane Location group. For this example. the ZC axis is used. In the Radial Axis group. The preview is updated. Enter a value in Step.0 End: –180. with Specify Point active. enter values for the two limiting angles in the Start and End fields. the following value is entered: Step: –45. a quadrant point on the top of the circular edge is selected. This represents the angle between successive planes. A series of planes is displayed in the preview.

click Section Curve or choose Insert→Curve from Bodies→Section. For this example.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 402 9. Create section curves using planes perpendicular to a curve 1. In the Object to Section group. the outside faces of the bottle are selected as objects for the section curves. with Select Object active. From the Type option list. d. Click OK or Apply to create the radial section curves. select one or more objects on which you want to create section curves. 2. 3. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . On the Curve toolbar. select Planes Perpendicular to Curve.

select the method of plane spacing. Equal Arc Length is selected. the spline in front of the bottle is selected. 6. For this example. You can now change any selections made. In the Plane Location group. select a curve or edge along 5. active. Click OK or Apply to create the section curves. with Select Curve or Edge which the perpendicular planes are to be created. the values used are: o o o Start: 10.0 End: 90. Enter the values for the type of spacing you have selected.0 Number of Copies: 5 The preview shows the series of planes you have defined. from the Spacing option list. For this example. For this example. 7. or parameters chosen or values entered. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 403 4. In the Curve or Edge group.

You can select one or more planes. You can control the spacing of the section planes along the curve. Parallel Planes — Creates section curves using a specified series of parallel planes. Specify Plane lets you use the Full Plane Tool or the plane option list to define a new plane to be used as the section plane. Section Curve dialog box Type Lists the methods to create section curves.  Specify Plane lets you specify the base plane. and the start and end angles. Radial Planes — Creates section curves using a specified set of planes that ―fan out‖ from a specified axis.     Selected Planes — Creates section curves using selected individual existing planes or those that you define in the process. You specify a pivot axis and a point to define the base plane.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 404 e. and the start and end distances. a step value (angle between planes) . or use the plane option list to specify the Parallel Planes drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Planes Perpendicular to Curve — Creates section curves using specified multiple section planes perpendicular to a curve or edge. Base Plane lets you define the base plane for the parallel series of planes. Type-Specific Options Section Plane lets you select or define planes for sectioning. You can click Full Plane Tool base plane. a step value (distance between planes).  Selected Planes  Select Plane lets you select an existing plane as the section plane. You specify a base plane.

   405 Start — The distance from the base plane for the first plane in the series.  You can click Point Constructor or use the option list to do so. Plane Locations lets you specify the radial series. measured as percentage value along the curve. Reverse Direction vector. and Geometric Progression: o o o Start — Specifies the location of the first plane. End — Specifies the location of the end plane. Curve or Edge lets you select the curve or edge along which the perpendicular planes will be calculated. End — The angle from the base plane to the last plane in the series. o Geometric Progression — Plane spacing along the curve are based on a geometric ratio. Common options for Equal Arc Length. Plane Location lets you specify the number and the spacing of the planes.  Planes Perpendicular to Curve Spacing lets you space the planes along the selected curve or edge using one of the following methods in the list: o Equal Arc Length — Planes are at equal arc lengths along the curve. Radial Axis lets you specify a vector around which the radial planes will pivot.   Specify Vector You can click Vector Constructor to define the vector.    Start — The angle from the base plane to the first plane in the series. Step — The angle between the planes in the series. o Chordal Tolerance — Plane spacing is based on a chordal tolerance (distance between the selected curve and a direct line between the planes). or use the option list allows you to reverse the direction of the specified Radial Planes Point on Reference Plane lets you specify a point to define the base plane for the radial series. measured as percentage value along the curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Plane Location lets you define the series of parallel planes. o Incremental Arc Length — Planes are at specified increments along the curve. Equal Parameters. Number of Copies — Displays the number of planes along the drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Step — The distance between the planes in the series. o Equal Parameters — Planes are at equal spaces based on the parameterization of the curve. End — The distance from the base plane for the last plane in the series.

   Settings Cubic — Uses degree 3 splines. Quintic — The section curves are joined to form quintic polynomial spline curves. Quintic — Uses degree 5 splines. facet).  Note Associative section curves cannot be created from faceted bodies or planes. They can be bodies Objects to Section Select Object (solid. Unique option for Geometric Progression: o 406 Ratio — The spacing between the planes (measured along the arc length of the selected curve) varies. Cubic — Joins the section curves to form cubic polynomial spline curves. sheet.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING curve. Curve Fit specifies the Curve Fit Method used to create the section curves if splines are needed by NX (Analytic curves are created whenever possible). This option is not available for the Advanced type of Curve Fit method. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Options common to all Types lets you select the objects to be sectioned. Join Curves specifies the join curves type. the resulting section curves cannot be joined if the object to section is a face. Note When Associative is selected.     No — Creates section curves as separate curves on each face or plane. Each succeeding spacing is equal to the previous spacing multiplied by the ratio. This option is not available for the Advanced type of Curve Fit method. General — Joins the section curves to form general spline curves. Advanced — Displays fields where you can enter values for the maximum degree and the maximum number of segments. faces. Unique option for Incremental Arc Length: o Arc Length— Displays the specified arc length distance between the planes. Unique option for Chordal Tolerance: o Chordal Tolerance — Lets you specify the spacing of the planes based on the specified maximum chordal tolerance. Associative — Creates an associative section curve. or planes. curves.

Lets you specify a value for the sample distance. The distance between the points is specified by the Sample Distance. Creates curves where the draft angle on a set of faces is constant. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Most extracted curves are not associative. Edge Curves Silhouette Curves All in Work View Isocline Curves Shadow Outline Curves created using All in Work View. but you can choose to create associative isocline or shadow outline curves. The following extract options are available: Extract Curve Dialog Options Extracts curves from specified edges. and splines) using the edges and faces of one or more existing bodies. Extract Curve This option creates geometry (lines. Note If the feature string has any gaps then the ends of the chains are highlighted (using big red dots). Creates curves from all visible edges (including silhouette edges) of bodies in the work view. Output Sample Points Creates points instead of section curves. Undo Result exits the result display and allows you to make changes. 4. or Shadow Outline are view-dependent in the view that was the work view when they were created. Silhouette Curves. Show Result Preview computes the feature and displays it. The bodies are not changed. Creates curves from silhouette edges. arcs. conics. Sample Distance (available when the Output Sampled Points check box is selected). Creates curves that show only the outline of the bodies in the work view.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 407 Non-associative Settings — appear only when the Associative check is cleared:    Group Objects Creates a group containing the section curves.

choose OK and the curves are created. the hidden curves are created in dashed or drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . by name. Edge Curves 408 This option lets you create curves along the edges of one or more existing bodies. the silhouette curves are immediately created and you are prompted to select another body. curves are created along the visible edges only. c. Select the desired edges one at a time.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING a. including any silhouettes. Silhouette Curves Creates outline (silhouette) curves for bodies (lines where curved faces change from pointing toward the eye to pointing away from the eye). Note If the body has no edges (as in the case of a complete sphere). all edges in a body. All in Work View Allows you to create all edge curves. The creation of the curves is an approximation. or use the menu to select all edges in a face. consider using the Silhouette Curves method. controlled by the modeling distance tolerance. b. After all the edges are selected. If the hidden edges are dashed or thin. The total number of edges selected is displayed in the Status line. If the work view's hidden edges are Invisible. and you can use Back to deselect edges. Note Silhouette curves are not displayed when they are coincident with real edges. Silhouette curves are created viewdependent in the work view. or by chaining. When you select the desired body. from the visible edges of the solid bodies and sheet bodies in the work view.

Note The created curves are not the same as those created using the Edge Curves option. The figure below shows single isocline curves created on a sphere. and the Hidden Edges option set to Invisible in the Visualization Preferences dialog box. or on multiple faces. with the +ZC axis as the reference axis. an angle. at 10 and 40 degrees from the reference vector. You can create isocline curves on any selected face. After you choose All in Work View. while creates an exact copy of the selected edge.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 409 thin font. the results will be different in most cases. The figure below shows a sheet body with a family of isocline curves placed on it at 5 degree intervals. If you compare the definitions of the two curves as shown in the Information window. All curves are created view-dependent in the work view. you must have the Rendering Style set to Static Wireframe. All in Work View curves approximates the curve from the visible display. the curves are immediately created. You may need to flip the direction vector to get corresponding isocline curves on adjacent faces. Curves are created along any displayed grid lines. They are created based on the surface normal. and a vector direction. from 0 to 90. d. Some uses for isocline curves are: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . To use this option. Isocline Curves Isocline curves are one or more curves that are drawn on a set of faces. You can see the relationship between the angle and where the isocline curve is created.

this option is unavailable. (If you chose Single. The system will try to rebuild the curves without segments until the number of degrees specified by the Maximum Degree parameter is reached.) Start Angle / The angles at which a family of isocline curves begins and ends. controlled by this option. especially when using the Single option. (You can also create isocline curves that are nonassociative. this option is unavailable. and a vector. If tolerances cannot be met with the Maximum Degree. Note Isocline curves are created by using the surface normal. Cubic Cubic uses degree 3 splines. (If you chose Single. You can select Cubic. the Isocline Angle dialog appears. isocline curves can give you a more detailed analysis of the face. segments are added until the number defined for Maximum Segments is reached. an angle.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING   410   To split a surface. To create a "draft angle map" of a face. Quintic Quintic uses degree 5 splines. To help in construction of parting surfaces on a mold or casting. If the maximum degree and maximum segments combined still does not allow the tolerance to be met.) Tolerance The creation of the curves is an approximation. Reversing the surface normal of a selected face. you are first asked to specify a reference vector. (If you chose Family. You can use them to analyze a face. whose default is the distance tolerance from the Modeling Preferences dialog. the curves are created and a message displays that they do not meet the specified tolerance. as specified in Modeling Preferences. To create extracted curves that are associative and update when the faces from which they were extracted are modified. the isocline curves will be associated to the faces from which they were extracted. similar to the Reflection Lines capability in Analysis→Face. Advanced Selecting Advanced displays fields where you can enter your own values for the maximum number of degrees and the maximum number of segments. or a family of isocline curves.) Step The increment between each curve for a family of isocline curves.) When you choose Isocline Curves. These Curve Fit Method options are available on this dialog only when you are editing an drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Single / Family . these End Angle options are unavailable. may result in a different isocline curve. you can change the Curve Fit Method that was originally used to create the Method isocline curve(s). However. Curve Fit During edit. Quintic or Advanced fitting methods. Isocline Angle(s) Dialog Options Lets you create a single isocline curve. Associate If this option is toggled ON. After you have done that. Angle The angle at which the single isocline curve will be created.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 5. Note When Associate is ON. or change the Start Angle. using the Vector Constructor. Select one or more faces. You can change the Angle of Single isocline curves. The original direction is shown with a temporary conehead vector. Specify the reference vector. Procedure 411 To create isocline curves: 1. 3. you may have to choose OK in multiple dialogs before the edit occurs. Shadow Outline This option produces an outline of view-dependent curves of the bodies displayed in the work view. A dialog appears with these editing options: Feature Parameters Brings up the Isocline Angle(s) dialog. For a single isocline curve. End Angle. except that   The Associate option has been removed. with hidden edges set to invisible and select Shadow Outline. If Associate is OFF. For a family of isocline curves. Editing Associative Isocline Curve Features To edit an associative ISOCLINE_CURVE feature: 1. identical to the one used to create isocline curves. No curves are created from interior details. 2. The figures below show examples of parts with shadow outline curves that have been extracted. enter the Start Angle. enter the Angle. and Step (increment) between each curve. or vice versa. only faces from the work part can be selected. Choose Single or Family. End Angle. The Curve Fit Method panel is available. You can also change a Single curve to a Family of curves. Ensure that Associate is toggled ON if you want the isocline curves to be associative. set the work view to the Static Wireframe display mode. Choose Edit→Feature→ Parameters and select an isocline curve. or Step of Family isocline curves. To execute this option. Lets you select new faces for the feature from the work part. Or choose Edit→Curve→ Parameters and select an isocline curve. 4. The Isocline Angle(s) dialog appears. e. Note For all of the editing options.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING isocline curve feature. 2. Edit Direction Replace Faces Lets you modify the isocline direction using the Vector Constructor. faces can be selected from any part in the assembly.

unless the operation was performed in Drafting. 5. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and virtual intersections of blend faces. If your results are not satisfactory. The shadow outline curves are not associative to the bodies from which they were created. when the bodies are changed. blend centerlines. In that case. Extract Virtual Curve Use the Extract Virtual Curve command to create curves from face rotation axes. you can try making the tolerance smaller and executing Shadow Outline again.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 412 This function is sensitive to the value found in the Preferences→ Visualization→ Line→ Curve Tolerance field. the old shadow outline is deleted and a new shadow outline is created as part of the drawing view update process.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING You can:      413 Extract the axis of revolved faces. Select multiple faces to create the virtual curve. Extract the centerline of blend faces. Where do I find it? Application Toolbar Menu Modeling Curve→Extract Virtual Curve Insert→Curve from Bodies→Extract Virtual Curve a. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The following graphic shows the virtual blend centerline curve (blue) of the highlighted blend face. Extract the virtual intersection of a blend face. Create an associative virtual curve feature. Create a virtual curve feature This example shows how to create a Rotation Axis type of virtual curve feature from a set of revolved and circular faces.

4. 2. click Extract Virtual Curve Bodies→Extract Virtual Curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Set the type to Rotation Axis 3. On the View toolbar. 5. revolved and circular faces are selected from which the virtual curves are extracted. . click See-Thru to view the virtual curve feature better. 414 or choose Insert→Curve from For this example. The virtual curve feature is created.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 1. On the Curve toolbar. Click OK or Apply. Select the required faces.

Note Only rolling ball (constant radius) face and edge blends are supported. toroidal. 415 Rotation Axis Lets you extract the axis of a cylindrical. Virtual Intersection Lets you extract the virtual intersection of the surfaces of the two construction faces of the input blend face to create a virtual intersection curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . or revolved face to construct a rotation axis virtual curve. Blend Centerline Type list Lets you extract the centerline of a blend face to construct a virtual centerline curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING b. The following graphic shows the virtual blend centerline curve (blue) of the highlighted blend face. The following graphic shows the rotation axis virtual curves (blue) for the revolved faces. conical. Extract Virtual Curve dialog box Type Spcifies the type of virtual curve to create.

or revolved face to extract the virtual curve. toroidal. Settings Associative Creates an associative virtual curve feature. You can select more than one face. Face Available only for the Rotation Axis type. Select Blend Face You can select more than one face. Select Revolved Face Lets you select a cylindrical. Lets you select a blend face to extract the virtual curve. Available for the Blend Centerline and Virtual Intersection types. conical. N.Edit Curves View a topic X-Form Edit Curve Parameters Divide Curve Edit Fillet Stretch Curve drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 416 The following graphic shows the virtual intersection curve (blue) of the highlighted blend face. Note Only rolling ball (constant radius) face and edge blends are supported.

See Arc/Circle creation Arc or Circle (regardless of how it was created) Note If the arc or circle is not associative. 2.5 dialog boxes. X-Form Use the X-Form command to edit b-surfaces or spline curves by dynamically manipulating the pole locations. Dialog box information See Line creation Note If the line is not associative. Available by choosing Edit→Curve→X-form. The procedure is: click Edit Curve Parameters Curve Selected Line (regardless of how it was created) . the dialog box header is Nonassociative Line. See Editing a Spline Spline Note If you edit the spline by double-clicking it. or on the Edit Surface toolbar.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING All (Legacy) Parameters (Legacy) Trim Curve Trim Corner Curve Length Smooth Spline Shape by Template 417 1. see Studio Spline Studio Spline Ellipse See Studio Spline See Editing an Ellipse 3. Edit Curve Parameters Use Edit Curve Parameters to edit a curve using the creation dialog box for the type of curve selected. All (Legacy) The options under All (Legacy) let you modify existing non-associative curves using the pre-NX7. Note All (Legacy) is only available by adding it to a toolbar or a menu using Customize→Commands. the dialog box header is Non-associative Arc/Circle. and then select the curve you wish to edit. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

This option is also found under Edit Curve Length. Use this option to update your model after making edits to curves. Edit Fillet . or to a total curve length. while simultaneously stretching or shrinking selected lines. Edit Curve (All) Dialog Options For Non-Associative Curves Edit Curve Parameters . or cursor locations) and the segment(s) of curve selected for trimming.Lets you edit the parameters (that is. The arc length increment is the length used to extend or trim from the original curve. Curve As Original breaks the associativity between the curve and its original defining data (you receive a warning).to automatically remove imperfections in the curvature properties of a B-spline. Stretch Curve .Use this method to extend or trim a curve by its total arc length. or by Dragging it. points.Divides a curve into a series of like segments. arcs. The creation and editing of these types of curves is covered in the same section of the documentation (for example. Edit Associative By Parameter lets you edit an associative curve while preserving its associativity. Edit Arc/Circle You can edit an arc or circle two ways: by editing its Parameters. or splines) based on the bounding entities selected (curves. Lets you enter a value for the length of the extended or trimmed arc. Trim Curve .Trims or extends a curve by a given curve length increment. The Point Method options let you specify points relative to existing geometry.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 418 You can edit a number of curve types using a Selection Steps dialog similar to the one that was used to create them. faces. Trim Corner . planes. Incremental . thereby forming a corner.Adjusts the endpoints of curves (lines.Lets you edit existing fillets. The All (Legacy) option opens a dialog with all non-associative edit curve functions. edges. the defining data) of most types of curves. By Complement Lets you create the complement of an existing arc.Lets you move geometric objects. Arc Length Total . Smooth Spline . Divide Curve . drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Arc Length Update . or by specifying a cursor location or using the Point Constructor. Point Method Used to change the position of a line endpoint. Total arc length Trim Method is the distance from the start of a curve to the end of the curve. you will use the Snap Point tool instead of the Point Method options. Curve Length .Use this method to extend or trim a curve by a given arc length increment. following the exact path of the curve. Arc Display If you are editing a spline. In some cases. without exiting the Edit Curve dialog. this option lets you display the original spline for comparison Original Spline during the editing. see Offset Curve and Wrap/Unwrap Curve). conics.Trims two curves to their intersection point.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Click on the following topics for additional information for editing non-associative curves: Editing a Line Editing an Arc or Circle Editing an Ellipse Editing a Spline 419 Use Edit→ Transform to change the location of an associative or non-associative curve. Editing Associative Curves To edit associative (feature) curves. The Point Method options let you specify points relative to existing geometry. you are warned if a transformation would have this effect. such as copy. The Edit Curve Parameters (Legacy) dialog box includes the following options: Edit Curve Parameters (Legacy) Dialog Options Used to change the position of a line endpoint. this option lets you display the original spline for comparison during the editing. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Point Method Edit Arc/Circle By Complement Arc Display Original Spline Edit Associative Curve Update . If you are editing a spline. By Parameter lets you edit an associative curve while preserving its associativity. followed by MB3→ Edit Parameters The Edit→ Feature dialog listing For more information on associative curves. some functions. Lets you create the complement of an existing arc. You can use this option to update your model after making edits to curves. For cases like a copy operation or circular/rectangular instance arrays. without exiting the Edit Curves dialog. no warnings are issued. However. select the curve in one of the following places:    The graphics window. Parameters (Legacy) This option lets you edit most types of curves. Note Parameters (Legacy) is only available by adding either it or All (Legacy) to a toolbar or a menu using Customize→Commands. When this icon is active and you select a curve. or by specifying a cursor location or using the Point Constructor. see Edit Curve Parameters. followed by MB3→ Edit Parameters The Part Navigator. or by Dragging it. You can edit an arc or circle two ways: by editing its Parameters. remove the relationship between a dependent curve and its associated geometry. In many cases. 4. you are automatically put into edit mode for that type of curve. As Original breaks the associativity between the curve and its original defining data (you receive a warning).

and/or end angle fields in the dialog bar and press <Enter>. To create the complement of an arc. Simply select one or more arcs and choose Complement Arc from the Edit Curve Parameters dialog. 2. You can also change an arc to its complement. you will be in dragging mode. and you can change the start or end angle. The line can now be rubberbanded from the fixed end. press MB1. Select the line. and drag it. rather than the arc itself. For example. To change a line's endpoint: 420 1. Specify a new position using any of the Point Method options on the dialog. Select the line end to be modified. You can use this method to move an arc or circle to another control point. You can also select other geometry to control the size of the arc. Edit a Line You can edit a line by changing its endpoints or its parameters (length and angle). avoiding its control points. YC. Edit an Arc or Circle You can change an arc or circle's parameters by entering new values in the dialog bar. ZC location in the dialog bar. You can move an arc or circle to a new location. avoiding its control points. To change a line's parameters: 1. such as the end of a line. Move the cursor to a new location and press MB1. regardless of the setting on the dialog.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING a. When it is the size you want. Select the arc or circle. select it. avoiding its control points. Select the center of the arc or circle (release MB1). 2. as follows: 1. b. Key in new values in the radius. If you select the arc's endpoints. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . you can select a line to make the arc tangent to it. 2. You can use all the same techniques that are valid during arc creation. then press <Enter>. or you can change it by dragging. diameter. 2. Dragging There are two ways you can change an arc or circle using Dragging mode:  To change the radius of the arc or circle. start angle. or enter a new XC. Parameters To change an arc or circle using Parameters mode: 1. you must be in Parameters mode. regardless of the editing mode that is active. or the center of another circle. Key in new values for the length and/or angle in the dialog bar. or you can pick the endpoint of another arc to make the selected arc pass through it.

Select the edit method you wish to use. end angle. You can also select other geometry to control the start and/or end angles of the arc. select it at the desired endpoint and drag it. one of the following two messages occur: Semimajor value cannot be zero. 3. You are allowed to select a maximum of 128 ellipses. you can use all the same techniques that are valid during arc creation. Note Any associated drafting objects are automatically updated when you change any of the ellipse values. the selection list is emptied and the values are reset to zero. Error Messages Semimajor and semiminor values must be nonzero. The absolute value is used for the semimajor and semiminor values. Again. Edit a Spline This option provides several methods that let you modify a spline. All selected ellipses become identical. the values of the last selected ellipse become the default values. For example. This option behaves much the same as that for creating an ellipse. This allows editing by inheritance: 1. Select the ellipse with the desired values. if you enter a negative five for the semimajor axis.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  421 To change the start or end angle of the arc or circle. You can select a line to stop the arc at its intersection with the line. to edit a spline. Any start angle. c. When you select multiple ellipses. or rotation angle value is accepted. or you can select an endpoint of another object. If you enter a zero for either of these values. d. and that endpoint is projected onto the arc to determine its start angle. Select a spline to edit. 2. The following options are available for modifying a spline: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . you must: 1. Edit an Ellipse Use the Parameters (Legacy) option to edit one or more existing ellipses. After you choose Apply. The new angle is not added to the current rotation angle value. Select ellipse(s) to edit. Semiminor value cannot be zero. press MB1. 2. A new rotation angle is applied to the original position of the ellipse. Define the parameters to use in editing the selected spline. When the angle is correct. this is interpreted as positive five. Choose Apply. In general. 3. Undo resets the ellipse(s) back to their original state.

Micro Positioning Deviation Lets you move a point by 1/10th of the vector specified by the original location and the location of the cursor. Smooth Lets you reduce variations in the curvature distribution of an open spline. using the Change Degree or Change Stiffness options. Undo Restores the spline to its state prior to the last modification. Fit Reduces the data required to define a spline by "fitting" it to existing points that define the spline. Change Slope Lets you change the slope at the spline's defining points.  Edit Point Edit Point Dialog Options Edit Point Method Move Point lets you move single or multiple points. allowing very fine adjustments to the curve. When you edit a spline that was created through defining points. Move Point By Destination Point defines the new position by dragging or by using the Point Constructor. Remove Point lets you remove points from a spline. If more than one modification is made. (Undo is also available on several of the dialogs for spline edit operations. the following warning message is displayed: Defining Data and its Associated Dimensions Will Be Deleted If you continue with the edit. add. you may choose Undo as many times as needed. the defining points are removed. Lets you evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. Defining Data this option resets the spline to its defining data. or remove the defining points of a spline. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Multiple Points Change Lets you modify the shape of a curve by changing its degree while preserving the number Stiffness of control poles. Restore When edits to the spline have caused it to be out of synchronization with its defining data. Degree Move Lets you move a segment of a curve without affecting the rest of the curve. Edit Pole Provides options for editing the poles of a spline.) You can display the original spline during editing by turning the Display Original Spline option ON. and ZC coordinates. Delta Offset defines the new position as specified changes in the XC. This option only works when you are dragging the point. YC. Change Lets you change the curvature at the spline's defining points. Add Point lets you add points to a spline. This option is only effective for Edit Pole operations.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 422 Edit Spline Menu Dialog Edit Point Lets you move. Curvature Change Lets you change the degree of the spline.

By Vectors draws a scaled vector from the minimum-distance point on the spline toward the defining point. the following error message is displayed: Not Enough Defining Data for Current Degree Move Point There are three ways to move a single point:    Place the cursor over the point and drag it to its new location before releasing MB1. When you use the dragging method. select the point and enter the offset values in the Delta Offset dialog. slopes or curvatures. This occurs if the spline was not created using the Through Points or Fit method. Lets you identify a file from which points will be read in. select the point you want to edit by clicking near it. If any of your edits (removing points. Redisplays the spline's points. or The points generated by the system if the curve does not have defining points. (This method does not depend on the setting of the Move Point By options. Once you choose an Edit Point method. the selectable points are:   The defining points used to create the spline. Move Point also lets you select multiple points. or you can choose By Vectors or By Markers for a graphical display of the deviations whose minimum distance between spline and defining point exceeds the value entered in Threshold. Multiple points are selected by dragging a rectangle around them. Deviation is used to evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. For each qualifying defining point. If you choose Delta Offset as the Move Point By option. each drag operation is considered to be one modification. The length of the vector is determined by scaling the actual deviations. Points From File drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Once the points are selected. etc. you have two choices for moving them:   If Destination Point is the current option. The closest point is selected. or when the spline has been edited and the defining points removed. None is the default option. the points drag as a group. select the point (click near it) and use the Point Constructor to specify the new location. It determines which deviations are displayed. Edit Point Parameters For the Move Point and Remove Point options. Restores the spline to its state prior to the last modification.) result in the spline not having sufficient defining data.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Threshold Redisplay Data Points From File Undo 423 This option's default is the Tolerance used in creating the spline. the Delta Offset dialog is displayed to let you enter the offset values. By Markers puts special markers around the qualifying data points.) If Destination Point is the current Move Point By option. If Delta Offset is the current option.

you cannot specify an existing defining point. an error message is displayed: Specified Point is Already a Defining Point Note If the edited spline was created using the Fit method. If you attempt to do this. Edit Pole Dialog Options Edit Method Move Pole lets you move one or more poles to a defined point or by a defined distance. exactly as when creating the spline originally. and provides graphical feedback in real time. just select it. which appears if you choose OK in the dialog.  Edit Pole This option lets you edit the poles of a spline.) When you indicate where to add a new point. To remove a point. Tangents or curvatures assigned to the original curve are not maintained.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 424 You can choose Points From File and identify a file. Add Point After you specify the location of the new point. but the original degree and closed status of the curve are retained if possible. You must use a Series of Points with Slope and Curvature type file. the modified spline is displayed. The points from the file are read in and replace the original points. the degree is reduced. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . (New points can be selected from the graphics window or from the Point Constructor. If there are not enough points in the file to maintain the curve's degree. the least squares algorithm is used to edit the curve. Remove Point You can use this option to remove points from an existing spline.

the micro positioning mode can be temporarily set with the <Crtl> key.Controls the number of teeth visible in the curvature comb.Controls the displayed length of the curvature comb's teeth. Points From Lets you identify a file from which points will be read in. Delta Offset defines the new position as specified changes in the XC. An option menu lets you choose the level of precision (number of decimal places) for the movement. This option only works when you are dragging the pole. Let you control the shape of the spline by restricting the movement of the pole or the shape of the spline. Drag it to the left to decrease the number of teeth. a face. Either enter a value in Scale or drag the slider.Clicking this button automatically sets the scale factor to an optimal size. a set of curves. Pressing <Ctrl> and MB1 while dragging the pole automatically engages Micro Positioning. Comb Density .When the micro positioning lock button is unlocked. 425 Match End Slope lets you match the slopes of a spline and another curve at selected endpoints. or a facet body. Opens the Deviation Gauge dialog. and ZC coordinates. YC. Displays a 2D curvature comb to let you graphically analyze splines to detect irregularities such as inflections. micro positioning is effective all of the time. File Restores the spline to its state prior to the last modification.000th of the vector specified by the original location and the location of the cursor.. Suggest Scale Factor . flat curvature and sharp corners. as described above. Lets you define the plane used with the On a Plane constrain option. a curve) and a defined reference. Drag the slider to the right to increase the number of teeth. Lets you define the vector used with the Along Direction constrain option. The default is unlocked. This dialog can provide graphical and numerical feedback about the deviation between the target geometry (i. Scale and Slider . Lock Button . The decimal places selected from the option menu is a multiplying factor that is used to scale the dragging gesture. Constrain Define Drag Direction Define Drag Plane Micro Positioning 2D Curvature Comb Deviation Check See Deviation Gauge in the Shape Studio Help for details. Move Pole By Destination Point defines the new position by dragging or by using the Point Constructor. If the lock button is locked. When you use the dragging Undo drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Add Pole lets you add a pole to the control polygon of a spline. Match End Curvature lets you match the curvatures of a spline and another curve at selected endpoints. to 1/10.e. The reference can be a set of points. Lets you move a pole using micro-movements. You can edit the target curve while having instantaneous graphical and numerical feedback of the deviation with the given reference. allowing very fine adjustments to the curve.

Holding the <Shift> key while using MB1 to drag a pole or multiple poles constrains the end cursor position in the horizontal or vertical direction (with respect to the position of the cursor when MB1 was first pressed). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . To control the size of the comb. These options are: the Move Pole By options. End Slope. or you can drag the Scale slider. Define Drag Direction. Common Options Once you choose an Edit Pole Method. it is automatically hidden. you can enter real values in the Scale data entry field. each drag operation is considered to be one modification. End Curvature or Along Direction).[NX8 HELP] – MODELING method. This cursor constraint works if no directional constraint is currently active (i. Define Drag Plane. Constrain. The closest pole is selected. If a 3D curvature comb was displayed when you turned on the 2D Curvature Comb option.. Holding the <Ctrl> key while using MB1 to drag a pole turns on Micro Positioning. for Match End Slope and Match End Curvature. For fine adjustments. 426 Warning When you add or move poles. any dimensions associated with the spline's defining points are lost. and Micro Positioning. 2D Curvature Comb The ends of the vectors of the 2D curvature comb are joined. Use the Comb Density slider to modify the number of combs displayed. you can use the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard (the slider must have focus for the arrow keys to work). The cursor will snap to whichever is closest. the closest endpoint pole is selected. Move Pole also lets you select multiple poles. select the pole you want to edit by clicking anywhere near it. Some of the options on the Edit Pole dialog are unavailable unless Move Pole is chosen.e. which differentiates it from the 3D curvature comb and the deviation comb.

Multiple poles are selected by dragging a rectangle around them. If you choose Delta Offset as the Move Pole By option. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . select the pole (click near it) and use the Point Constructor to specify the new location. you have two choices for moving them:  If Destination Point is the current option. select the pole and enter the offset values in the Delta Offset dialog.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 427 2D Curvature Comb Move Pole There are three ways to move a single pole:    Place the cursor over the pole and drag it to its new location before releasing MB1.) If Destination Point is the current Move Pole By option. you can drag the poles as a group. Once the poles are selected. (This method does not depend on the setting of the Move Pole By options.

Lets you move the selected pole(s) on the plane of the view on which the cursor resides. If there are not enough poles in the file to maintain the curve's degree. The On a Plane option is not available until you have first used the Define Drag Plane option to specify the plane. If the pole is not on the plane that you define. End Curvatures Along Direction On a Plane On View Plane Points From File You can choose Points From File and identify a file. Moving the Pole After you specify the new pole. but the original degree and closed status of the curve are retained if possible. The end slope is only affected by moving the first two or last two poles. Option descriptionLets you change the shape of a curve near its endpoint without changing the end slopes of the curve. the Delta Offset dialog is displayed to let you enter the offset values. the modified control polygon and the modified spline are displayed.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  428 If Delta Offset is the current option. You must use a Series of Points type file. The Along Direction option is not available until you have first used the Define Drag Direction option to specify the vector. Lets you drag the selected pole(s) along a vector that you specify with the Define Drag Direction option. the current constrain is automatically set to Along Direction. The points from the file are read in and replace the original points. Tangents or curvatures assigned to the original curve are not maintained. These options only apply when dragging a pole: Constrain Options On Curve Plane End Slopes No constraints are put on the pole's movement or the spline's shape. the degree is reduced. When you have successfully defined a plane using the Define Drag Plane option. a plane that passes through the pole and is parallel to the plane you define is used instead. Constrain Options The Constrain options let you control the shape of the spline by restricting the movement of the pole or the shape of the spline. Lets you change the shape of a curve near its endpoint without changing the curvature. When you have successfully defined a vector using the Define Drag Direction option. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . the current constrain is automatically set to On a Plane. Lets you drag the selected pole(s) on a plane that you specify with the Define Drag Plane option. as shown in the figure below. The end curvature is only affected by moving the first three or last three poles. exactly as when creating the spline originally.

the following message is displayed: Cannot Move This Pole With Current Constraints Add Pole To add a pole to a spline:   Select the spline you wish to modify. the spline defining data is lost. You use this dialog the same way that you use the Assign Slopes dialog during spline creation. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . it changes the derivative (tangent) of the spline at a selected point and displays the edited spline. If you try to move a pole. Note When you add a pole.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 429 Note The first two or last two poles cannot be identical. Deviation and Threshold are used to evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. The shape of the control polygon changes. a knotpoint is added at the midpoint of the spline segment and the control polygon is recalculated for the entire spline. but it must remain unchanged to satisfy the specified constraints. Once you have selected the control polygon segment. while the shape of the spline is unchanged.  Change Slope When you choose this option. When you use the Change Slope option. the Change Slopes dialog is displayed. Select the control polygon segment where you want to add a pole.

unless the degree reduction is performed immediately after the degree has been increased.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 430 Note If the curve has least squares defining data. Change Curvature You can use the Change Curvature option to change the radius of curvature value at any specified point. however. allowing for a larger number of degrees of freedom when editing this spline. can only be increased. When you choose this option. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . one of the following error messages is displayed: Assigning Curvature Is Not Allowed on Splines With Degree Less Than 3 Assigning Curvature is Not Allowed on Fitted Splines  Change Degree This option lets you increase or decrease the degree of a spline. While increasing the degree of a spline does not change its shape. the Change Curvatures dialog is displayed. decreasing the degree generally only approximates the original shape. an error message is displayed: Cannot Decrease Degree Of Multi-segment B-spline Increasing the degree value increases the number of poles a spline has. When you enter the new value. Deviation and Threshold are used to evaluate the deviations between a spline and its defining data points. This prevents the curves from having sharp bends. You use this dialog the same way that you use the Assign Curvatures dialog during spline creation. Note You cannot change curvature on a spline whose degree is less than three. an error message is displayed: Degree Less Than Minimum In the same way. thus saving storage space and improving performance. if you enter a degree value greater than 24. The degree of a single segment spline can be increased or decreased. as shown in the figure below. Otherwise. The degree of a multiple segment spline. You cannot assign a slope value to an interior point. or on a spline created using the Fit method. Reducing a spline's degree decreases the number of poles and is often used to simplify a spline's representation. A specified slope may be flipped by 180 degrees because the direction of the end slopes are limited by the natural shape of the curve due to the least squares computation. only the end slopes are definable. an error message is displayed: Degree Greater Than Maximum If you try to reduce the degree of a multiple segment spline. you must specify an integer value between 1 and 24. If the degree entered is less than 1.

4.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 431  Move Multiple Points This option lets you move a segment of a curve without affecting the rest of the curve. Vector and Distance Lets you move the point along a specified vector at a specified distance. 8. Direction Point Lets you move the point using the Point Constructor. Select an end displacement point. 3. Specify an end displacement distance. 7. 6. you need to: 1. Specify a start displacement distance. along with two offsets. Select an end limit point. You select start and endpoints that define two segments on the curve. After you select the first start displacement point. you can choose from the following displacement methods: Distance Normal to Curve Lets you move the point at a specified distance normal to the curve. The second segment (displacement) identifies the portion of the curve that is moved. Choose a start displacement method and follow the procedures. The first segment (limit) identifies the portion of the curve to be modified. 2. Select a start displacement point. Select a start limit point. To use this function. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . 5. Choose an end displacement method and follow the procedures.

Also. the following error message is displayed: Second Displacement Point is Out of Order In order for the edit to be defined sufficiently. or both displacement points are allowed to coincide. the following message is displayed: Memory Error from Build Curve For periodic curves. the following message is displayed: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . For example.  Error Messages If you select the same point for both the first and second limit points. a limit point and both displacement points are not allowed to coincide. the normal vector is displayed and you are prompted to enter a distance value. If such input is detected. additional checking is performed during processing to identify interactive input that does not satisfy the conditions necessary for a valid edit. the new segment is joined with the one or two additional pieces that remain of the original curve. However. the following error message is displayed: Limit Points Coincide If you select a displacement point that does not lie between the two limit points. the following error message is displayed: Invalid Interactive Input The input data is passed to a processor that defines the edited portion of the curve. If the processor is unable to produce a curve the following error is displayed. you must indicate distinct segments for the new spline portion to be determined. the following error message is displayed: Too Many Zero Length Segments Indicated Errors may also be reported during processing. If this join operation fails.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 432 Distance Normal to Curve lets you move the point at a specified distance normal to the curve. Cannot Create Curve After you have defined the edited portion of the curve. if sufficient memory cannot be allocated. the following message is displayed: Displacement Point Must Be Between Limit Points If the placement of the second displacement point is not between the first displacement point and the second limit point. A negative value specifies a direction opposite that of the displayed vector. as you are not allowed to choose another method for the end displacement point. When you choose this option. this option does not subsequently appear on the menu if you choose one of the other options for the start displacement method. If this occurs. Note When you choose this option. you must use it for both the start and end displacement points. A single limit point and its nearest displacement point are allowed to coincide.

Decreasing the degree. this error message is displayed: Degree Less Than Minimum If you enter a degree value greater than the possible maximum. allowing it to mimic the undulations of its control polygon more closely.  Fit Reduces the data required to define a spline by "fitting" it to existing points that define the spline. You are asked to enter the desired degree. the following error message is displayed: Degree Greater Than Maximum Increasing the degree. If the degree entered is less than 1. as shown in the figure below. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . makes the curve "stiffer" and less sensitive to undulations (reversals of curvature) in its control polygon. reduces the stiffness of the curve. This option is most effective when used on a relatively smooth spline that has more points than necessary to retain the shape of the spline. as shown in the figure below. Define the control method for fit.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Unable to Join Curve Segments 433  Change Stiffness This option lets you modify the shape of a curve by changing its degree while preserving the number of control poles. To edit a spline using the fit method:   Select the spline you wish to modify. The minimum degree allowed is 1 and the maximum degree is equal to one less than the number of control vertices (poles) defining the curve.

Smooth Spline Dialog Options Source Curve The data source for sampling points and calculating the end slopes and curvatures. Threshold Smooth Redisplay Data Undo Note Match End Slopes or Match End Curvatures restrict the amount of smoothing that can occur. Note If you defined the number of segments when creating the spline.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 434 The control method for fit is defined using the same process as that described for creating a Fit spline. the Fit dialog shows the number that you defined. available by choosing the Show Graph option on the Curve Analysis dialog. If the spline being modified was originally created using the Fit option. If the curvature distribution does not improve during approximation or smoothing.) Redisplays the spline's points. each drag operation is considered to be one modification. the points used during creation are used to edit the spline. This helps you fit the spline to the original segment number that you defined. or select individual points to smooth. Automatically smooths all the points of the spline. Match End Curvatures matches the end curvatures and slopes of the edited spline and the source curve during approximation or smoothing. You can smooth the entire spline automatically. Segments Defines the number of segments that will be in the smoothed spline. Likewise. Smoothing a Spline drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . for a curve created through points. You will probably find the Curvature Graph option (Curvature versus Parameter Value) especially useful. try increasing the threshold. Splines have a degree of 5 after smoothing. the points used to perform a Fit edit will be the same as those used in creating the curve. Restores the spline to its state prior to the last modification. This option is generally most useful at the beginning of the smoothing process. Constraints Match End Slopes matches the end slopes of the edited spline and the source curve during approximation or smoothing. These options should only be used if you know that the end slopes or end curvatures of the source curve are correct. even if the spline's current segment number changed during editing. It can be either the original spline or the edited spline in its current state. When you use the dragging method. Approximate Updates the segments. If you try. the following error message is displayed: Assigning Curvature Is Not Allowed on Fitted Splines  Smooth Reduces variations in the curvature distribution of an open spline. You cannot change curvature on a spline that was created using the Fit method. The maximum distance that each point can move from its original location. limited by the Threshold and any Constraints you chose. Additional display options are available with Analysis→Curve. (You can further refine the smoothing by moving individual points.

arcs. and choose Approximate. Selection Intent is available while selecting the curve to trim. instead of letting the system smooth the entire spline. points. When you are finished. You can use bodies. 5. increasing the Threshold if you need to. Click OK to continue with the trim operation or Cancel to quit.) The system adjusts the point's position and modifies the spline each time you click near the point. (The Curvature Graph that is available from the Info menu . Continue smoothing individual points with this method. Define the Threshold. Local smoothing gives you control of both the amount and the location of smoothing. the software warns you that the defining data of the spline will be changed. To perform local smoothing. You can specify that the trimmed curve is associated with its input parameters. Or choose Smooth at any time to automatically smooth the curve. Note You cannot trim bodies with Trim Curve. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .may help you determine the points to adjust. (OK is always unavailable. until you are satisfied with the curvature distribution. click Trim Curve . faces. click MB1 near a point whose curvature distribution you wish to improve.) 5. Click Yes to continue with the trim operation or No to cancel. datum planes and datum axes as bounding objects when trimming a curve. Define the number of Segments you want in the smoothed spline. You can trim to (or extend to) curves. Choose the Original or Current (edited) spline as the Source Curve. you will want to control the amount of smoothing that occurs at each point on the spline. or cursor locations. based on bounding entities and segments of curves selected for trimming. choose Back or Cancel to dismiss the dialog. until the Threshold is reached for that point. 3. edges. edges.see above . Threshold and Smooth become active. You can trim or extend lines. On the Edit Curve toolbar. When trimming splines. the Associative option should not be selected. the software warns you that the creation parameters of the highlighted curves will be removed.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 435 In many cases. 2. 4. At this point. Trim Curve Use the Trim Curve command to adjust the end points of curves. To smooth a spline: 1. curves. planes. To select curves to trim from within a sketch. as well as while specifying the bounding objects. points. because the sketch cannot have a Trim Curve feature within it. Smooth the curve by clicking MB1 near individual points until you are satisfied with the curvature distribution. When trimming feature curves. faces. Where do I find it?   Choose Edit→Curve→Trim. conics or splines.

You can select curves. Click OK or Apply to create the trim curve feature. 1. 7. o Specify the curve extension method for the selected curve. b.   End to Trim Start — Trims. 6. select a direction from the Direction list. the trimming operation is performed on the chain as though it were one continuous curve. an oval is displayed at its start or end point. If the multiple curves you select form a chain of curves. faces. datum axes or planes using the Select Object options. Specify which end (Start or End) of the curve you want to trim or extend Specify the first bounding object. edges. (Optional) You can do the following: o Specify the state of the input curves after the trim operation. Trim Curve options Curves to Trim Lets you select one or more curves to trim or extend. Use the following options to select the bounding object: Object   Select Object Specify Plane Note Selection Intent is available. In the graphics window. no ovals are displayed. from the starting point of the curve to the bounding object.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING a. o Select the Trim Bounding Objects check box if you want to trim the bounding objects. Specify the Method as either Inferred or Defined. 8. use the vector options to specify the direction of the trim. Selection Intent is available. If you select multiple curves. or curves you want to trim or extend. or extends. or extends. Bounding Object 1 Lets you select objects from the graphics window for the first boundary against which the selected curves are to be trimmed. bodies. points. from the end point of the curve to the bounding curve. If you select Along a Vector. Select Curve Lets you specify which end of the curve to trim or extend. If you select a single curve to trim or extend. 9. (Optional) Select the second bounding object. End — Trims. or create a new datum plane using the Specify Plane options. select the curve. 3. Select Curve is active. 4. 5. or extended. 2. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Create a trim curve feature 436 Choose Edit→Curve→Trim to open the Trim Curve dialog box. In the Intersections group.

[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Appears when you select Specify Object in the Object list. edges. Specify Plane Inferred — This is the default plane type. Select the required plane type from the list. or cursor locations as the bounding objects. Point Constructor — Opens the Point Constructor dialog box. Intersection Specifies the direction method that the software uses to find object intersections. Vector Constructor — Opens the Vector dialog box. Click to see the vector type list. The selection method and options are the same as for Bounding Object 1. the second bounding object is also trimmed. Along Screen Normal — Trims or extends curves to the intersection of the bounding objects as projected along the direction normal to the screen display. then select objects supported by that vector. Available only when you select Along a Vector as the Intersection option to let you specify the vector direction for the trim operation. Along a Vector — Trims or extends curves to the intersection of the bounding objects as projected along the direction of the selected vector.  Method Inferred — Trims or extends curves at the bounding objects to the closest drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . points. Select from the following options:  Direction    Shortest 3D Distance — Trims or extends curves to the bounding objects at the intersection. Specify Vector Inferred Vector — This is the default vector type. You can change the vector anytime and select new objects. Lets you specify the method as Inferred or User Defined after you select an intersection option. Relative to WCS — Trims or extends curves to the intersection of the bounding objects as projected along the ZC direction. Plane Dialog — Opens the Plane Method dialog box. Bounding Object 2 This is an optional step. Select Object 437 Select Object — Lets you select curves. Select the required vector type from the list. marking the minimum distance measured in three dimensions. Appears when you select Specify Plane in the Object list. If you have selected the Trim Bounding Objects check box for the first bounding object. faces. You can independently set the End to Trim option for the second bounding object to Start or End. then select the objects supported by the type. Click to see the plane type list.

Linear — Extends the curve from either endpoint to the bounding object where drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . as specified by the Edit→Hide option. If two bounding objects are selected. Subsequent updates have no effect on the input or bounding curves. the selected point on the bounding objects determines which intersection to use. Note Input curves are hidden only at the initial creation of the trim curve feature. associative. which is a duplicate. associative copy. New curves are created based on the output of the trim operation and are added as new objects. features that were children of the original curves. the selected point on the curve being trimmed determines which intersection to use. When you use Replace. Specifies the state of the input curves after the trim operation. The original curves change to a dashed font. Select from the following:   Keep — keeps input curves in their original state and unaffected by the trim curve operation. Replace — Replaces or exchanges input curves. Select from the following options: Curve Extension   Natural — Extends the curve from its endpoint along the natural path of the curve. Associative Makes the output trimmed curve associative when the check box is selected. An associative trim results in the creation of a TRIM_CURVE feature. If a single bounding object is selected.  User Defined — Trims or extends curves at the bounding objects to a userdefined intersection point. trimmed copy of the original curve.   Delete — Removes input curves. Hide — Hides input curves. Note To select curves to trim from within a sketch. become children of the trimmed curves. New curves are created based on the output of the trim operation and are added as new objects.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 438 intersection point. the Associative option should not be selected. that is when you clear the Associative check box. Input Curves Additional options are available for non-associative curves. with the trimmed curves. Reverse Direction Settings Reverses the displayed vector direction for the trim operation. to be more easily visible against the trimmed. because the sketch cannot have a Trim Curve feature within it. Specifies how to extend the selected curve.

For more information. Objects Selected Note This option is not available in the edit mode. If this check box is not selected. Before After Line 1 Line 2 Selection cursor drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .   Trims the bounding objects. as shown in the following figure.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 439 the extended portion of the curve is linear. Keeps bounding objects selected after you click Apply. The portion of the curves selected. In this case. Circular — Extends the curve from its endpoint to the bounding object where the extended portion of the curve is circular. 6. with respect to their intersection point. The portion of each bounding object that is trimmed depends on where the bounding objects intersect the curve . None — No extension is performed for any type of curve. see Bounding objects. forming a corner. you must manually click each selection step. An exception to this is when you have selected the same Trim Bounding curve for both the Bounding Object 1 and Bounding Object 2. Automatic Selection Progression Automatically advances you through each selection step when this check box is selected. so that you do not have to Keep Bounding select them again if you want to trim additional strings using those same bounding objects. the Objects bounding object is trimmed as though it were a single curve being trimmed to two locations. is trimmed. Trim Corner Use the Trim Corner command to trim two curves to their intersection point.

the option is available when a sketch is active so that you can edit non-sketch curves. the software warns you that the defining data of the spline will be deleted. Each segment is created as a separate entity and is assigned the same font as the original curve. On the Edit Curve toolbar. The defining points for splines are deleted. You can choose Cancel to cancel the operation or OK to continue with the trim operation. they trim back from the zero-degree position. When trimming circles. Note Divide Curve is a non-associative operation. click Divide Curve . as shown in the figures below. The new objects are placed on the same layer as the original curve. 7. click Trim Corner . Where do I find it?   Choose Edit→Curve→ Divide. Divide Curve Use the Divide Curve command to divide a curve into a series of like segments (line-to-line. arc-toarc). On the Edit Curve toolbar. However.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 440 When trimming splines. without having to disable the active sketch. Before After Point where the circle is selected Before After Point where the circle is selected Where do I find it?   Choose Edit→Curve→Trim Corner. Divide Curve is not applicable for sketch curves. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

The figure below shows an example of segmenting a curve (ellipse) using the Equal Parameter method. From the Segment Length list. select Equal Segments. 4. In the Type group. 6. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Divide a curve into equal segments 1. In the graphics window. type the number of segments you want to divide the curve into.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING a. The figure below shows an example of segmenting a curve (ellipse) using the Equal Arc Length method. Before After Selected curve The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed on the graphics screen Resulting number of segments of equal length after the divide curve operation. Before After Selected curve Ellipse center Resulting number of segments after the divide curve operation. 3. In the Number of Segments box. select Equal Parameter or Equal Arc Length from the Option list. 441 2. Click OK or Apply to divide the curve. 5. Click Edit→Curve→Divide to open the Divide Curve dialog box. select the curve to divide. Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed on the graphics screen. Select Curve is active.

Divide a curve into arc length segments Note ―Arc length" is a mathematical term and should not be confused with "Arc" which is an NX object. If the two curves selected do not intersect. 4. In the Bounding Object group. select another type of object to use to divide the curve. 5. select By Bounding Objects. In the Bounding Object group. Optional. the following error message is displayed. 7. select the type of object to use to divide the curve. Select additional objects of the newly defined object type to divide the curve. . select the curve to divide. Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed on the graphics screen. Select Curve is active. 442 2.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING b. In the graphics window. In the Type group. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Note In most cases. from the Object list. Divide a curve by bounding objects 1. you need not indicate an approximate intersection point. when you select a bounding object. the software prompts you to indicate an approximate intersection point between the bounding object and the curve to be segmented. Click Edit→Curve→Divide to open the Divide Curve dialog box. Resulting number of segments after the divide curve operation. c. Before After Selected curve First bounding object Approximate intersection point of first bounding object with curve Second bounding object Approximate intersection point of first bounding object with curve . 3. Select the objects to divide the curve. from the Object list. click OK or Apply to divide the curve. 8. Once you have selected all desired bounding objects. If the curve to be segmented and the bounding curve are both lines. No Intersection Point 6.

where total arc length = 5. 4. 443 Select the curve near the end where you want to begin segmenting the curve. select Arc Length Segments. 2. Select the required Method.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Arc Length is not only for arcs. Click OK or Apply to divide the curve. is active. is active. Click Edit→Curve→Divide to open the Divide Curve dialog box. and creates segments of your specified length along the curve until it reaches the other end. Partial length Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed in the graphics window. select the curve to divide. select At Knotpoints. 4. the following error message is displayed. 1. select the curve to divide. In the graphics window. is displayed as Number of Segments. d. 5. In the Type group. Click Edit→Curve→Divide to open the Divide Curve dialog box. 1. Select Curve 3. Before After Full segments Point where the arc is selected. Specify the length of each segment in the Arc Length Segment box. Arc Length Greater Than Or Equal To The Total Arc Length 6. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Note You cannot use a value which is equal to or greater than the arc length of the curve to be segmented. In the graphics window. Divide a curve at knot points A knotpoint is the endpoint of a spline segment. The length of any remaining portion of the curve is displayed as Partial Length. 2. If you attempt to do so. The software begins at the end you select. In the Type group. The number of full segments created. based on the total length of the curve and the length input for each segment. Select Curve 3.

e. and so on. Click OK or Apply to divide the curve. the first screen position indicated becomes knotpoint number 1. select At Corners.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 444 Selecting By Knotpoint Number lets you segment a spline by entering a specific knotpoint number. Before After drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . is active. 2. the curve is automatically deselected and the software displays the following error message: Cannot subdivide . Knotpoints are numbered in the order specified when the spline is created. select the curve to divide. the second screen position becomes knotpoint number 2. Select the required Method. if you create a spline using knotpoints indicated by screen position. Selecting By Corner Number lets you segment a spline by entering a specific corner number. Before After Selected spline First knotpoint Second knotpoint Resulting splines after the divide curve operation. In the Type group. 5. 5.curve has no corners. For example. Click Edit→Curve→Divide to open the Divide Curve dialog box. Select Curve 3. Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed in the graphics window. Note If the selected spline does not have any corners. Divide a curve at corners 1. 4. In the graphics window. Click OK or Apply to divide the curve.

that is. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . curves." which is an NX object. A knot point is the endpoint of a spline segment. Select from the following options: Equal Segments By Bounding Objects Divides a curve into equal segments.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 445 Selected spline First corner Second corner f. Arc Length Segments Note "Arc length" is a mathematical term and should not be confused with "arc. planes. Arc Length is not only for arcs. Divides a curve using selected knot points. Divide Curve options Resulting splines after the divide curve operation. At Corners Note If the selected spline does not have any corners. Divides a curve based on the arc length defined for each segment. The curve parameter depends on the type of curve (line. Select Curve Segments Appears only when the Equal Segments type is selected. at knot points where there are bends in the spline.curve has no corners. Divides a curve into segments using bounding objects. Type Sets the method by which to divide the curve. or spline) being segmented. and/or faces. At Knotpoints Curve to Divide Lets you select the curve to divide. arc. the curve is automatically deselected and the software displays the following error message: Cannot subdivide . Note The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments and are not actually displayed in the graphics window. like points. Divides a spline at corners. using the length of a curve or a specific curve parameter.

Arc Length Divides a curve based on the arc length defined for each segment. the total included angle of the arc is divided by the number of segments entered. Sets the type of bounding objects you select or specify to divide the curve. 2 Points — Lets you select a line between two points as the bounding object. based on the parameter characteristics of the curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 446 Equal Parameter — Segments the selected curve equally. If you select an arc or an ellipse. Equal Arc Length — Divides the selected curve into separate curves of equal length. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Lets you select curve bounding objects. based on the total length of the curve and the Arc Length input for each segment. Number of Segments Specifies the number of separate curves the original curve is divided into. the total linear distance between the start and endpoints is divided by the number of segments entered. Point and Vector — Lets you select a point and a vector as the bounding objects. If you select a spline. Select from the following types:      Object Existing Curve — Lets you select existing curves as bounding objects. Note This is different from the Number of Segments option that appears for the Equal Segments type. Project Point — Lets you select a point as the bounding object. Bounding Object Appears only when the By Bounding Objects type is selected. Select Object Specify Intersection Lets you indicate an approximate intersection point between the bounding object and the curve to be divided. By Plane — Lets you select a plane as the bounding object. the segments are related to the distance between knot points. Appears when Existing Curve is the selected Object type. Curve parameters vary with respect to each curve type: Segment Length    If you select a line. Arc Length Segments Appears only when the Arc Length Segments type is selected. Displays the number of full segments created. Number of Segments Displays the length of any remaining portion of the curve after the number of full Partial Length segments created is based on the total length of the curve and the Arc Length input for each segment.

Knot Points Appears only when the At Knotpoints type is selected. You can change the vector anytime and select new objects. Sets the knot point method. Line by 2 Points. Click to see the vector type list. Knot Number Lets you specify the required number of knot points. All Knot Points: Selects all knot points on the spline to segment the curve. Specify Plane Inferred — This is the default plane type. . Lets you select a plane as the bounding object for the By Plane option. Select form the following options:   Method  By Knot Number: Segments a spline by the specified knot points number Select Knot Point: Lets you select segmentation knot points by indicating a position close to the knot points with the graphic cursor. then select objects supported by that vector.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 447 Lets you select or specify a point as the bounding object when Project Point. Appears when you select the By Knot Number method. Plane Dialog — Opens the Plane Method dialog box. or Point and Vector is the selected Object type. Specify Point Specify Point — Lets you select a point on the geometry. Click to see the plane type list. You can change the vector anytime and select new objects. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Reverse Direction Reverses the displayed vector direction. Appears when you select the Select Knot Point method to let you select the required Select Point knot point using Select Point Corners Appears only when the At Corners type is selected. Lets you specify a vector as the bounding object for the Point and Vector option. The knot points are displayed when you select the spline. Specify Vector Inferred Vector — This is the default vector type. Point Constructor — Opens the Point Constructor dialog box. then select objects supported by that type. Vector Constructor — Opens the Vector dialog box. Select the required vector type from the list. Select the required plane type from the list.

You can move most object types. If the default is Modal. This ensures that the new fillet is drawn in the proper direction. The creation parameters of a fillet can be edited using any of the following options: Radius Radius Default New Center Lets you specify a new radius value for the fillet. Select Corner: Lets you select corners by which to divide the curve. Note Any associated drafting objects are automatically updated when you change the center and/or radius of the fillet. Lets you choose whether to specify a new approximate center. 8. Stretch Curve Use this option to move geometric objects. Define the parameters to use for creating the modified fillet. Lets you specify the required number of corners. Warning Failure to select the proper fillet objects may corrupt associated boundaries and crosshatching. while simultaneously stretching or shrinking selected lines. You must select the objects to be edited in a counterclockwise direction. the radius value remains constant. All Corners: Selects all corners on the spline to segment the curve. The value of the radius defaults to the radius of the selected fillet or to the last user specified radius. Edit Fillet Edit Fillet lets you edit existing fillets. Select the objects to edit. Toggles between Fillet and Modal. To edit an existing fillet: 1. the radius value defaults to the fillet radius each time a fillet is edited. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . and no trim. These methods are the same as those used when creating fillets. Corner Number Select Point Appears when you select the By Corner Number method. 2. 3. If it is set to No. 9. When set to Fillet. Appears when you select the Select Corner method to let you select the required knot points using Select Point .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Sets the corner method. but you can only stretch and shrink lines. This option behaves similar to the two-object fillet creation technique. the current fillet arc center is used to start the calculation for the modified fillet. Select the trim method you wish to use. There are three possible trim methods when you are editing a fillet: automatic trim. Select from the following options: Method    448 By Corner Number: Segments a spline by the specified corner number(s). until a new radius is entered or the radius default is changed to Fillet. manual trim.

the following conventions apply: drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . groups. components. Selecting different objects. Select the geometry you wish to stretch. Basic Stretch Curve Procedure To perform a stretch: 1. If you choose Apply to perform the stretch. faces and edges. YC. Point to Point Displays the Point Constructor dialog to let you define the reference and destination points. You can use the Undo button repeatedly until all previous Apply operations are rolled back. The option is available when a sketch is active so that you can still edit non-sketch curves without having to disable the active sketch. Note Stretch Curve is not applicable for sketch curves. choose the Undo button in the Stretch dialog. Reset Values Resets the three delta buffers to zero. If you choose Undo after an OK or Cancel (from the Edit drop-down menu. 3. You can then add new objects and deselect any previously selected.) Undo Lets you change the geometry back to a previous state. Delta To use the Delta method. or choosing Cancel. either individually or using a rectangle. and use Apply again. the geometry rolls back to the condition prior to entering the Stretch function. 2. The geometry is moved YC.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 449 Note Stretch Curve works for all object types except sketches. The objects are repositioned back to their previous locations. When you stretch a line endpoint. you are not satisfied with the results. enter delta XC. Choose Stretch from the Edit Curve dialog. clears the Undo buffer. or the MB3 popup). bodies. Delta ZC or stretched by these delta values. Delta or Point to Point. and ZC values. The Stretch dialog is displayed. after you have used Apply. Specify the method. the Stretch dialog remains open and all objects remain selected. and zero length lines are deleted. Geometry that is moved is translated by the delta values. YC and ZC values. Stretch Dialog Options Delta XC. (The Stretch dialog updates the delta XC. you wish to use to stretch the selected objects Choosing Apply or OK extends or moves the selected geometry from the reference point to the destination point. The objects remain selected as each Undo is entered. If. or to their locations after the previous Apply.

Lines selected with the rectangle method are extended if the rectangle contains only one of the line's endpoints. or to a total curve length. Line endpoints that are going to be stretched are highlighted with an asterisk after they are selected. You can use bodies. a. Curve Length Use the Curve Length command to extend or trim a curve by a given curve length increment. The default value is 0. Otherwise. 10. If a line to be stretched is contiguous to a fillet. You can edit the input before accepting the results. You define the rectangle by indicating two diagonal corners. If only a part of an object (except a line) is within the rectangle.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING  450     Lines that are single-selected are moved if the selection point is near the midpoint of the line. as well as the endpoints of lines you want to stretch. Selecting objects using a rectangle operates as described under Robust Selection methods for the Class Selection Tool. click Curve Length . When you select a curve or a string of curves to edit. Note You cannot trim bodies. The curve length increment is the length used to extend or trim from the original curve. the line endpoint nearest the selection point is extended. the tangency of the fillet to the line may be lost. Use Trim Curve to adjust the endpoints of curves based on bounding entities and segment(s) of curves selected for trimming. DesignLogic allows for greater efficiency. Associated geometry is adjusted when Update is performed.0. the object is not selected. sheet bodies or solid bodies. faces. On the Edit Curve toolbar. the line is moved. Lines stretched to a zero length are deleted if the stretch operation is accepted. a preview of the curve is available on the screen. Otherwise. datum planes and datum axes as bounding objects when trimming a curve. edges. Create a curve length feature with incremental extension Use this option to extend or trim a curve by a given curve length increment. points. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The rectangle must encompass the objects you want to translate. Where do I find it?   Choose Edit→Curve→Length. curves.

Select the curve to extend or trim. Optional. In the Limits group. Incremental curve length using circular direction Original curve selected Start point End point Extended incremental curve length of circular direction from the start point Extended incremental curve length of circular direction from the end point Resulting extended curve drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 451 1. An example of extending a curve by its incremental curve length is shown in the figure below. Choose from the Method option to specify the shape of the direction of the curve to be trimmed or extended. Set the Length Option to Incremental. A negative value truncates the curve. 3. Note Delete and Replace are available only if you clear the Associative Output check box. Choose from the available Input Curves options to specify whether you want to Keep. You can also change the length by dragging the onscreen handles. Hide. 5. 8. Delete or Replace the input curves. Note You can enter either a positive or negative value for the curve length. Click Edit→Curve→Curve Length to open the Curve Length dialog box. 6. 9. 2. enter the required values for the curve length increment in the Start and End fields. The following figure is an example of an incremental curve length feature. Click OK or Apply. The values in the Start and End fields are dynamically updated in the Curve Length dialog box when you drag the handles. Set the End Option to either Start and End or Symmetric. Select Curve is active. Optional. 7. If you do not want associative output. A positive value generates an extension of the curve. 4. clear the Associative Output check box.

Set the Length Option to Total. Optional. Click Edit→Curve→Curve Length to open the Curve Length dialog box. Set the End Option to Start. Optional. Select the curve to extend or trim. Enter the required curve length value in the Total field. Select drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . Total curve length is the distance from the start of a curve to the end of the curve. 4. 5. 9. Click OK or Apply. An example of extending a curve by its total curve length is shown in the figure below. following the exact path of the curve. You can also change the length by dragging the onscreen handles. clear the Associative Output check box. Hide. 6. Create a curve length feature with total extension 452 Use this option to extend or trim a curve by its total curve length.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING b. 1. Note Delete and Replace are available only if you clear the Associative Output check box. Delete or Replace the input curves. Curve Length options Curve Lets you select the curve to trim or extend. End or Both. 8. Choose from the available Input Curves options to specify whether you want to Keep. If you do not want associative output. Choose from the Method option to specify the shape of the direction of the curve to be trimmed or extended. The value in the Total field is dynamically updated in the Curve Length dialog box when you drag the handles 7. Total Curve Length Using Linear Direction Original curve selected Start point Extended curve length of linear direction Resulting extended curve c. 2. Select Curve is active. 3.

Start — Trims or extends the curve from its start point. Limits Start Lets you specify a value for the length of the trimmed or extended curve at its starting point. Select from the following options:  Length  Incremental — Extends or trims a curve by a given curve length increment. Total Note This option is available only for the Total length option. Note End options are also available on the shortcut menu when you right-click on handles. end or both directions of the curve. Lets you specify a total length value by which to extend or trim the curve. Choose from the following options:   End   Start and End — Trims or extends the curve from both its start and end points. Choose from the following methods:  Method   Natural — Trims or extends the end point of the curve along the natural path of the curve. Symmetric — Trims or extends the curve from either start or end point. Note Method options are also available on the shortcut menu when you right-click on handles. This option is available only for the Incremental method. Lets you select the shape of the direction of the curve to be trimmed or extended. This is the default extension method. following the exact path of the curve. This option is available only for the Total method. The curve length increment is the length used to extend or trim from the original curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Curve Extension 453 Lets you extend or trim the curve by the selected curve length. Linear — Trims or extends the end point of the curve along a linear path leading to a tangential extension. End — Trims or extends the curve from its end point. Total curve length is the distance from the start of a curve to the end of the curve. Total — Extends or trims a curve by its total curve length. This option is available only for the Total method. Lets you specify a value for the length of the trimmed or extended curve at its end point. End Note Start and End options are available only for the Incremental length option. Circular — Trims or extends the end point of a curve along a circular path. Lets you trim or extend the curve from the start. at an equal length from both sides. Settings drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

This is the default output option for a nonassociative curve. The default is taken from the tolerance setting in Modeling preferences. Tolerance Lets you specify the tolerance value used to trim or extend the curve. Repeated use of this command on a spline makes it increasingly linear. Replace — Replaces the original curve. Knots are inserted at the boundary of the region and within the region until there are enough free control points to reduce the variation to the desired levels. 11. the deviation between the original spline and the resulting spline is displayed at the location of the maximum deviation. Hide — Hides the original curve. As you smooth a spline. Lets you specify the output options for the selected curves. Input Curves If you clear the Associative Output check box. two more output options are available for non-associative curves:   Delete — Deletes the original curve. This is the default output option for an associative curve. the Smooth Spline command deletes the defining data and the associated dimensions of the spline. Smooth a B-spline in a specified region or across the entire spline. You can:   Smooth manually created splines that have minor imperfections depending on the number and location of picked points. Associative trimmed curves update automatically if the input parameters change. Original spline drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . select from the following options:   Keep — Retains the original curve.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Associative 454 Makes the extended or trimmed curve associative when selected. For associative curves. Note If the selected spline is associative. Smooth Spline Use the Smooth Spline command to remove minor imperfections in a spline by minimizing the curvature magnitude or curvature variation.

In the graphics window. select the spline you want to smooth.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Smoothed spline Where do I find it? Application Modeling. On the Edit Curve toolbar. Modified start and end locations 6. Click OK to continue. In the Smooth Limits group. In the Smooth Spline dialog box. 3. If the selected spline is associative. 5. or enter values in the boxes to define the section you want smoothed. select the level of constraint you want for the start and end of the B-spline. Smooth a spline 1. 2. click Smooth Spline . a warning message is displayed. drag the %Start and %End sliders. The Select Curve option is active in the Curve to Smooth group. (Optional) Under Constraints. or choose Edit→Curve→Smooth Spline. Start location End location Selected B-spline with arrow indicating the maximum deviation value and location 4. set the Type list to Curvature. Shape Studio Toolbar Menu Edit Curve→Smooth Spline Edit→Curve→Smooth Spline 455 a. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 .

9. and the maximum deviation from the original curve. Smooth Spline options Type Type list Lets you specify the type of algorithm you want to use to smooth the B-spline. 8. In the Smoothing Factor group. In the Modification Percentage group. is displayed in the graphics window. the maximum deviation updates dynamically.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 456 7. Original spline Smoothed spline b. The shape of the spline updates. Original spline Modified spline after changing the smoothing factor and modification percentage 10. drag the slider to specify the level of overall smoothing you want for the B-spline. Available drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . You can continue to change the smoothing factor and modification percentage values until you get the required shape. As you make additional changes to the smoothing parameters. Click Apply to smooth the B-spline. drag the slider to specify the number of times the smoothing operation is to be performed each time you click Apply. click OK to smooth the B-spline and close the dialog box. When you get the required shape. Click Apply after each change to view the updates in the graphics window. indicated with an arrow.

The spline updates dynamically in the graphics window. Drag the Smoothing Factor slider to the number you want. %End You can drag the %End slider. press the Ctrl key. %Start You can drag the %Start slider. Constraints Lets you to constrain either end of the spline you are modifying. there may be insufficient freedom of movement to perform the operation.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING options are:   457 Curvature — Smoothes a B-spline by minimizing its curvature magnitude. Continuity constraints are used to lock the position of the appropriate poles so they are not free to move during smoothing. knot points are inserted. To disengage it. or enter a start percentage value in the box. Select Curve Smoothing Limits Specifies the smoothing limits for either a partial spline or the entire spline. Smoothing Factor Specifies the number of times to carry out the smoothing operation each time you click Apply. Micro-positioning is on by default with this slider. If you smooth a portion of a spline that does not have sufficient degrees of freedom for the smoothing process. For example. Continuity constraints take precedence over smoothing. causing the spline to have more segments. one at the start of the spline and one at the end. Curve to Smooth Lets you specify the curves to smooth. Select the boundary constraints from the list of available options. Handles are placed on the selected spline. Slider The goal of this option is to provide access to a series of steps between the starting and ending conditions of the smoothing operation. Specifies the end location. when smoothing splines of a lower degree while using continuity constraints. This option can be useful to balance the smoothness of a spline object against its deviation drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 Start. Specifies the start location. Modification Percentage Changes the percentage of overall smoothing that is applied to the selected spline as you drag the slider. Curvature Variation — Smoothes a B-spline by minimizing its curvature variation. End Slider . or enter a start percentage value in the box.

while preserving the start and end points of the original spline. Original spline to shape Template spline Original spline and the corresponding surface modified using the template spline Where do I find it? Application Modeling. Results Maximum Deviation Shows the deviation between the original spline and the resulting spline. inflection. press the Ctrl key. One hundred percent provides the maximum smoothing that can be achieved. Zero percent causes no change to the original curve. Use the shaping options to determine the degree or segmentation of the resultant spline. Micro-positioning is on by default with this slider.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 458 to a scanned image or other specification data. You can:    Dynamically shape the spline using the slider. Shape Studio. Modify a spline using a template spline This example shows how to modify the shape of an existing spline using a template spline. 12. and all other applications that support curve commands Toolbar Edit Curve→Shape by Template Menu Edit→Curve→Shape by Template a. peaks. Apply the shape changes to the selected spline or a copy of the selected spline. segmentation. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . The template spline affects the degree. and acceleration of the original spline. Shape by Template Use the Shape by Template command to transform a spline from its current shape to match the shape characteristics of a template spline. To disengage it. or modify the properties of the original spline. You can either match the degree or segmentation of the template with the original spline.

In the graphics window. select the template spline. You can change the direction of the start point by first deselecting the template spline (Shift+MB2). drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . In the graphics window. and then selecting a point on the spline that is nearest to the end you want as the start point. When you select the template spline. On the Edit Curve toolbar. Click the middle mouse button to advance to the Template Spline 5. Spline to shape is active.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 1. temporary arrows are displayed at the point nearest to the selection. selection step. Drag the slider to change the shape of the spline while retaining both its start and end points and the characteristics of the template spline. o Clear the Edit a Copy check box. to modify the original spline. and the word "Template" appears next to it. an arrow is displayed at the point nearest to the selection. select the spline to shape. 3. You can change the direction of an individual spline to shape by deselecting it (Shift+MB2). 459 . The arrow indicates the start direction for the shape operation. 6. Set the following output parameters: o Select the Refit Curve check box to match the degree and segmentation of the spline to shape with the template spline. click Shape by Template Template. As you select the splines to shape. or choose Edit→Curve→Shape by 2. 4. and then selecting it on the end you want as the start point.

Shape by Template options Option Selection Steps Description Spline to shape Lets you select the splines you want to shape. and you can select other splines to shape using the current template. Note You can select only one spline as the template spline. and edits a copy. Template Spline Lets you select a spline to act as the template to change the original spline. The original spline and the altered shape are simultaneously displayed in the graphics window. the spline to shape adopts its characteristics. As you drag the slider all the possible curves between the start and end point that match the template spline's shape characteristics are displayed. b. o Click Apply to make the change to the spline to shape permanent. 9. Slider Lets you dynamically change the Spline to shape. 8. Refit Curve Forces the spline to shape to match the degree and segmentation of the template spline. The template spline remains selected. drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . (Optional) Click Deviation Analysis to check the deviation as you edit the spline to shape.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING 460 7. When you specify the template spline. You can: o Click OK to make the change to the spline to shape permanent. Edit a Copy Keeps the original spline unchanged. Click OK to finalize the changes made to the spline to shape. and exit the dialog box.

drive24ward NX-PLM 2011 年 11 月 5 日 . to dynamically generate graphics and numeric deviation data. the template spline knots are inserted into the spline to shape. Shape by Template Refit Curve When the Refit Curve check box is selected the degree and segmentation of the spline to shape are forced to match the degree and segmentation of the template spline. The template spline has knots that are not in the spline to shape. However. The Deviation Gauge command works differently when accessed from the Shape by Template dialog box. This can be useful as you edit the Spline to shape. This can result in the new spline possibly having a higher degree or a higher number of segments than the original spline. When the Deviation Gauge command is accessed from the Shape by Template dialog box. plus any change in degree and segments required by the template spline. You can make adjustments to the selected spline. in which case the spline to shape has its degree increased to the degree of the template spline. Shape by Template Deviation Analysis When you click Deviation Analysis. In this case. d. If you edit multiple curves simultaneously. the Deviation Gauge dialog box opens. thus creating additional segments.[NX8 HELP] – MODELING Deviation Analysis 461 Opens the Deviation Gauge dialog box. c. the object selection option is not enabled. When accessed directly. When the Refit Curve check box is not selected the spline keeps its original shape characteristics. The deviation gauge object remains on the display and is saved with the part file. the deviation gauge object is temporarily created between the animated spline to shape and its original shape. the Deviation Gauge command automatically creates a deviation gauge object superimposed onto the selected objects. the Deviation Gauge dialog box settings are applied to all selected splines. The spline to shape keeps its original degree and segments in the following conditions:   The template has a higher degree. The Deviation Gauge object is deleted when you complete the shape by template operation and click OK or Apply.